diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/67921-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67921-0.txt | 10686 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 10686 deletions
diff --git a/old/67921-0.txt b/old/67921-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index cca2daf..0000000 --- a/old/67921-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10686 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of Poseidon’s Paradise, by Elizabeth G. -Birkmaier - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: Poseidon’s Paradise - The Romance of Atlantis - -Author: Elizabeth G. Birkmaier - -Release Date: April 25, 2022 [eBook #67921] - -Language: English - -Produced by: Richard Tonsing and the Online Distributed Proofreading - Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from - images generously made available by The Internet Archive) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK POSEIDON’S PARADISE *** - - -[Illustration: Adapted from Ignatius Donnelly’s map of Atlantis, page 47 -of the “Atlantis,” by permission of Harper & Brothers. Cleit, Chimo, and -Luith are names fictitious.] - - - - - POSEIDON’S PARADISE - _The Romance of Atlantis_ - - - BY - - ELIZABETH G. BIRKMAIER - - - SAN FRANCISCO - The Clemens Publishing Co. - 415 MONTGOMERY STREET - 1892. - - - - - COPYRIGHT, 1892, - BY ELIZABETH G. BIRKMAIER. - _All Rights Reserved._ - - - - - CONTENTS. - - - PAGE. - I. A DECLARATION OF WAR 5 - II. QUEEN ATLANA 20 - III. ATLANTIS VERSUS PELASGIA 29 - IV. THE PELASGIAN CAPTIVES 38 - V. THE ABDUCTION 55 - VI. THE VOICE 67 - VII. THE TEMPLE 79 - VIII. POSEIDON’S FESTIVAL DAY 98 - IX. THE ‘SILENT PRIEST’ 111 - X. LIGHT ON THE PATH 127 - XI. THE HAPPENING OF THE UNEXPECTED 142 - XII. THE EARTHQUAKE CONFOUNDS 153 - XIII. IN THE ‘DEEPS’ 162 - XIV. A TIMELY TORRENT 176 - XV. THE ALTAR FIRES GO OUT 198 - XVI. THE SILENT ONE SPEAKS 217 - XVII. THE SINKING OF THE ISLAND 237 - XVIII. PYRRHA 253 - XIX. THE BEGINNING OF PEACE 269 - XX. HAPPY PAIRS 275 - XXI. IN PELASGIA 291 - - - - -“_Time dissipates to shining ether the solid angularity of facts. No -anchor, no cable, no fences avail to keep a fact a fact. Babylon, and -Troy, and Tyre, and even early Rome are passing into fiction. The Garden -of Eden, the sun standing still in Gibeon, is poetry thenceforward to -all nations._”—EMERSON. - - - - - POSEIDON’S PARADISE. - - - - - CHAPTER I. - A DECLARATION OF WAR. - - -It was thousands of years before the Christian era—how many thousands no -chronicler has stated. And the island lay, as through the ages past, -fair and imperial in the Atlantic. Though now was it becoming wanton, -even to its undoing. Else would not this be written. - -Midsummer was upon this Atlantis, upon the islands attendant that served -as stepping-stones to the continents beyond. Under the soft -sensuousness, the morn was taking richer glow, the streams brightening -to gold, the gardens and vineyards glorifying in green; whilst hill and -mountain grew alluring in shadow and color, the palaces lustrous in -their tri-tinted stones, and the temples’ syenite a gleaming red that -rivaled the flashing orichalcum studding domes and pinnacles. The great -island was a gorgeous mosaic: and its setting, sapphire, that royal -stone emblematic of calm and truth; for the laving waters were as serene -as blue, in such being all suggestive of that repose which comes of -perception of the true. The whole was a glory. - -About Cleit, that royal city gracing the stream Luith, in the -southeastern part of the island, there was an unusual stir. This day was -to be observed one of the most ancient, and therefore simplest, of the -customs of Atlantis. The king and royal rulers were to give audience to -the principal captains of the nation, and receive the certificates of -their prowess for the year. And now, from Cleit’s harbor, which was a -few miles southward of the city, at the mouth of Luith, were speeding -the galleys of Cleit’s captains; whilst from points north, east, south, -and west, the many other captains were hastening, that all might meet in -the grounds of the royal palace before noon of this auspicious day. - -Upon the great marble landing place, these captains came together, about -them thronging the people in gayest holiday attire. Most evident was it -that the latter still took pleasure in this old-fashioned observance, -that they wished not to fall behind in its celebration, notwithstanding -the times were changing so wofully. Many had been the prognostications -of the few conservatives remaining that erelong this simple, this most -ancient custom, would come to naught. Indeed, most of these had averred -privately that the meeting of the year before would prove the last. - -Yet here were again convening these mighty captains—size being a -consideration of their office. Here, again, were they towering above the -average Atlantean, tall as he was. Fine was it to note their flashing -eyes, their grand bearing, as they imparted such information as they -were free to give to the curious, fast-questioning ones; but finer to -witness the expanding eyes of the latter as their ears took in the -wonder, the verity of it all! - -But the great silver gong was sounding. It was noon. Then men, women, -and children burst into acclamations. Already were the captains forming -into line, with the captain general at the head. Again sounded the gong. -Therewith, the line filed along the marble pathway to the palace, -followed by the cheering throng. - -But gradually the throng quieted. Ever was the palace neared reverently. -There was a hush, when, from out the thick foliage, it arose upon them -lustrous in its stones of red, white, and black, its facings of -alabaster, its columns of marble and orichalcum, its red pinnacles;—a -palace well befitting this land of glamour. - -Like all the other palaces of the island, this was simple of -construction. The main plan consisted of rectangles set about a great -court, these rectangles being two-storied. In the lower story, light was -admitted through large apertures protected by curtains and shutters of -hard wood set in at will. Additional light was also admitted from the -upper story, which was supported by columns and open at the sides, -curtains excluding the sunshine at pleasure. Some of these columns -extended from the lower floor to the roof; others rested on the walls of -the lower story, where the thickness would permit; and each was many -volumes in its inscriptions and sculptures. - -The captains mounted the grand portico with its columns of marble and -orichalcum, each innumerable volumes; passed through the narrowing -portal, guarded by its colossal winged bulls, to the great hall; and -thence to the state chamber—on the right, still followed by the throng. - -Great and glittering was this oblong state chamber. Its high, arched -ceiling of ivory and bronze was rich in gilding. The walls were paneled -in ivory overlaid with silver, many of the panels being inscribed with -the laws of Poseidon and Atlas. The pavement was of blue and white -marbles. To this fell from the apertures hangings of finest yellow -linen. The seats were of carved ebony; and at the farther end were the -golden throne, and the ivory chairs of the rulers, priests, and nobles. - -With arms folded on their breasts and heads bent low, the captains -advanced until they stood a goodly row before their king. He, of name -Atlano, sat high on a dais raised above another dais; and about him were -ranged the royal rulers. On the lower dais sat the priests and nobles, -the priests being to the right. - -When the apartment could hold no more, the gong sounded. Thereupon the -chamberlain, who stood out upon the lower dais, made the sign; and low -bent these that had just entered before their king, until the -chamberlain said, “Ye will arise.” - -The king then waved his scepter. As one, the priests and nobles stood to -intone a welcome to the captains. Afterward, arose the royal rulers to -smile and bow in greeting. - -The white raiment and silver circlets of the priests were in strong -contrast to the gorgeous robing and jeweled headgear of the rulers and -nobles. But the king was dazzling in his royal purple robe, his -scintillating crown, and the wondrous mantle sacred to himself. This -last was ingeniously fashioned of finest, rarest feathers, varying in -color from cream to orange, and was of such length as to sweep the floor -behind. Though well he bore this aggregation of rich hues. For Atlano -was handsome in the best Atlantean type, though his expression was -harsh, cruel. But he was softening somewhat at sight of these brave -captains standing in such humility before him. And, smiling, he -addressed them. - -[Illustration] - -“Captains, thy king giveth greeting.” - -They responded, “O most gracious of kings, Atlano, long may thy great -self thus beam upon thy captains!” - -Atlano inclined his head. The rulers, priests, and nobles intoned: - -“Long, O most gracious king, Atlano, may thy captains thus come before -thee!” - -“Long live the king!” returned the captains. - -Then followed an invocation to the gods by the aged high priest Olto, -his son, the chief priest Oltis, assisting. Thereafter, the rulers, -priests, and nobles sat down, and the king addressed the chamberlain. - -“Shafo, if it seemeth good, the captains may now tell us of their work.” - -The chamberlain pointed with his wand: “Captain General, thou wilt -begin.” - -The captain general stepped out from his fellows, and, in measured -tones, replied as if to the king: - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, this I state to thy great self: I, -captain of the war vessel _Atlas_, since leaving the harbor of Cleit, -eleven moons since, have sailed around the country of the Afrites, and -up its eastern coast. At many places, we fell upon the black people, and -took of their gold and ivory; and then sent them into the inner parts to -get incense trees, nutwoods, ebony, apes with dog heads,[1] monkeys with -long tails, and greyhounds. It is two weeks since we came into harbor, -and yielded our cargo. This showeth its worth, and stateth the sums we -of the vessel merit.” - -Bowing low, the captain general handed a roll of papyrus to an -attendant, who laid it upon a table below the dais. - -The chamberlain then pointed his wand toward the captain first in line. -He stepped forward, and spoke in uncertain tones that slowly -strengthened: - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, this I state to thy great self: I, -captain of the trading vessel _Mestor_, came into Chimo thirty days -since from our people of Chimu,[2] whither I sailed twelve moons ago, -bearing a cargo of dried fruits, grains, and rare woods. There I found -our people building a temple to the great Amen, that in shape is like -unto a pyramid, and in size is half a mile around. Already are the -temples, palaces, and tombs of Chimu looking as ours. And great is the -decking in gold and silver, for the mines are not far. Of gold, silver, -and gems I bring to Chimo large stores. This showeth the worth of the -cargo, and the sums which we of the vessel merit.” - -The captain handed his roll to the captain general, who, in turn, handed -it to the attendant. When this captain had resumed his place, the next -captain, at beck of the chamberlain, stepped out to continue: - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, this I state to thy great self: I, -captain of the war vessel _Azaes_, left Autochthin seven moons since to -bear to the fair green island[3] in the north a band of our people, and -with them left the means of living for the time of twelve moons. On my -way from there I ran in the passage to the Middle Sea[4] to look about a -little, but at once sped back upon seeing some large vessels, strange -and threatening. It is twenty days since I came into Autochthin. I bring -to thee, O most gracious King, this written word of the planting of our -people in the island, of their further needs, and of the sums that we of -the vessel merit.” - -And the captain handed in his roll. - -At mention of these unknown vessels, the king’s scarcely-concealed -indifference vanished. He looked surprised, then alarmed. With -increasing emotion, he glanced from rulers to nobles to find their -wearied expressions had, at least, become interested. - -But on went the harangues. One captain had sailed beyond the western -seas, and northward up a mighty river to the colony Missos.[5] Another -had sailed around the country of the Afrites, and eastward to that -sultry land that supplied them with gems. Another had been to the land -of the Eskaldi.[6] Thus ran the reports until it was the turn of the -last captain but one. He stepped out with an air important; and, in more -important tone, began: - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, to thy great self I would state that -I am captain of the vessel _Paero_. It is eleven moons since I left for -Khemi,[7] with a cargo of rare woods, grains, and wool. I bring from -Khemi green stone, red granite of Syene, and the byssus of the Middle -Sea. Yesterday came I back to Cleit; and therefore have I not my roll. -But within a day will it be ready.” - -But this captain, instead of returning to his place, stood waiting. - -“What wilt thou, Sir Captain?” asked the chamberlain. - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, to thy great self I would state -more.” - -Most eager became the expressions of king and nobles. The captain paused -until the chamberlain signed for him to continue. - -“Most gracious king, a people across the Middle Sea, to the north of -Khemi, causeth fear in the lands about it because of its quick rise to -power. It is not long since this people passed over from the far east, -and now it ruleth the sea. It is magic.” - -The king’s red skin deepened to purple. In a voice grown hoarse, he -exclaimed: - -“The name of this people!” - -And the chamberlain iterated, “The name of this people!” - -“O most gracious king, Atlano, their land is Pelasgia. They are called -Pelasgians. Their king is Pelasgus.” - -“They have a king, then?” - -This the chamberlain also iterated, as he did the ensuing questions. - -“O most gracious king, Atlano, they have a king.” - -“Know they how to war?” - -“O most gracious King, they are fond of peace; and think but of trade -and tilling the ground.” - -“More! More!” - -“O most gracious King, I know no more.” - -“Let him to his place. Cause some other captain to tell me more!” - -The captain who had put back from the Middle Sea stepped out, getting -the start of the only captain yet to be heard from. But the latter was -willing to bide his time. At beck of the chamberlain, the former -declared: - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, then was it the vessels of this -people that so troubled us. Nothing like them have I seen for size and -strength.” - -The king turned to left, to right, demanding fiercely, “Hear ye this? -Hear ye this?” - -Senil, the most venerable of the rulers, arose. - -“Senil, what wilt thou?” - -“King Atlano, we hear; and it seemeth evil.” - -“What is the thing we shall do?” - -“O most gracious King, that will we do which seemeth good to thee.” - -The king’s face testified to his emotions. His anger had given way to -wild triumph. He ejaculated: - -“Senil, Rulers, Nobles, we will bring them to naught! It shall not be -said that any power holdeth the sea with Atlantis!” - -He turned to regard the captain, who had not as yet resumed his place; -and muttered: - -“If this be true—if this be true.” - -There was then heard a meaning cough from the last captain, who had been -so forgotten. The king noted this, and said: - -“Shafo, there is one captain who hath not been heard.” - -At the sign, this captain stepped forth with an air even more important -than had been that of the captain of the _Paero_, and the captain who -had withdrawn from the Middle Sea bowed back to his place. Of due weight -were this captain’s tones. - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, to thy great self I would state that -I, the captain of the trading vessel _Osir_, came back but yesterday to -Elasippa from our land of Shaphana,[8] after bringing there grain, -cotton, and linen, and taking in corn, wine, and oil. There I heard much -of this new power, for, of late, its vessels come within the harbor of -Shaphana. Thus far this Pelasgia thinketh not of war, but of trade. Her -vessels are marvels of strength and speed.” - -“Hear ye this?” interrupted Atlano, turning to rulers and nobles, “Her -vessels are marvels of strength and speed!” Then, of the captain, he -demanded: - -“Thou sayest not that thou didst see aught of these?” - -The chamberlain iterated this. - -“O most gracious of kings, I have to say that I saw them. Two were -speeding into harbor as we left it. Nowhere have I seen vessels that -come nigh them!” - -The king arose and stared at this captain, until he perforce stammered: - -“O most gracious king, I have not my roll; but in two days will it be -ready.” - -But not of him, nor of his certificate, was the king thinking. His -thought was for this new, menacing power. After some minutes’ -absorption, his tones rang fierce: - -“Is there more?” - -The chamberlain iterated, “Is there more?” - -“O most gracious of kings, there is no more.” - -The captain was waved back to his place. The king, standing most erect, -addressed all. - -“Rulers, Priests, Nobles, Captains, Leaders, People, let us look to -this. Let it be the one mind to fall upon and crush this Pelasgia! What -will ye?” - -Senil arose. - -“Senil, what wilt thou?” - -“King Atlano, we will as thou.” - -The other rulers arose. - -“Rulers, what will ye?” - -“King Atlano, we will as thou.” - -Phiro, a noble young and ardent, here arose. - -“Phiro, what sayest thou?” - -“Gracious King, if it pleaseth thee, let those who are for war bend the -knee.” - -“It is well. Rulers, Priests, Nobles, Captains, Leaders, People,—ye that -are for war bend the knee, and let us beseech the gods.” - -Great was the stir in the vast assemblage. Then every soul bent the -knee, even to the king, while the feeble tones of the high priest began -to be heard, asking for blessing on this so suddenly conceived -undertaking. When he had finished, the king arose, the others still -remaining on their knees, until he said: - -“Ye may arise.” - -When all were standing, and the hush was deepening, the king exulted: - -“It is one voice. Here let us make the vow to sweep from the earth this -new power—these marvels of vessels. Swear!” - -Every right arm was pointed heavenward, every voice said solemnly, “We -swear!” - -“So be it. Now will we to work. The Leaders!” - -There was a mighty stir. This indeed meant war. - -The chamberlain beckoned; and the leaders, who were next in rank to the -captains, stepped from their places against the walls on right and left. -Tall and stalwart were they, and attired much like the captains. They -wore not the ordinary loose-flowing robes, but close-fitting tunics, -short, loose lower garments similar to the trousers of to-day, and high -boots of soft skins. On their heads were helmet-shaped caps of red -linen; and about their waists were broad bronze belts, inscribed with -their office and number. - -These leaders formed a considerable body in the kingdom, each province -having its quota. Their office was this: When war was declared, each was -to furnish one-sixth of the portion of a war chariot with its two horses -and riders; also, a light chariot with a fighting man on foot and -charioteer; also, two heavy-armed men, two archers, two slingers, three -stone shooters, three javelin men, and four sailors.[9] - -Of course these leaders present belonged to Cleit; but it was understood -that whatever the king commanded them, the nine rulers would command -their own. - -To these leaders the king spoke impressively. - -“Leaders, ye know your duty. This day begin measures for most bitter -war.” - -On their knees sank the leaders, and there remained until ordered by the -chamberlain to arise. Then their spokesman answered: - -“O most gracious of kings, Atlano, thy leaders, as thou hast said, know -well their duty. They will to it this day.” - -Then, with faces to the king, they moved to their places. - -The king addressed the rulers. - -“Ye, kin rulers, will speed on the morrow to your cities, and then give -orders to your leaders. Ere the coming moon is old, gather your vessels -within this harbor. Then on to lay Pelasgia low!” - -The assemblage, as one, echoed: - -“Yea—on—to lay Pelasgia low!” - -The exultant king continued: - -“This further will I say: Daily, at the noon hour, let every noble come -to this state chamber, that plans may be made, and given out. Let every -captain make well ready his vessel for the men, food, and weapons of -war. Let the people be of one mind through it all.” - -A murmur of acclamation arose and swelled, the smiling king permitting -it, until it became a mighty shout. This the people without heard, and -answered—forgetting reverence—until the hangings of the palace moved. -And still the king stood smiling. - -When there was quiet, he said, with warmth: “Thus endeth this gathering -of the captains. Brave captains, well have ye done. Thy king knoweth -pride beyond measure. The gods be with you.” - -The captains, after bowing to the floor, stood proudly erect. The high -priest gave the blessing. Afterward, when the king, with his rulers, -nobles, and priests, had sat down, the chamberlain waved his wand. -Slowly the assemblage went out, with faces ever to the king. Deeply they -saluted him at the threshold, before disappearing. Of these the captains -were the last to withdraw, as they had been the first to enter. -Exultant, with the king, all passed out to the perfect day, to spread -wide this unlooked-for result of the convention. - -Yet still continued the day in its soft, serene loveliness. - -The king, rulers, and nobles remained to confer. But this conference was -interrupted somewhat when the waiting islanders without received word of -this declaration of war. Again, forgetting reverence, they became -jubilant. So much did these Atlanteans love conquest. Those within the -state chamber were but stimulated, doing quick, vigorous work. - -One most important measure of this conference was the unanimous -agreement that the queen should reign during the king’s absence. The -nine rulers (descendants of the nine younger brothers of Atlas, eldest -son of Poseidon) were to remain at home in order to sustain her, and be -subject in a body to her call. Further, though this was spoken only -inwardly, they could the better watch each other. As each made solemn -vow to be loyal to country and queen, Atlano, of his mocking spirit, -laughed within. - -For, how could they do otherwise? Would not he bear with him, his ablest -nobles, his chiefs, his captains, his warmen, his sailors? And would -they not return laden with spoils, strengthened, rioting of victory? -What could stand against them? Well might these rulers vow to be loyal! - - - - - CHAPTER II. - QUEEN ATLANA. - - -From the state chamber the king sped buoyantly through the great hall, -with its lines of bowing officers and attendants, each as smiling as -himself over this war prospect; and thence, to the right, along the -corridor, to the queen’s bower room. - -Most eloquently did this large apartment testify to the industry of the -queen and her ladies, as theirs were the embroidery upon the hangings of -byssus and the coverings of the couches, the plaiting of the great mats -upon the inlaid floor, the festooning of the flowers from the satinwood -walls. The room was a veritable bower in its brightness, fragrance, and -floral adornments; and, as the climax to its charms, three of its sides -opened upon the fairy-like, private garden, which spread to the -eastward. - -The queen’s ladies were throwing over a couch the covering they had just -finished as the king entered. After low salutations, they withdrew. The -queen, meanwhile, had arisen for greeting; and, sad as it may seem, was -wondering at her husband’s cheerfulness of mien. - -Queen Atlana was tall, gracious, lovely. She was Atlano’s cousin, being -the daughter of his father’s brother by a princess of Khemi. Owing to -her Semitic blood, hers was not the complexion of the true Atlanteans. -In her, the mixture of the red and yellow had produced a richness of -skin whose tints were of the olive and the peach. Her eyes were brown, -large, soft, and lustrous; her hair, black and waving, and worn in high -braids about her head. Her features were straight, the forehead receding -but little, and the mouth beautiful and tender. - -Her robe was of fine white linen, embroidered in buff; and hung from her -shoulders in folds to the floor, being confined at the waist by a golden -girdle. Her perfect arms were bare and without ornament. With a grace -bewitching, she moved toward the king, her face flushing sweetly, and -said low in love: - -“With joy I greet thee, Atlano.” - -He took her extended hand and led her to her couch, responding, as he -sat down beside her, “With the like feeling do I greet thee, Atlana.” - -Her eyes lighted gladly. Such crumbs had begun to fall rarely from the -king’s table, and, therefore, had now the fullness of the banqueting -board. Smiling, she said: - -“Thou art happy, Atlano. Comest thou from the meeting of the captains?” - -“The captains left an hour hence. Since then we have had thought for -matters of weight.” - -There was a strange exultation about him. She looked at him in inquiry. - -“Thou askest not of the meeting.” - -“It was in my thought. Tell me of it.” - -“There were the like olden speeches of cargoes taken out and cargoes -brought back, of the planting of our people in new lands, and their -doings; of spoils taken. Pfui! how sick am I of it! How great is my wish -to put some other in my place to hearken to it all!” - -“But the people would not have it. It hath ever been the custom of the -kings.” - -“A custom of the fools! How weary I grow of it! This day I was almost in -sleep. But one thing I heard that roused me!” - -“What heardst thou?” - -He was rubbing his hands gloatingly, his long, thin, cruel hands. - -“What thinkest thou, Atlana?” - -“I think not. Tell me.” - -He waited, delighting to prolong her impatience; and then drawled: - -“We have heard—that—will force—us—to—” - -“To what?” - -“To war.” - -She looked so incredulous that he laughed. “I say the truth, Atlana. We -are to war.” - -“To war!” - -Her face had blanched, yet she could not believe. - -“Yea, Atlana, to war. A new power showeth itself to the north of Khemi. -It aimeth to hold the Middle Sea. We go to crush it!” - -She grew faint at his relentless tone. However, she managed to plead: - -“It cannot harm us. Spare it.” - -“Spare it! Much would it spare us should it grow stronger. Even now is -it mighty enough to thrust us to one side. Do us harm! That is my fear.” - -“Atlano, I beseech that thou wilt seek no quarrel with this people.” - -“There is no need to seek. I will make one. I will show them that -Atlantis still hath being—that she is not dead of her power, her wealth, -her spoils, her glory. Spoils! Here will be another—a grand one! Here -will another land mourn its being—those marvels of vessels sink beneath -the waters, or, better, swell the numbers of our own. Here will Atlantis -show another line to that dreaming Khemi that doth not rouse even when -the smallest haven goeth beyond her in treading the sea. What are her -piles of stone to one strong, free breath of the sea? And what a glory -to hold every breath as we have until now! Base Khemi—to be thus given -over to her sands, her works of stone!” - -“Atlano, call to mind that I am fond of Khemi. It is the land of my -mother.” - -“One would know it when thou wouldst bid me spare this Pelasgia.” - -“Thou art wrong to trouble this people.” - -“Such is what I might look for from thee. Ever art thou against me!” - -“When have I ever been against thee?” - -He tried hard to recall an instance, but could not. Less angry, he -insisted: - -“As a wife, thou hast the right to think with me—hast the right to bid -me good speed when I go to crush this people.” - -“Thou! Thou wilt not go?” - -“I go to crush them. The gods have my vow. Here have I rusted too long. -I am as king of Khemi!” - -“Thou wilt be killed! Atlano, thou wilt be killed!” - -“Then wilt thou be queen,” he returned derisively. “Thou art next in -line with all thy Khemian blood, and these Atlanteans love thee. Ill -would they take it should Oltis come after me—for his father counteth -not. That smooth Oltis—well doth he wish it! But I shall not be killed, -if but to bring to naught the hopes of that cunning priest. He thinketh -I see not through him.” Loud rang his mocking laugh. - -The queen arose, and, standing before him, besought: - -“Atlano, for the sake of our land and people, war not. Think of our -Atlanteans who will not come back—of their darkened homes. Call to mind -how, in the time of thy father, we lost our people in warring against -Fun-hi. And what evil came of it, for it brought on the death of thy -father!” - -“Yea, but it made the way for me.” - -“Atlano!” - -“Say on, ‘Atlano!’ Well should I sicken of my name!” (He had arisen to -face her vindictively.) “I say to thee, Atlana, we are to war, war. And -now I have done with it—and thee.” (He turned to go.) - -“So be it—war! But I warn thee, it is one thing to war, another to win.” - -“Put not upon it an evil eye, Atlana. If thou dost croak, I fear.” (He -was again facing her.) - -“I croak not, but I warn thee. The cause is not just.” - -“Thou art in evil temper this day. It is best that I go to the temple -and talk with Oltis. Ah, thou dost shake!” - -“Why art thou ever with Oltis if thou trustest him not?” - -“I like to draw him on, to make him believe I think with him, to make -him take my way in the end. I like to see him, the proud one, -bend—bend—because I am the king. He is a toad.” - -“But thou goest to this toad from me.” - -“Yea, but wert thou more as he I would stay with thee.” - -“Think. Thou didst call him a toad.” - -“I mean, wert thou not so bent of mind. Oltis never sayeth nay to me. It -would be better, Atlana, couldst thou ever think with me.” - -“It is but this time, Atlano. Come, sit with me again. I will be more -calm.” - -“Nay, I go.” - -“Go not to Oltis.” - -“I like the mirth of it.” - -“I fear him. He will do thee evil.” - -There was another mocking laugh. “If thou didst but know, I think evil -toward him. I like him not. And now my good wishes I leave thee.” - -“Go not.” - -Seeing there were tears in her eyes, he stooped to kiss her carelessly; -then, drew from her restraining hand and went out. - -Atlana was left to weep inconsolably. Well she loved her husband; and -hard to bear was his growing indifference. Now had come this new terror, -this suddenly sprung up cloud of war, and the injustice of such a -contest could presage only defeat. For the remainder of the day she -continued alone, given over to despondency, and dreading lest any eye -should witness her plight. - -Before night, many were the aching hearts on the island beside the -queen’s. The wives of high and low degree had alike fallen to sorrowing. -Mourning was rife among the females of the land, and grew in intensity -from the hard-heartedness of the males, who had no patience with such -puerile manifestations, and, therefore, laughed at them, derided. When -some wives took courage to hint of the possibility of defeat, they were -so withered by scorn as to run for hiding places; and it was days before -quite a goodly number rallied sufficiently to show themselves. The women -of Atlantis could imagine and suffer thereby as ably as their sisters of -to-day. - -As the preparations grew brisker, more despairing became these Atlantean -women. As for the queen, she only brightened when in presence of the -king. Then she was strong. Thus he knew not of the agony she was -enduring—could not have appreciated it had she disclosed it. Once he -even complimented her upon her sensible way of accepting the matter, she -smiling back in a weary manner that was lost upon him, so centered was -he in self. But, day by day, she grew more fond, if possible, so that -his eyes opened somewhat; and, at last, he exclaimed: - -“Atlana, where didst thou get such heart? Well would it be if thou hadst -children.” - -“Children! Torment me not!” - -The cry was tragic. The king, though amazed, scoffed: - -“Thou sayest well. They are but a torment.” - -“I meant not that they are a torment. It is torment that I have them -not!” - -Wildly she spoke, unsealing her lips upon this subject, and to the -astounding of the king, as she continued: - -“Why speakest thou of children, and at this time? It is hard to bear. To -have no child to look upon, to nurse, to clasp! Here is the heart of a -mother, but where is the child to cling to it, to bless it? I am -alone—alone!” - -She bowed her head to hide the bursting tears. The king, touched, -attempted consolation. - -“Grieve not, Atlana. I care for children but to vex Oltis. As life is, -they are ever a trouble.” - -“I care not about Oltis. For trouble, fathers have no trouble. It is the -mothers alone—who have to bear—that have the right to murmur. But I -should never murmur.” - -“Nay, for a queen need have no care.” - -“I should have care, and hail it, were I many times a queen.” - -Such strong yearning was in her face that the king exclaimed: - -“Atlana, what is it? What is upon thee? Is it this matter of war?” - -“Day and night I think of naught else. Hard have I tried to be brave. -Atlano, go not from me. The pain I cannot bear.” - -“There is no need for pain. We go to lay Pelasgia low. And I shall come -again. Think, thou art the wife of a king. Trouble me no longer with -bodings of evil. Would we had a child. It would take my place.” - -Atlana sighed, and raised her head, determined to say no more. Relieved -that her tears had ceased, Atlano said more gently: - -“Let us sail down to the harbor. There have the vessels of all the ports -gathered. It will cheer thee but to look upon them.” - -Fine cheer, indeed, was this for such an aching heart! The queen looked -at him, thinking he meant to jest. But no, his earnestness was too -apparent. Already had his face brightened at the prospect. So she forced -a smile, and, calling her ladies, gave the necessary orders. - -Shortly, herself, the king, and a few of the nobles, with their wives, -went gliding down Luith to the harbor. But great heaviness of spirit was -beneath the smiles of these women; and this heaviness increased when, -upon arriving at the harbor, they beheld the many war vessels in brave -array, with pennants flying, and men crowding their decks. Bitter was it -to listen to the exulting speeches of Atlano and his nobles; bitterer, -to listen to the acclamations of those on deck and shore. The nobles’ -wives looked from their queen to each other, but could derive no -comfort, no hope. There was not one to lighten the gloom of the others -among these suffering women. - - - - - CHAPTER III. - ATLANTIS VERSUS PELASGIA. - - -A few days later the Atlantean fleet sailed to the eastward to invade -this upstart Pelasgia—these Pelasgians that had come from Western Asia -by way of the Cyclades to make an abiding place in the Greece of to-day, -as well as the islands of the Ægean Sea. - -A mysterious people were the Pelasgians. Their appearance among the past -known races of the earth was sudden; their extinction has been complete. -Yet we know they were peaceful, and fond of agriculture; that, under the -favoring skies of their adopted land, they became the greatest merchants -and sailors of most ancient times, antedating the renowned Phœnicians; -that from Greece they passed over to Southern Italy, there, perhaps, to -inaugurate that “golden age of Saturn,” when peaceful agricultural -pursuits superseded the piratical habits of the Carians and Leleges. But -this is little. - -However, their monuments endure. These are the vast Cyclopean remains of -Greece and Asia that puzzle while they amaze. Evidently intended for -fortification, they were built of huge polygonal stones, fitted together -without cement and mortar, so perfectly as to survive the structures of -succeeding ages and races. These are all that are left to point to a -people who, though forced everywhere to yield to the conqueror, must yet -have been possessed of indomitable energy and perseverance. Though -ineffaceable are their invisible imprints for good. - -Under Pelasgus, their leader and king, this colony won renown so quickly -that it is no wonder Atlano should doubt its existence. But this -knowledge proved the impetus he had been desiring. Now there was new -life in the mere thought of the stifling of this menacing people. - -Thus the fleet went gaily sailing along the Middle Sea, so high were the -hopes, so positive the convictions of success. - -The skies were favorable: and the time dragged not, because of the -ravages made upon the coasts to the left. At length the islands off the -southern shore of Greece were sighted; and there came into view what -could only be some Pelasgian vessels. As the great fleet bore down upon -them, these took to flight, and made such good speed, the while warning -other vessels they met, that all were out of sight before reaching the -southern point of Attica.[10] - -Up the western coast they speeded to their port,[11] whilst the -Atlanteans, mistaking their route, rounded Attica to sail up its eastern -coast. Nothing here invited them except some outlying hamlets, which -they pillaged and destroyed. When well along between Attica and Euboea, -the fleet lay to, and many warriors disembarked. - -These advanced through Bœotia, the surprised Pelasgians fleeing before -them into Thessaly. But quickly did Thessaly prepare for defense, -calling as leader Deucalion, who, with his family, dwelt at Larissa, on -its southern shore. - -This Deucalion was revered and beloved; and it was whispered that he -possessed mysterious powers that could come only of the gods. So none -but himself must lead these ready Thessalonians. - -He, most willing, hastily gathered his neighbors. And then these -Pelasgians of Thessaly met the invaders, gave them fierce battle, and -forced them back, even through Bœotia, and into Attica. Meanwhile, a few -of the Atlantean vessels had proceeded along the coast of Attica and -Bœotia, seeking pillage; and, all too soon, came upon Larissa, whose -simple homes and cultivated lands were on either side of its gentle -stream and by the coast. Here, at this inviting spot, they paused to -descend upon its women and children, every man having gone with -Deucalion. When home after home had been pillaged and destroyed, these -defenseless ones fell before the red warriors to plead, agonized, for -mercy. But when unanswered, spurned, their importunities changed to -despairing cries for Deucalion, which the marauders were only too quick -to distinguish. - -Thus the leader inquired of one of the shrieking women, in a tone she -could not fail to understand, “Deucalion?” - -She, foolish one, by her gestures and pointing, made them comprehend -that this Deucalion had led his fellows southward to meet the invading -foe. - -Grim was then the laughter of the Atlanteans. To this succeeded desire -to know which was Deucalion’s home. They were about to inquire, when the -same woman, of her frenzy, cried: - -“See—Pyrrha, Pyrrha! The wife of Deucalion!” - -The Atlanteans, following her glance, again comprehended. Under some -trees, at a little distance, were kneeling, entwined, a woman and two -children. The leader eagerly asked: - -“Is that the wife of Deucalion?” - -The woman, understanding, bowed in affirmation. - -“And the children of Deucalion?” - -Again the woman bowed her “Yes.” - -There was a swift movement of the chief and his men toward the group. -Perceiving this, Pyrrha, with her children, arose, and the three stood -in passive dignity. But less swift grew the approach of the marauders, -as they the better beheld this Pyrrha, this fair, noble, most lovely -woman, who, with the mother fear in her eyes, was holding tightly a -youth well grown and a little maiden. For the moment a feeling akin to -reverence came upon the fierce men, so that they halted. But the leader, -overcoming this, went still nearer, and demanded: - -“Give me the children!” - -Of her intuition, Pyrrha understood. Tighter grew her grasp, as she -besought mercy with her eyes. But the chief hardened only the more, for -he was calculating upon the ransom that these children must bring. So he -laid his hand upon the youth, strong in his purpose. - -Then fine it was to behold the youth’s flashing eyes, his proud crest, -and the brave air with which he turned to repel this mighty-looking -warrior. Though Pyrrha, by tone and grasp, endeavored to restrain him, -as she, in her Pelasgian, pleaded for mercy. Vain, however, were her -sweet tones. The chief’s hands went about young Hellen; the cruel men -pressed sore; and Pyrrha and her daughter, bereft, sank upon their -knees, heart pressed to heart, to cry to heaven for help. - -But again went the hands at their work. The mother was drawn back -ruthlessly, and the maiden wrenched from her arms. Brave, unyielding, -Pyrrha struggled to her feet, prepared to follow, to drag her children -back. But the evil spirits held high their captives, and gathered about -them in mass as they moved onward to the ships. Dark became everything -to Pyrrha; her lovely body tottered, and she fell unconscious. Heaven at -last was kind. - -The other women, with their children, collected about her. But to all -efforts for her revival, she responded not. So they forbore, to fall on -their knees, and gaze dumbly at the vessels, which, with booty and -captives, were already beginning the journey southward. When these were -out of sight, they arose, their thought only for the miserable creature -who had revealed Deucalion’s family to the despoilers. As one, they fell -upon her with their tongues; and of her it need hardly be told that, for -the balance of her life, it would have been better had she never been -born. - -The despoilers hastened southward to hear evil. The brave Atlanteans who -had disembarked to destroy these Pelasgians, had met with defeat. Yes, -Atlano had been pressed back into Attica by Deucalion, and there had -been routed by a small army under Pelasgus. In consequence the ranks of -the Atlanteans could only tear their way to the coast, many dying as -they went of exhaustion or wounds, so that Atlano with the other -survivors appeared but as a handful to those awaiting them on the ships. - -When Atlano was again on his own vessel, his rage and humiliation were -so intense that none dared to venture near him to tell of the presence -of the two young captives. Even Maron, his chief attendant, kept aloof -and eyed him in fear—the great, grim, swarthy Maron, who had never known -awe until now. - -But the king had not been long on board when, as he stood gazing upon -the shore of this uncrushed Pelasgia, he heard a sound as of sobbing, -and that not far from him. Surprised, he listened for some seconds, and -then signed to Maron. The latter came forward eagerly, while the others -of the vessel scarcely breathed in their interest. - -“What is that noise, Maron?” - -“Most gracious king, it cometh from the two children made captive on the -coast above, at a place where some of our vessels landed for booty.” - -“Who took them?” - -“Most gracious king, it was the chief captain, Zekil.” - -“Let them be brought before me.” - -Maron signed to an officer, who hastened to the middle of the vessel, -where there was a small apartment used for storage, to return with the -two miserable ones. When these beheld the fierce, dark red face of the -king, they cried out in alarm. - -“Bring the rod,” ordered the king, “and let Zekil come before me.” - -The two children had fallen on their knees to supplicate for -deliverance. This Atlano well understood from their signs, their tones, -their agony. With contempt he looked down upon them until the bronze rod -was brought. At his word a blow upon the back of each brought the -hapless pair to their feet. But their tears had ceased, and, with eyes -shining of indignation, they held to each other. Their shoulders were -smarting, but the pain was as nothing beside the indignity, for these -children had known only tenderness and reverence hitherto. - -Then, as the youth Hellen turned from his sister to flash at him a look -as haughty, as fierce, Atlano smiled in derision, and asked: - -“Maron, is this the son of a king?” - -“Most gracious King, he is the son of a great chief. Zekil knoweth; and -yonder he cometh.” - -Soon Zekil was on board, and kneeling to the king. When bidden to arise, -he stood up as if well satisfied with himself. - -“Zekil, whence came these children?” - -“Most gracious King, we brought them from the coast above.” - -“Whose children are they?” - -“Most gracious King, the people whom we fell upon were ever calling upon -their father, as if he had all power. It was ‘Deucalion!’ ‘Deucalion!’ -on every side.” - -“Deucalion!” Atlano gasped the word. Then, of his astonishment and -exultation, cried: - -“Ha—Deucalion! Art thou sure?” - -“Most gracious King, their father is Deucalion.” - -“Knowest thou who is Deucalion? Knowest thou who he is, Zekil?” - -Even Zekil was shrinking back at the fury of his tone. - -“He is the one who headed the horde—that drove us back—into the way of -loss, ruin. But for Deucalion, we would have swept from earth this -Pelasgia! - -“Yea, and as they thronged about him, and pressed against us, it was to -the cry of ‘Deucalion—Deucalion!’ And we fled before this ‘Deucalion!’” -He hissed the word at the terrified children. - -“Now to pay him—now to pay him! And it shall be fine ransom! Ah, what -ransom will I have for you, ye thrice-cursed children of Deucalion!” - -He raised his hand as if to smite. Æole, comprehending, looked full in -his face, calmly but beseechingly. And, as he, for the first time, -obtained a clear view of the sweet, innocent, fair, lovely countenance -of this child of thirteen, and received the appealing look of eyes -beautiful like violets, eyes of a color unknown in Atlantis, the hand, -losing force, fell to his side. - -Further, as he continued to stare into these eyes, and note the gestures -of the small, perfect hands, he understood that she was imploring their -return to Pelasgia. But, at his frowning shake of the head, she -desisted, to speak in quick, firm tone, to his comprehension: - -“Then free my brother, and I will stay.” - -At perceiving the king’s threatening hand, Hellen had raised his own to -ward off the blow. Great was his astonishment when the king’s hand fell -to his side, as he was not aware of Æole’s look or gestures. But, at her -words, he started, shocked, and faced her. - -“Æole, thou knowest not what thou askest. Thinkest thou I will go, and -leave thee here, to the mercy of these?” And he looked with scorn at -King Atlano, who was quick to interpret his words. - -In spite of himself, Atlano could not but admire Hellen’s courage. He -glanced from one to the other, the uncowed demeanor of both so -impressing him that he said to those in attendance: - -“They are a noble pair, this brother and sister. If we take naught of -the spoil of Pelasgia with us to Atlantis, we are rich in them, for -their value must bring us fine ransom, and before the sun of the morrow. -Meanwhile, let them be held in honor. Maron, lead them whence they -came.” - -Then he turned to speak apart with Zekil. And Maron conducted the youth -and maiden to the outside room. - -Later, there was a conference of the king and his few surviving nobles -and chief captains when it was decided that the Atlantean fleet would -remain where it was, and, on the morrow, dictate terms for the ransom of -the captives. - -After Atlano had sent away his nobles and captains, he went to look upon -the sufferers, and found them reclining upon some cushions, in the very -stupor of grief. They heeded him not as he stood and watched them. And -many forms did his thoughts take as he noted their beauty and grace. The -one that would recur most often was, “I would almost keep them in spite -of many ransoms.” - -But, as it proved, there was no ransom on the morrow. For, that night, -the vessels of the Pelasgians, hurriedly brought together from every -available point, so harassed and destroyed a portion of the Atlantean -fleet that the remainder was forced to speed off in the early morning, -leaving to an uncertain future the wished-for ransom. - -Thus the invading fleet passed away. And the bitterly weeping children -stood straining their eyes at the beloved, the fast disappearing shores. -At about the time that their dear Pelasgia was beyond their view, -Deucalion rejoined his still unconscious wife, and learned from those -about her of this terrible bereavement. - - - - - CHAPTER IV. - THE PELASGIAN CAPTIVES. - - -Sacred mountain, uplands, shore, and harbor became black with people, as -the returning fleet drew inward. The enthusiastic welcomings were all -that the proudest conqueror could wish. Yet these islanders, fearing -they were but lukewarm in their manifestations to these so victorious, -grew but the more enthusiastic—until it came upon them that the fleet -was moving with ominous slowness, that few were the pennants, that there -were no responses, and that the decks were looking wofully scant of men. - -Almost as one they became mute; and each began to eye his fellows in -doubt. Could it be that victory had not been with Atlantis? Fast fell -their hopes, until wild became the speculations as to who were -returning, who were left dead in a far-off clime. - -Gradually, the cry of terror overspread harbor, shore, uplands, and -mountain; and its sounds were the first to fall upon the king’s ears as -the fleet drew into Luith’s outlet. - -Quick were the king and his nobles in boarding the galleys awaiting -them. No looks were there for the masses, looking gloomily on from shore -and docks, though a few of the latter tried hard to shout welcomes that -would stick in their throats. As the galleys began to move off, the -gloom deepened, until amazement lightened it a little; for what meant -these two fair children that Maron and an officer were bearing from the -king’s vessel to a galley? Also, why was this galley keeping so near -that of the king? The tongues were loosened, and conjecture ran high -until the warmen and sailors began to disembark. These were at once -surrounded by the impatient beholders on land; and, as Atlano and his -nobles moved away, they knew the listeners were hearing of the dead, so -eloquent of anguish grew the air. - -Useless was it to stop their ears. What was the outer hearing to the -powerful inward faculty that naught could render deaf? - -Onward, up the beautiful Luith, glided the king and his nobles, their -eyes ever turned from the galleys that had come to meet certain nobles -nevermore to be seen in Atlantis. Of these Phiro was one—Phiro, the -young, the ardent. Then they thought of the wives awaiting these, the -non-returning, and grew abject in their humiliation and fear. Mute, they -glided by the palaces whose marble landing places were covered with -anxious observers. - -When they reached the upper part of the stream and beheld banks and -heights swarming with people, and many galleys coming toward them, the -king drew more closely under his awnings, that he might not respond to -the cheers of these loyal subjects who were content in that he was of -those returning. - -And there, at the royal landing place, were priests also awaiting him. -In spite of the anxiety, shout after shout went up from all sides as his -galley touched the granite steps. But terrible was the hush when the -king came forth, unsmiling, unanswering. After the steps were ascended, -his chariot entered, and he was driven off, they knew their every fear -was verified. - -Shivering with dismay, they looked on in silence as the downcast nobles, -now that the king no longer needed their attendance, thought of their -homes, and, entering their chariots, drove off. But there came diversion -for the time when the half-fainting captives were borne to a chariot, -and driven after the king. - -The priests, who were of inferior rank, were about to drive to the -temple when these children appeared. They waited until they were gone, -when one spoke out to the captain of the galley that had borne them: - -“Sir Captain, whence are those children?” - -“Priest Kluto, Maron telleth that they are of Pelasgia, and the children -of a great chief.” - -“Well, I knew it!” exclaimed a swarthy man, a Kabyle of the -Amazirgi.[12] “Before I lost this arm, and when I was in Shaphana, I saw -these Pelasgians. Fair were some even as these children, and of -foreheads as straight. Marked ye their foreheads?” - -“I marked them!” - -“And I!” - -“And I!” - -Then, for the first time in the history of the island, these Atlanteans -began to regard the receding foreheads everywhere about them with less -than the usual favor. - -Thereupon, another priest, of his shrewdness, warned: - -“Such foreheads come not of the gods. Call to mind that ye spring from -Poseidon. Was not the forehead of Poseidon even as our foreheads? Are -not our foreheads as his? Then have a care. Else will ye mock!” - -“But how fair, how white are they!” demurred a yellow man of the -Eskaldi.[13] “Of a truth, the gods love such a color!” - -“Get thee beyond the mountains of Shaphana,[14] whither we found thy -tribe famishing,” scoffed the priest. “I speak but to Atlanteans. -Atlanteans, we are of the gods—we are red. But other things are for our -thoughts than skins and foreheads. We are the children of Poseidon. Let -us look to it that we anger him not. For, what a day is this!” - -Then, shaking his head in a manner that drew forth the cries and groans -of the bystanders, he made the sign, and was driven off. The other -priests followed. - -During this conversation more galleys had approached; and from one got -out a few warmen and sailors. These were at once questioned by men, -women, and children. But short was the listening, when the air was rent -with anguish. Then those unbereaved led the mourners to their homes, -themselves sick of shame and despair. - -What had come upon Atlantis? Never had a king been so humiliated. Never -before had the ships returned without brilliant booty. Fun-hi was as a -grain of sand to this. And, ah, the non-returning! Woe to the stricken -ones—the desolated homes! - -The thinking ones, in their places of retirement, trembled at what this -might mean. - -The king, with his attendants, drove on to the palace court. He -alighted; and, waving off the clustering ones, passed on to the queen’s -apartments. He would tell Atlana that this had come of her croakings. - -But Atlana was standing alone in her bower room, her arms outstretched, -the glad tears pouring. She hastened to embrace him, crying: - -“Atlano, I see thee again, and not harmed! The gods be thanked forever!” - -“Yea, thou seest me again. Though better were it had I been left to feed -the birds in Pelasgia!” - -“Could I but cheer thee.” - -She kissed his hand and yearned for the embrace that would not come. - -“It is because of thy croaking, Atlana. From the first thou didst look -with cold eye upon it. And the other women of the land have helped thee. -Thy bodings of evil, and theirs, have helped towards our loss, our ruin! -Knowest thou not the power of thought?” - -“Say not so, Atlano. Say not our thoughts could have such power. Small -cheer would it bring to mourning wives and daughters. Ah, wretched -Atlanteans—wretched women! And to think I could greet thee with smiles, -with these sorrowing ones about us! It is cruel—cruel! But my heart will -leap that thou hast come back, though with no kiss—no fond clasp within -thine arms.” - -She bent her head as a tall lily might when overborne by a bitter blast, -and then raised her eyes appealingly. - -“Yea, I have come back, and in what manner? Hard is it to raise my head, -harder to look about me. I am craven! Small heart have I for kiss or -clasp. But here they are, since thou dost ask for them.” And he -proceeded to do both so coldly that she drew away from him in haste, her -eyes flashing, her cheeks crimsoning, that she had thus besought him. -But her indignation was short. It was plain that he was suffering sore -in his humiliation; and her wifely pity triumphed when he began to pace -moodily. Only love and tenderest sympathy shone in her eyes when at last -he ejaculated: - -“Could I but hide myself. Would I were a priest!”—the last being uttered -in derision. - -Hoping to divert him, she whispered:— - -“Atlano, knowest thou the high priest is dying?” - -“Nay.” He stopped, interested. - -“They have looked for him to pass away through the night.” - -“And Oltis—is he dying likewise?” Grim was his laugh. - -“Oltis is well. He hath been cruel to his father. Yet, to the people, he -mourneth as a tender son.” - -“The sly, smooth face! So he is to be high priest as I come back. It -bodeth evil.” - -“What meanest thou?” - -“It bodeth evil for Atlantis that I come back with my spirit sore to -find Oltis stepping into the place of high priest. Would this matter had -naught to do with line. It would be well if the chief priests came not -of the blood of the kings. It could be changed.” - -This last idea seemed to please him, as he grew absorbed over it, and -even smiled. But the queen shuddered. Well she dreaded any further -departure from the ancient customs. Already had there been enough such -to cause her faithful, devout spirit untold suffering and fear. She -waited a little, and then said cheerfully: - -“Let us hope that Oltis wilt do better as high priest.” - -“Thou knowest as well as I there is no good in him.” - -The queen sighed, and said almost under her breath: “Well was it for his -wife that she died early. But his poor children!” - -“And his poor, poor niece, poor of a truth before he hath done with -her!” - -“Atlano, since thou didst leave, he hath kept Electra from me. He hath -pleaded the sore state of Olto, that he hath ever need of her.” - -“Hath Olto been sick so long?” - -“From the time thou didst leave, he failed. Soon he was too weak to -serve in the great temple even. The other temples thou knowest he had -not visited in a year.” - -“And now Oltis will have charge over them all. Would the law were not as -this. Would it could be changed.” - -“Call to mind that Oltis hath no son. His nephew Urgis cometh after -him.” - -“Yea, that followeth that Urgis will leave the temple at Chimo, to be -the chief priest in our temple when Oltis is high priest. I could take -cheer in the thought that one is of like cunning with the other. So -Oltis will be high priest, and Urgis chief priest of our great temple. -The two will need a firm hand, Atlana.” Again his laugh rang grim. - -The queen had become very pale. Noting this, Atlano continued, “But, to -change, I have brought thee a gift.” - -“A gift!” She smiled rosily. - -“I have brought thee thy wish, children. Ah, thou dost not see! We have -taken two captives, the son and daughter of a great Pelasgian chief. If -ransom cometh not, they are thine. Thou wilt care for them, wilt cause -them to be taught our tongue and habits. Here, in this palace, will they -stay to be treated as are the children of the king.” - -Much did he enjoy her astonishment, and the yearning look that came into -her eyes. - -“But how old are they, Atlano?” - -“The boy is sixteen years; the girl, thirteen.” - -“And their parents are dead?” - -“Nay, nay, they live!” - -“They live, and without their children?” - -“Yea, yea, and without their children!” - -“It is a horror.” - -“It is a delight.” Most mocking was his laugh. - -“Thou meanest it not.” - -“But I do. These are the children of Deucalion. To him we owe our loss, -ruin. If ransom cometh not, I can well pay him. Atlana, the girl is most -fair.” - -The queen shivered, and her eyes fell. - -“The boy is noble of look and brave. He will be a warrior, and, in the -coming time, can help to fall upon Pelasgia. What delight if, in battle, -he should slay his father!” - -The queen turned from him, and a cry of torment escaped her. - -“Atlana, there was enough of such noise ere I went from thee. I mean -this I tell thee.” - -She was ghastly in her paleness. - -“Atlana, thou lookest far from well. It may be thou art not able to look -upon these captives now. I will show them to thee on the morrow.” - -“I would see them now, now!” - -The king pulled a cord hanging from the wall, and the queen’s pygmy -entered. - -This pygmy, who was but four feet in height, had been captured in -Afrita[15] near the middle part, together with many of his tribe of -Akka; and it was ten years since the forlorn creatures had entered upon -servitude in Atlantis. But Azu was fortunate in that he had been given -to the queen. Her heart had gone out to him, as it ever did toward the -wretched; and, of her kindness, she often questioned as to his former -life, receiving crude descriptions of his tribe’s home in the great -forest, and boastful accounts of its ability and prowess—for quickly had -he learned Atlantean, being but a child when captured, and now scarcely -twenty. - -Very bright was Azu, and affectionate, though most peculiar of look -because of his large round head, snout-like projection of the jaws, -receding chin, flat chest, huge paunch, and angular, projecting lower -limbs. Further, his grotesqueness of body was enhanced by his garb. -This, in color, was flaming red, and consisted of a tunic, -close-fitting, short lower garments, pointed cap, and pointed shoes. He -looked a goblin. His one beauty was his hands, which were small and well -formed. Moreover, his teeth were strong and pearly, and served somewhat -to lighten the darkness of his visage, as he grinned without ceasing. - -With feet turning inward and a waddling or lurching of the body, he -approached, to fall most suddenly flat on his face before the king. -Smiling, Atlano ordered: - -“Azu, arise. Speed to Maron, who is in the first small room. Bid him -bring hither the captives.” - -Azu then arose, and backed to the door with head bent low. When he went -out, the queen sank on a couch, and shaded her eyes with her hands. In a -few moments, he reëntered to lurch, bow, and say: - -“Gracious King, Maron and the children are without.” - -“Bid them come in.” - -Azu went out. Then entered Maron, half bearing Æole, whilst Hellen -walked feebly beside him. Maron laid Æole on a couch, and then made his -obeisance to the queen, who had arisen. After receiving this, she bade -him place a chair for the youth near his sister. Into this Hellen sank -in weariness. Then Atlana moved beside them to gaze upon Æole, who lay -back with eyes closed, breathing faintly. And, as she gazed, the queen -thought the maiden’s loveliness more of heaven than earth. Shortly, with -tears starting, she turned to look upon the noble, handsome youth, who -was regarding her so despairingly, and she the more marveled. Where got -these children their exceeding fairness, their straightness of feature, -their grace of form and face? What a color was the maiden’s hair, so -rich in its brownish red, so golden where the sun was kissing it! What -must her eyes be, for the youth’s were blue as the deepest skies! - -Of her admiration and compassion, the queen leaned over and kissed the -sweet, straight forehead with such fervor that Æole opened her eyes. One -look from their beautiful blue depths so stirred Atlana that she kissed -her again and again. Then, as she perceived Hellen gazing in woe upon -her, she felt a sudden love for both. - -“Altano, they are mine. My heart leapeth. They will be my children. At -last the gods pity me!” - -“As thou wilt, Atlana. They are thine unless ransom cometh. Though, I -have the mind not to yield them.” - -“Ransom! Ah, I forgot! They have a mother, a father. What is there more -than woe to lose such children! I beseech thee, send them this day to -their home.” - -“Thou art a driveler!” With fierce look he turned to leave; and, as he -strode away, added, “Fit wife art thou for Olto!” - -But she went after him. “Again I ask that thou wilt send them to their -home, and this day. Choose between them and me.” - -He half turned, and cast at her a peculiar look, in which showed -wavering. Then, in smooth, persuasive tone, said: - -“Atlana, it is for thee to wait. I have to please my nobles in this. -They look for ransom. It is best to seem to hearken to them for the -time. After the sting of this loss is less keen, they will the better -yield. Further, have a care for thyself. Where is thy trust as a wife?” - -“Thou wouldst do better had I less trust, as thou callest it. There are -some who have no eye for such—some who can be stirred only by lack of -thought, lack of feeling, lack of faith,[16] until they become as full -of life as were the dying under that draught of our cousin, Viril!” - -“Thou meanest that draught that gave youth, never-ending youth?” asked -he, eagerly, unmindful of her reproach. - -“Yea.” - -“Would we knew that draught, if it was found, for Viril died.” - -“We know that he lived long, so long that he came to wish for death. -Without doubt, he ceased to take it.” - -“Would he had left the word to us. Would it could again be found! Would -we, in our seeking, could”—He paused in fear. He had been incautious. -But Atlana, unheeding his words, for her thought had returned to the -captives, implored: - -“Think well upon it, Atlano. In a few days come to me with the word that -these children will go back to Pelasgia.” - -Relieved, he answered mildly, “Trouble me not with it now.” And again -would have gone. - -“Yield to me.” - -“Take away thy hand. I must to Oltis, whom thou likest so well. Later -will we think upon this.” And, pushing aside her detaining hand, he -passed from the apartment. - -The queen again leaned over Æole; but shortly beckoned to Hellen. Taking -his hand, she sat beside them, looking from one to the other with such -affection that they revived somewhat. This was the first sympathy they -had received, and no mother’s could have been tenderer. - -After a little Æole sat up, and the relieving tears fell fast. When the -queen had wiped these well away, she spoke reassuringly to Hellen; and -then the two, by their signs, made her to understand how grateful were -her sympathy and quick affection. - -Soon Azu brought them some refreshment, the while refreshing their -spirits to the extent that they even laughed. Here was a novelty of -novelties. Whereupon, and out of his goodness of heart, he became -overjoyed, and to express this, executed some extraordinary leaps that -made them laugh the more. Finally, at the queen’s behest, he struck off -into a wild, weird dance that he had learned in the inmost recesses of -the Afrite forest. At this their tears were paralyzed, and the laughing, -strengthened. - -They were now in good condition for the services of the lady Elna. She -showed them to rooms near the queen, ordered for them fresh clothing, -and bade Azu conduct them to the bath. Afterward they reposed. - -As the days passed, they became more cheerful, owing to the -thoughtfulness of the queen. Every morning, they drove with her about -the environs of the sacred mountain, even going long distances on the -great plain to the left. This plain much amazed them, so boundless was -it, so intersected with canals and streams, so cultivated in every tree -and plant that could please the eye and gratify the palate. Moreover, -marvelous was the great ditch about it, that, they were told, was -hundreds of miles in circumference; whose depth of a hundred feet was -almost incredible; whose width was as that of a river. - -Further, there were the great quarries to the north end of the sacred -mountain, from which were taken out the stones red, white, and black, -that were used in building the palaces. Here many men worked; and even -the pygmies, who showed a strength and endurance wonderful for their -size. - -Also, there were fountains leaping everywhere, great cisterns roofed -over, many bath houses, and race courses with their attendant horses. - -Stupendous were the pyramids, several of which arose on the great plain. -With astonishment was it heard that these contained the dead. That of -the royal family arose towards the summit of the sacred mountain, to the -westward of a purling stream. In front of it was the temple of Poseidon -and Cleito, that now was never opened, its sanctity being preserved by -an inclosure of gold. They were not long in comprehending that here had -been the home of Poseidon and Cleito, here the birthplace of their ten -sons. - -But their chief entertainment was found in the great hall of the palace -and its corridors. This hall ran through the center of the rectangle -forming the front of the palace, and to the court; whilst its corridors -ran to the right and left, and overlooked the court. Everywhere were the -walls covered with sculptured slabs of alabaster, twelve feet in height, -representing events in the history of the island. There were recorded -battles, sieges, triumphs, and exploits of the race course and chase. -Even the ceremonies of religion were portrayed. Beneath these slabs were -pictures engraved on copper, also historic. Above the slabs were -paintings of the different kings and queens inclosed in borders of fine -designs and brilliant coloring. The pavement was of sculptured slabs of -marble, representing flowers and trees. At every doorway were colossal -winged lions or bulls, some human faced; and all either of alabaster or -greenstone. And numerous were the columns of orichalcum, engraved, and -the statues of greenstone. - -Yes, here was entertainment, and almost forgetfulness that there were -such strange faces, such unknown tongues about them. - -Before the month had passed, they were able to take up certain duties, -as well as to enter upon the study of the alphabet and language of -Atlantis. Every morning they received instruction in the bower room; -and, rather strangely, when they had mastered the rudiments of the -language, the queen took it into her head to study Pelasgian. It was not -long before the bower room was a tower of Babel on a small scale, as it -rang with young voices, and even laughter in which the queen had full -part. Well was it for Atlana that some lightness had entered into her -days. - -Thus it happened that the queen accused herself when her heart leaped at -hearing from Atlano that the nobles would not permit the captives’ -return. It had even been determined that they must enter upon their -initiation into the industries of the island at once. In consequence, -Hellen began to go about the adjacent parts with an attendant, in order -that he might obtain knowledge of agriculture, sheep raising, and metal -working. And Æole quickly became proficient in embroidery, in the -spinning and weaving of cotton and wool, in flower culture, and in -poultry raising. Soon, like Queen Atlana, she had her own particular -flower garden, and her pets among all our fowls of to-day with the -exception of the turkey. Soon, even, she was wearing robes similar in -fashion to the queen’s, of her own weaving and embroidering. The queen -never tired of exclaiming to the king at the progress of this youth and -maiden. - -But, though busy and outwardly cheerful, Hellen and Æole ever longed for -Pelasgia. They could not reconcile themselves to this new life, in spite -of its charm of novelty, its many wonders. When they looked upon the -magnificent temples and luxurious palaces, they thought of the plain -homes of Larissa to sigh, to grow faint. Ever were the enchanting -gardens fading away before their dimming eyes, giving place to the -simply cultivated fields of Pelasgia, instead. The canals, aqueducts, -and pyramids were wonders they never could have dreamed of, but, oh, for -the river, the springs, the modest tombs of their home! Pelasgia knew -not this perfection of cereals and fruits, these great race courses, the -mighty elephants, the lavish adornments of gold, silver, orichalcum, and -precious stones. Also, it knew not the lack of truth and honor, the -profligacy, the sensuality of these degenerate islanders. Thus, the two, -when alone together, could talk but of their parents and home, as well -as their dread of the glitter and falsehood about them. Their only balm -was the love of the queen. - -The king they feared and disliked. Keen were they to perceive the shadow -he ever left upon the queen. She, it was plain to see, was daily growing -sadder. And, about the palace it was whispered that the king’s -profligacies were causing this, as he had steadily progressed in -wickedness since his return from Pelasgia. - -Thus these two Pelasgian captives grew to be Atlana’s comfort, her -alleviation. Indeed, she became bound up in them as the weary months -went by. - -The first year passed, and no offer of ransom arrived; but Hellen and -Æole ceased not to hope. The second and third years dragged, and no word -had been received. Then each confessed a dread that their parents were -no more. - -When the third year had passed, the nobles often hinted of the -desirability of another invasion of Pelasgia; but always Atlano advised -delay, for his martial spirit had weakened under the sloth and -indulgence of these later years. He lived but for ease and sensuality. - -So, as the time was ripe, he put in operation long-devised plans. Hellen -and Æole were now to realize in the fullest their most forlorn, helpless -situation. The tears that were but beginning to dry were about to fall -faster than ever. - - - - - CHAPTER V. - THE ABDUCTION. - - -The queen, Æole, and Hellen had returned from the seashore, where they -had been watching a swimming bout of the young nobles and the crowning -of the victor. After the glare of the hot sands, they were impatient to -be in their favorite cool nook of the garden. This was a large green -plat quite inclosed in sycamores and acacias that bordered the side -stream to the east. Here, when her ladies had served some refreshment -and been dismissed, the queen spoke anxiously: - -“Æole, Hellen, I read the looks ye cast far over the sea. Would ye could -forget.” - -“Dear Queen Atlana,” returned Æole, “it is our wish not to forget. The -lotus is not for us. Most dear art thou, as thou knowest. But ever, at -sight of the sea, cometh this wish to breast it, that we may learn of -our home. Ah, the drawing! Ah, the pain!” - -“Yea,” added Hellen, “when we look upon the sea, we can but dash against -our bars. This causeth us to go so little to the shore. At sight of the -luring, mocking water that leadeth to Pelasgia, we grow sick of our -longing.” - -“Had I my will, ye should go this day. If the king would but heed my -prayers.” - -“Dear Queen, we know how often thou dost beseech him for us, and we -tremble.” - -“Fear not that he would harm me. Too well doth he need me.” - -She smiled pathetically. Then into her face came such a weary expression -and succeeding far-away look that the two fell to talking in subdued -tones of lighter matters; and, as they talked, Æole took up her -embroidery, which Hellen at once began to examine and admire. - -While thus engaged with each other, the queen aroused from her reverie, -and regarded them intently. - -Æole was looking as the lilies in her white linen robe embroidered in -blue, which she herself had wrought from spinning to completion. -Wonderfully fair and perfect was the face, and aglow with intelligence, -character, sweetness, purity. Of a strange beauty was the gold red hair -that curled from the low, straight forehead to fall long from the pearly -fillet; whilst her eyes were dark blue stars, and touching the grace of -every pose and movement of her lovely form. - -As she gazed, the queen agonized, for perils were threatening this -innocent one; and she wondered if Hellen had any inkling of these, any -suspicions. He was so handsome, fiery, generous, brave. It was not in -him to brook scorn or insult. Besides, how well did the two love each -other! What one would suffer in the other! - -The queen again closed her eyes to lose herself in sorrowing over them, -but not for long. Soon footsteps were heard beyond the trees. She -aroused to speak the dread words: - -“The king.” - -Æole also half arose, with the wild intent to run away. Then, regaining -self-possession, sat again; though, when the king appeared she was -trembling and paling so as to alarm Hellen. “Strange,” he thought, “this -dread of Æole for the king. She knoweth liking for all save him.” - -To the homesick Æole, this presence of the king was doubly unbearable. -She wished Hellen had not been there, that she might have slipped away. -The queen, who comprehended her feeling, could only motion to Atlano to -sit beside herself, the while murmuring: - -“We have been to the sands.” - -“I saw you as ye drove back. Thou goest there but little, Æole.” - -She bowed in affirmation. - -“Thou likest not the water?” - -“King Atlano, I like the water, but it causeth me the more to think of -my home.” - -“It is time thou didst forget thy home, Æole. Hellen, thou hast no such -longing?” - -“King Atlano, my sister and myself feel the same. At sight of the sea we -sicken for our home.” - -The king frowned. - -“How old art thou, Hellen?” - -“King Atlano, I am nineteen.” - -“Thou art of age to be a warrior. Wouldst thou be a captain?” - -“I would be a warrior like my father. I care not to war for the sake of -it, but I would joy to war if it was to save my land, my home.” - -The queen glanced at him in reproof. His honesty and fearlessness she -was ever dreading. The king glared for a moment, then, smiling, -inquired: - -“Æole, how old art thou?” - -“King Atlano, I am sixteen.” - -“Thou art of age to be a handmaid. Æole, wouldst thou be a handmaid in -the great temple?” - -The queen checked a cry of dismay, and became so white that Hellen, in -his fear, moved nearer her. - -Æole, also, was alarmed, though, after taking the queen’s hand, she -spoke out with a fine bravery: - -“King Atlano, I would not be a handmaid. I would stay with Queen Atlana -while I am here.” - -“While thou art here? Hast thy stay a limit?” - -“I fear it hath not a limit. But I am happy if I stay with Queen Atlana. -She holdeth the next place to my parents and Hellen.” - -And she looked at the queen with most loving eyes. - -Upon the king’s face came an expression that only Atlana beheld. Her -head whirled, and she fell back upon her chair as if about to swoon. -Hellen was quick to raise her, while Æole flew for some water that -chanced to be upon the rustic table. The two then bathed her brow and -chafed her hands as they begged her to revive. - -Atlano watched, unimpressed. When Atlana had sat up with an arm of each -faithful one about her, he said sarcastically: - -“Well didst thou manage, Atlana.” - -The three stared at him, confounded. - -He continued: “Thinkest thou any good can come of this acting? Of a -truth, if I cause thee such trouble, it would be well to stay from thee -ever.” - -“Atlano, talk not thus!” - -“I go now.” And he arose. “But I have to tell thee that Æole and Hellen -will leave thee.” - -She also arose. “Hellen and Æole will leave me? Thou wouldst jest!” - -“Another handmaid is needed in the temple. Æole hath been called. A -messenger is wanted between the temple and this place. Hellen is -chosen.” - -A dread faintness came upon the queen. But she urged: - -“Æole will die if she leaveth me. Spare her to me. Thou knowest my fond -feeling.” - -“Æole will go, on the morrow, to the temple.” - -“Atlano, call to mind that thou gavest me these children.” - -He laughed derisively. “I gave but to take away.” - -“Atlano, have mercy. The temple is no place for Æole—for any maiden—any -woman.” - -“Beware,” he vociferated, in warning tone. “Thou ravest. Have a care. -Thou wouldst mock.” - -“Mock!” Such meaning was in her look that his lips paled. “Mock! Thou -dost use that word, and to me.” - -“Atlana, cease, or thou wilt have sorrow.” - -“Sorrow! What sorrow is like to this, to take Æole from me. Say thou -wilt not.” - -“Oltis is firm. Æole will serve in the temple. Hellen will be the -messenger.” And he turned as if to avoid further insistence. - -She seized his hand, and implored, “What shall I say—do—that thou wilt -hear?” - -“Thou canst say naught. I leave thee to think upon it.” - -With this, he roughly withdrew his hand, and turning, strode away. - -Most direful was this shadow. As nothing were the longings, the -homesickness. Æole became so wrought with terror, that Atlana set aside -her own woe in order to comfort. As for Hellen, he paced as if beside -himself for a little. Then paused before the queen, declaring: - -“Æole shall not go to that temple. May her life cease ere then. Thinkest -thou, dear Queen, that I have no eyes, no ears?” - -“Hellen, what knowest thou?” - -“I know—that—for all its fair outward look—evil worketh within. The gods -are thought of only in form. Those priests would be gods, would rise in -their flesh to heaven. Have I not heard the whisperings of the people as -to the noise and mirth of the inner parts? Is not Oltis without truth, -full of guile? Is not the worship mocked? Are not the animals yielded on -the altar, yea, the serving of handmaids, mockeries of the olden holy -laws? Handmaids, in truth!” - -Of his agony, he paused. - -“Hellen, what more knowest thou?” - -“What more? Is not this enough? What more knowest thou?” - -There was no reply. But Æole spoke feebly: - -“Hellen, may I die rather than go there. To be near the king and those -priests!” Her shuddering was so excessive that Hellen was obliged to -support her, while he implored: - -“Æole, be brave. There will be a way out of this.” - -“She hath not gone. I have a voice.” The queen drew Æole to her, and -whilst caressing her, and looking upon her in her grace and innocence, -thought: - -“Ah, Æole, I could hate thee, but that thou art so dear! If I could die -in my shame. If we could both die. And once I was happy, in the young -days of my fond trust. How ages far they seem. It is that I have lived -before. Is this Atlano?” - -She fell to weeping in a quiet, hopeless way, so that Hellen and Æole, -in their turn, essayed what comfort they could. Thus passed the weary -day. - -The next morning, Maron was announced with a message from the king. Æole -was bidden to leave the palace at noon. As the queen had been expecting -this, she was ready. - -“Maron, bear to the king my word that Æole shall not leave me. I ask -that he will no more of it.” - -Maron withdrew. - -In an hour, appeared two officials of the temple, bearing a written -order from the high priest. The queen dismissed them with a message that -the king would come to her. But answer was immediately returned that the -king was engaged, and that Oltis’ order must be obeyed, as it was given -of the gods. - -To the officials, Queen Atlana merely said: - -“Bear the word to the high priest—that I will not yield in this.” - -The officials departed. - -Shortly they returned with two others, and presented an order for Æole’s -immediate presence signed by Atlano and Oltis. The queen’s answer was: - -“Ye will bear to the king and high priest my word that Æole shall not -go.” - -“But, gracious Queen,” demurred Ludor, the spokesman, “this is to please -Amen.” - -“Who sayeth it is to please Amen?” - -“The high priest told me thus—after his most gracious self, the king.” - -“I believe it not.” - -The four drew back in dismay. How dared she to dispute king and high -priest. It was sacrilege. Never had such been known. - -Courteously waving them off, she added: - -“Go to them with my words.” - -Notwithstanding their orders to use force, if necessary, they withdrew -in reverence, for the queen’s majesty and fearlessness were most -impressive as well as provocative of sympathy. - -Upon the appearance of the unsuccessful four, the furious king hastened -to the palace; and burst into the bower room to meet only the lady Rica, -who informed him that the queen was in the room adjoining. He entered -this to find Atlana leaning over Æole, whom she was vainly trying to -comfort. Drawing back, he beckoned to her to follow him to an unoccupied -apartment to one side. - -When she had obeyed, and they could not be heard, he vociferated: - -“Thou darest to set me at naught?” - -“It is not Amen, nor Poseidon, then.” Atlana was grand in her brave -dignity. - -He looked at her sidelong, and said more smoothly: - -“I am but their worker.” - -“I have said that I believe it not.” - -He seized her hands, and even shook her as he hissed: - -“Thou wouldst set thyself against me, then. Dost thou forget I am the -king? That I can do with thee as I will?” - -“Shake me to death, if thou wilt. Yield me upon thine altar, even. But -thy sorrow and pain will follow.” - -He laughed mockingly. - -“Thou dost forget the prophecy of thy father on his bed of death, ‘_With -Atlana at the palace no evil befalleth Atlano_’?” - -He drew his breath hard, and averted his eyes before her steady look. -With assumed indifference, he replied: - -“It was but the babble of age.” - -“Then am I free to visit Khemi—to visit the kindred of my mother.” - -“Never, Atlana! Thou hast sworn to me ever to stay at this palace unless -I grant thee leave.” - -“Thou believest that prophecy. Thou canst never harm me.” - -“Atlana, I wish thee no evil, but thou hast to obey me. Thou hast to -yield in this going of Æole.” - -“Æole shall not go.” - -He leaned toward her, and whispered: - -“Wouldst thou see her yielded on the altar? The priests will have her -either as gift or handmaid. We have to please Amen that he may favor -us.” - -The queen cried out in horror. It was too true that human blood had -defiled the altar. Shortly before the invasion of Pelasgia, Oltis, then -chief priest of the temple, had offered as sacrifice, within the inner -sanctuary, an African captive—a king—at behest of Atlano, who desired -vengeance because of the latter’s refusal to reveal where certain -treasure of his massacred tribe was hidden. Worse, the excuse for this -great profanation had been that Amen and Poseidon needed propitiation. -All this Atlano had confided to his wife. - -The queen, of her horror, spoke not for a little. Then she towered -almost to his height, as she cried: - -“Tell me not that Amen and Poseidon are as men! Ye would make them as -such—as frail, as wicked—in that they give favor for favor! Mock them no -further. Make them no longer gods to suit your weak minds, your base -thoughts! They are gods—gods—above such feeble doings of the flesh. Have -done with this shield that they must be vilely served to give favor, and -all the other shields!” - -Atlano was confounded. - -“Yea, and the curse is already upon thee for that dread mockery. The -blood of that poor king is a blight upon this island, a mildew; and thou -wouldst add another, further mock the gods. If thou hast heed for their -favor, hast thou no thought for their anger? Hast thou no faint, deep -feeling that evil broodeth over this island? Hadst thou my dreams! Night -after night they come.” - -“Atlana, thou art getting an old woman.” - -His tone was contemptuous, but his eyes had lost their boldness. - -“More than that. I am ages old. Each night of brooding care hath been as -years.” - -“What care canst thou have known?” - -Was he in earnest, or did he speak thus to hide even from himself -knowledge that she had suffered, and through him? Atlana could not tell, -but she would not upbraid. Such had never been her fashion. Though -better might it have been if Atlano could have seen himself, as in a -glass, through her wifely chidings—at times. - -He continued in a tone strangely conciliatory: - -“Thou art not well. New air will help thee. Too long hast thou staid -here in this palace. What thinkest thou of a short stay on the western -coast where the breezes most have power—say Chimo? There the new pyramid -riseth high. Wilt thou go?” - -“With thee, yea.” - -“But I have not time to go. In a few days is the festival of our Father -Poseidon.” - -“I may take Æole?” - -“Æole will leave for the temple now. It is time her bearers were here.” - -“Thou meanest she will go by force?” - -“If it needeth.” - -“It is only over my dead body she will go!” And Atlana, spurred by her -terror, fairly ran back to the retiring room. - -But close upon her was Atlano, as she leaned over the shrinking girl. -Then, as they faced each other defiantly, the king gave a low call to -which came the answering of many soft footsteps. - -The dazed queen next heard Rica shriek, and fall as in a swoon. Then the -hangings were thrust aside, and there hastened in several of the guards -of the great court of the temple. At this outrage, the brave spirit -might well have succumbed; but instead, she threw herself upon Æole and -held her tight. - -Severe was the struggle between husband and wife; but Atlana held on -with that strength that comes of desperation, until the king produced a -taper, which one of the guards lighted, and held to her nostrils. Then -the dauntless lady fell back into the arms that should have been her -stay, her shield, senseless; and was placed on a couch, there to lie as -if in deep slumber. - -Æole, who had fainted, was borne on a chair to the courtyard, where a -closed chariot was awaiting her; whilst the mystified attendants looked -on, and listened to the plausible explanations of her bearers. - -Atlano remained with his wife until the day waned. And none knew the -secret of the queen’s yielding. - - - - - CHAPTER VI. - THE VOICE. - - -Drear was the night to Hellen, given over as it was to agony. He was -torn with futile promptings; but, toward morning, came slight -alleviation, as soon he would be with Æole. Scarce, though, had he -arisen from his almost untouched meal, than Maron appeared with an order -from the king. He was to go at once to the harbor with a message for the -chief priest of the temple of Ouranos, and await answer. - -“Maron, it meaneth that the king would be rid of me. I will not go.” - -No pity stirred within the huge swarthy Maron because of this youth’s -drawn face, his passionate, desperate outcry. With grim smile, he -replied: - -“Thou wilt speed. The king is in haste. Come.” - -“I would first bid Æole good-morning.” - -“Linger not, for the galley waiteth. Come—come.” - -The despairing youth complied; and, as he went, Maron further enforced -the king’s order. Though deaf was Hellen. Wild, murderous thoughts were -chasing through his brain. He felt he could have strangled this pitiless -man beside him with delight, and thus whetted have rushed upon the king. -Hard—hard was it to forbear. - -Upon arriving at the galley, Maron was obliged almost to drag him on -board; when at once it shot off—Maron remaining to watch until it was -out of sight. - -As Hellen sailed, torture the more possessed him. Three times was he on -the point of bidding the rowers return. When over half way, his anguish -conquered; and he gave the order, the men obeying, dissatisfied, as they -were hoping to join some cronies at the port. - -Tardily the glum rowers retraced the way. Meanwhile, Hellen’s fears so -lightened that they almost ceased to exist as the palace came into view; -and, as he ascended the steps of the landing place, he laughed at -himself, so much did the vicinage of Æole encourage him. - -He hastened to the courtyard, and was about to enter when obliged to -give way to a closed chariot that was being driven therefrom. - -But, following this chariot, rode some guards of the temple. As they -dashed past, Hellen became rigid for the moment. Now were his fears -confirmed. That chariot contained Æole. She was being borne to the -temple—was lost unless he could tear her from her captors. - -His inanity vanished. Madly he flew through the palace grounds; and -eschewing the grand roadway, made a short cut up to the gateway of the -outer court of the great temple. - -Here he paused to gather breath and strength, until he heard the chariot -approaching. Then he stepped just within the gateway, and waited, -indifferent to the curious looks of the few loitering guards. - -The chariot came through the gateway slowly. When abreast of him, he -sprang on its step, thrust aside the curtains, and beheld his sister -unconscious. In a second he was beside her, and drawing her into his -arms. Then in defiance, he eyed the clustering guards, who were seizing -him as they bade him come out. And, with a madman’s strength, shook them -off, to hold his sister the firmer. - -The guards, exclaiming in fierce tones, began to pull him as if to -pieces. Still he held on, the while looking for some weapon with which -to end their sufferings. Death must come to them. It was their only -saviour. - -Suddenly, a priest appeared beside the contestants. It was Partlan, a -creature of Oltis. As he looked within the chariot, and perceived Hellen -struggling, this priest grinned much as a hyena does when assured of its -prey; and then felt for something within his vestment. - -With a sign to the guards to relinquish their hold, he drew forth a tube -much like a siphon. As the luckless Hellen was wondering that he should -thus have been let alone, Partlan began to play upon him a spray that -caused him to sink back benumbed, though still maintaining hold of his -sister. - -Then Partlan gave the word, and the chariot went on through the court to -a side portico of the temple extension. Here Æole was taken from -Hellen’s arms, and given over to several handmaids. And Hellen, who had -partially retained consciousness, swooned. - -When Hellen revived, he found himself lying upon a couch in a room -through whose one aperture the sunset light was streaming. He raised to -look about him; and, at once, his eyes fastened upon a high grating at -the farthest end. Upon hearing a clicking behind him, he turned, but saw -nothing. Again he looked toward the grating, to become horrified at -perceiving behind it a tall, imposing, red-garbed, masked figure. -Stonily, Hellen returned the gaze of this worse than specter, his dread -augmenting because of the dizziness overcoming him. It was something of -relief when the figure, in lowest tone, spoke. - -“Youth, thou art to bend, to obey. Wouldst thou bring evil upon thy -sister and thyself? Is it thy will to see thy sister upon the altar? The -high priest hath said she will be gift, or handmaid.” - -“Better the gift upon the altar,” spoke Hellen as he strove to overcome -his weakness, and arise. - -“Shouldst thou no longer chafe, thy sister will but be a handmaid. This -I promise thee.” - -“Who art thou that art so able to promise?” - -“Thou hast heard of the ‘Silent Priest’?” - -“I have, and I have seen him.” - -“I speak for him.” - -“Then he hath brought this upon us. And thou art his base helper, his -tool!” - -With regained strength, Hellen leaped from the couch, and darted toward -the grating, his hands outstretched, menacing. - -But, as he reached it, he was overborne by a sweet, subtle force. A -tenderness exquisite pervaded him, so that his threatening hands fell -limp, and he stood motionless, eagerly gazing. - -“My son,” pathetic, persuasive were the tones, “if thou wilt but wait, a -way will open for thee and thy sister out of this bondage. This is but -the step toward thy home. Dost thou not feel that I speak truth?” - -“I do, I do.” Hellen was mastered. - -“Then chafe no longer, but wait for the light.” - -“I will.” - -The figure then looked over, and beyond Hellen, and said with authority: - -“Lead this youth to the chief priest.” - -Hellen turned sharply to behold close behind him a weird, unnatural -shape, closely habited in dust color. How had it come almost within -touch without noise or rustle? And how of a serpent did it remind him as -it stood tall, slender, vibrating, and observing him with brilliant, -piercing eyes. - -The red-garbed figure waved his hand in farewell to Hellen, saying: - -“Follow him.” - -Hellen, as if charmed, went after the noiseless, gliding, quivering -shape, through an opening door, and down a wide passage to a great -apartment to the north of the temple proper. This was the gathering room -of the priests, and several of these stood about the door. - -When fairly within this apartment, Hellen’s listlessness fled. He had -caught sight of Æole at the farther end. She was standing before the -chief priest Urgis, who was seated at a table; and by her side, and half -supporting her, was a maiden apparently as young as herself. - -In his eagerness, Hellen hurried past his dust-colored guide, and paused -almost beside Æole. With strange intensity, he took in her grace, and -the subtle charm of expression pervading face, hands, and limbs,—each as -potent as her magnetic glance. Æole’s soul fascinated in repose, in -activity—in turn of the head, curves of the limbs, shaping of foot, -movement of hands,—in voice, smile, buoyancy of tread. It was as though -the material body gladly served as glass the most transparent to -disclose the spiritual body within, in all its purity, beauty, and -perfectness of organization. - -But, as Hellen gazed and wondered, he became aware of the power of a -pair of eyes of rare beauty and intelligence. These were set in the head -of the maiden supporting Æole, and so magnetic were they that his -careless look became fixed, whereat she blushed, and turned the eyes -away. He was quick to observe that hers was a type of feature not purely -Atlantean, a type similar to Queen Atlana’s in its large brown eyes, -rich olive complexion, and fine, dark, waving hair. Who was this bright, -beautiful, imperial young creature? To his surprise, conjectures about -her began to rival his anxiety for Æole; though not for long. For Priest -Urgis, with due solemnity, was addressing the newcomers. - -“Maidens, we of the temple greet thee. And hearken ye well, Electra of -Khemi, Æole of Pelasgia, and to this: It is the will of the gods that, -from this day, the great temple holdeth you. For this honor, cease not -to give thanks. For this high place, call forth thy powers.” - -“But, Cousin Urgis!” remonstrated Electra, proudly, and to the amaze of -the gathering priests. Never before had incipient handmaid lifted her -voice thus. - -“Hush, daughter,” interrupted Urgis, his unctuous, hypocritical tone -vanishing. “Not here canst thou speak unless bidden. Thou art to -hearken, and to this.” - -Electra turned from him with such royal indifference as to amaze the -beholders the more. But Urgis, unheeding, continued: - -“Thou, Electra of Khemi, daughter of the princes of Atlantis and Khemi, -and owner of many arts gained in the palace of the high priest, art -deemed most worthy this honor. Much have we heard of thy fond care of -the mother passed away, and of the high, bright powers of thy mind. Thus -hath it been thought fitting to call thee to the service of our Father -Poseidon. Then greeting to thee, Princess Electra, and worthy Cousin.” - -At this mention of her mother, the tears came into Electra’s eyes, and, -in spite of herself, dashed down upon her robe. But her spirit being -brave, she was endeavoring to compose herself to answer, when Urgis -continued: - -“And thou, Æole of Pelasgia, hast been so long with our gracious queen -that we know thou wilt do well in all that will be asked of thee. Much -have we heard of thy gentle ways, thy warm heart, thy quick mind, thy -zeal—gifts of value in a handmaid. Then greeting to thee, Æole of -Pelasgia.” - -Profound was the quiet when Urgis ceased. Indeed, all were waiting for -speech of Electra, whose tears were drying. After pausing in impressive -manner for a few seconds, Urgis concluded: - -“Sensel, it is for thee to lead these handmaids to their rooms. There -let them be served with food. In the morning will their duties begin.” - -Then spoke Electra in low, sweet tones that thrilled. - -“Priest, Cousin Urgis, to thy words of greeting I hearken not. Happy was -I in the palace of my Uncle Oltis. Why force me hither? Why tear me from -my duties, the dear presence of my cousins? And—I am a princess of Khemi -and Atlantis.” Haughtily she regarded him. “It is not a high place. No -princess hath ever served in a temple. Cousin Urgis, be just—have -mercy.” - -“Electra of Khemi, it cometh of more light. In the coming time, -princesses, like those of less place, may look to be called as -handmaids.” - -“By what right, Cousin Urgis?” - -“To the High Priest it hath been given of the gods.” - -“Oltis—given of the gods!” - -The contempt of her tone astounded even Urgis. - -“Tell Oltis that I believe it not. Tell him I will not yield. Tell him I -will lift my voice until I arouse this sluggish Atlantis!” - -Hellen’s heart beat wildly. What strength was hers thus to speak. -Besides, how rich and soft was her voice with all its agitation. How -exalted her look! - -She resumed more calmly, and in most loving tone: - -“Now, Cousin Urgis, I will withdraw to the palace, and take with me this -maiden.” And she looked at Æole reassuringly. - -“Never! Here wilt thou stay. And speak not again, else worse will come -upon thee.” - -She took Æole’s hand, and whispered: “Speak for thyself.” - -Æole glanced upward at the frowning Urgis. The look was of such effect -that he said gently: - -“Is it thy will to speak, Æole of Pelasgia?” - -To Hellen’s astonishment, she implored, in tones almost as firm as -Electra’s: - -“Priest Urgis—with Electra—I ask, Why force me hither? For I, too, was -happy—quite happy with Queen Atlana. Further, I have a brother; from him -part me not. For we are strangers, captives—and sorrow much for -Pelasgia. Yet are we ever able to cheer each other. I need him; he -needeth me. Priest Urgis, I beseech thee, let me go to my brother!” - -So heartrending was her tone that Hellen could endure no further. Thus -he cried: - -“But—here is thy brother, Æole—thy brother who hath not power to save -thee!” - -He extended his arms as she turned, bewildered. Upon perceiving his -suffering expression, she uttered a cry that brought more tears to -Electra’s eyes, and sprang to embrace him. - -Priest Urgis, enraged, arose, and ordered the pair to separate. At the -same moment King Atlano entered. There was a falling back, a dread hush, -as the king’s eyes fastened upon the pathetic tableau. Scowling, until -his face grew black, he advanced menacingly toward the unhappy brother -and sister. - -But he was impeded. Someone had caught at his robe. He turned to -perceive it was Electra. - -“King Atlano, in the name of our Father Poseidon, I ask that Æole and -myself may go from this place.” - -“Electra, ask naught in the name of Poseidon that is not his will. By -his wish thou art here. Thou hast but to obey.” - -“Never hath a princess been pressed into the temple. I shall call to the -queen, to the rulers.” - -“Thinkest thou any call of thine will reach them? Thou wilt be too well -watched. It is the will of thine uncle thou art here; therefore, yield -to it.” - -“Thou saidst it was by wish of Poseidon a moment since.” - -It might be truly said that the listeners held their breaths. Even -Atlano’s was suspended for some seconds. - -“Electra, the wish of Poseidon is the will of thine uncle.” - -“Thou answerest with cunning; but tell me, is Oltis ever thus ready to -obey the higher powers? Is not this a strange humility? Is there naught -behind?” Here a thought presented itself. “I believe not that the higher -powers are in this. It is further false speech—another shield for the -working of evil by Oltis. And I know his will, his wish. He hath an eye -for my riches.” - -Atlano was confounded, but only for the moment. He made the movement as -if to withdraw from her detaining hand. But she held on firmly, and -continued: - -“Yea, his will, his wish, is my riches. Bear to him the word to take -all, if he will but leave me free. I speak for Æole, likewise.” - -The king at this was more than confounded. His face paled, then flushed, -and the words would not come. After a terrifying pause, he said in a -tone subdued, conciliatory: - -“Electra, another word, and thou wilt know sorrow. Mock not the will of -Poseidon.” - -She relinquished her hold on his robe, and fell on her knees to implore: - -“O Poseidon, our father, our god, I ask this of thee: Is it thy will -that I am here—that these wishes of king and priests shall have weight? -Grant some sign, either of yea or nay. Is it thy will, or is it not thy -will?” - -Stricken with awe, king and priests listened to this first, bold appeal -to Poseidon that had ever been made within the temple by aught save the -initiated. And a fearful quiet succeeded. Unconsciously, each was -expecting an answer. And it came. Far up, near the top of the high -vaulted ceiling, a low, soft voice dropped the words: - -“It is—not.” - -They stared dumbly upward, awaiting more. In a few seconds, was added: - -“But—out of this—will good work.” - -The three unhappy ones took in a little hope. The priests appeared less -terrified. Atlano, recovering, looked about in triumph, before deriding: - -“That was a weak voice for a god. I thought the gods thundered when they -spoke to men. Electra wilt thou try again?” - -Electra shuddered. She felt it was blasphemy. - -Atlano subjoined, “It is time to end this. Where is Sensel?” - -From the door glided in the dust-colored shape. - -“Sensel, lead these handmaids to their rooms.” - -“King Atlano!” ejaculated Hellen. - -“Ha—Hellen!—What wouldst thou? Pardon for thy wrongdoing of this -morning?” - -“Nay. Do with me for that as thou wilt, but tear not Æole from me.” - -“It is ordered that ye shall part, not to meet.” - -“Mercy!” besought poor Hellen, looking upward. - -Upon them was again falling the voice, and firmer, louder: - -“It is not ordered that the brother and sister shall thus part. With -every sun, will they meet.” - -Appalling was the hush. In spite of himself, the king showed a mighty -fear. He looked stealthily about him to see every face blanched. Indeed, -their hearts felt blanched. Upward they gazed in voiceless horror, each -as if intent upon finding some crevice, or flaw in the ceiling, that -might explain the mysterious tones. But this was a stone ceiling, well -cemented. Vain could be the most searching glances. Besides, the -twilight was creeping on. - -Protracted was the silence, until the king said, as if against his will: - -“Hellen, it may be that thyself and Æole can meet each day. I shall -speak with the high priest.” - -“King Atlano, wilt thou grant us Electra?” - -A glad light came into Electra’s eyes. This Atlano perceived. - -“Hellen, thou askest too much. Electra cannot join you.” - -“Electra will join the brother and sister.” - -The voice was now faint, and far away. It seemed as if it came rather -from above than beneath the ceiling. Some of the priests were so -overcome as to fall on their knees abjectly. With uncertain voice, -Atlano called to Sensel, who had again retired to the doorway: - -“Sensel, lead these new handmaids to their building, and let them be -served with food. In the morning, will their duties begin.” - -With one dread look at Hellen, Æole turned to comply. But Hellen seized -and embraced her, and held tight Electra’s proffered hand. Thus they -stood, until Sensel said, softly: - -“Come.” - -Then Æole drew away from her brother’s arms, walking as if faint. -Electra, with a proud air, went after her, and took her hand. - -When they had passed out, the king said to the dazed Hellen: - -“For thee, thou wilt go to the palace. In the morning, come hither for -thy duty. But think not, I shall forget thy wrongdoing. Go!” - -Hellen, following an attendant, tottered out. - - - - - CHAPTER VII. - THE TEMPLE. - - -Æole and Electra followed the quivering Sensel into the passage, thence -to its end, and through a door leading into a court about which was -ranged the building allotted to the handmaids. - -In this building, they ate and slept. As to recreation, there was time -for none, rest being their one desire when relieved from duty; and thus -there was no comradeship among them. They were virtually as cut off from -each other as from their friends without. - -Sensel conducted the newcomers to rooms that adjoined, and received -their most grateful looks, though he shook his head as if to disclaim -thanks. As he was about to leave them, he said: - -“In a little while, will I send you food and drink.” - -They thanked him, this time in words; and looked after him until he had -disappeared, when Electra whispered: - -“Didst thou note his kind voice, the gentle look of those shining eyes? -I believe him to be good—for all.” - -“Electra, I like him; I am sure he is good.” - -“Ah, thou art growing as the rose over it!” - -“Let us look at our rooms, Electra.” - -These, they found, were good sized and well lighted. Rugs covered the -smooth floors, and soft were the couches, easy the chairs. Besides, -there was a table for each. The apertures had hangings of white linen, -full and long, and an air of neatness prevailed. - -Æole sighed, but said: - -“We shall have some cheer, Electra.” - -“It is fair for a prison, Æole.” - -Æole stepped to her aperture to look out. Then she went into Electra’s -room, and inspected her view. When this was done, she said, with effort: - -“Electra, wilt thou change rooms with me?” - -“Yea. But why?” - -“From my room I can see the water; the sight causeth pain. Thou knowest -it leadeth to my home.” - -Her voice failed. - -“Thou dear, sorrowing Æole!” - -Electra took her in her arms and held her tight, and kissed her again -and again. - -“I am glad that my room will do—that those great trees hide that mocking -water. Thou poor dear!” - -“Electra, thou givest cheer. I should not grieve with thee to brighten.” - -Fondly she returned the embrace and kisses. Tears were springing in both -pairs of eyes when a low tap was heard at the door. - -Electra answered to admit Sensel. He, himself, was bearing the food and -drink—thin cakes made of corn and honey, pomegranates, melons, and a -sherbet of almonds and honey. - -As he set these upon the table, he apologized: - -“It was not my will to let another bear them.” - -“It pleaseth us; doth it not, Electra?” - -“Of a truth it pleaseth. Sensel, I own I am hungry in spite of this -prison.” It was good to see her smile. - -Æole smiled back, as she said: - -“One cannot stay in the depths where thou art, Electra. It giveth a fine -hunger to look at thee.” - -Sensel laughed charmingly, then bowing low, retired. At once they sat -down, and with all their woe, did justice to the dainty fare. - -When Sensel returned, they were sitting side by side, deep in -conversation. He said: - -“Ye see I come again. Have ye ended?” - -Each smiled her _yes_—and such smiles! A dotard’s head would have been -turned. No wonder was it that his own smile answered, that his olive -skin grew rosy, that his beautiful eyes became even more brilliant, that -his tall body undulated with a grace surprising, that he almost forgot -what he had come for. However, Electra’s words somewhat restored him. -She said, with feeling: - -“Sensel, well hast thou treated us. Thou hast brought us what we like. -Our thanks are thine.” - -He laughed so that they laughed to hear him; afterward, he looked at -Æole, his color rising. Thus she said with fine graciousness: - -“Sensel, our rest this night will be calmer that thou hast served us.” -And with this began to blush as Psyche might because of his gallant bow. - -After the like attention to Electra, he thought of his dishes, and -withdrew with the air of a prince. - -“He is a wonder,” ejaculated Electra. - -“Yea; and one it will be hard to get over. Was there ever such grace as -his in the bowing?” - -“Never! His serpent self knoweth how to do things.” - -Then, fearing he might have heard this, Electra arose, and looked out -with due caution. She returned, whispering: - -“He standeth in deep thought at the end of the passage, and without the -dishes or food. He hath passed his burden to some other. I have it! He -would know more of us.” - -“Well is it, for we would know more of him.” And Æole arose to peer out. -“He hath gone,” next came regretfully. “We shall not look upon him -further this day.” - -They resumed their seats, again to confide their fears, or to remain -quiet and muse. Upon parting for the night, they wept in each other’s -arms. - -But they were young. Thus sleep wooed them from their sorrow, and they -aroused only when the gong had sounded long in the morning. When Sensel -came to conduct them to breakfast, they looked refreshed; and, if it -must be told, sped rather buoyantly to the eating room. - -Here they found about twenty of the handmaids. These were walking up and -down, awaiting the serving of the meal. All were pretty and graceful. -Indeed, a few were beautiful. Their complexions varied from olive to -red, their eyes were either gray, brown, or black; and the hair ranged -from light brown to jet black. Thus, all looked curiously at Æole -because of her auburn hair, blue eyes, and fair skin. - -Without exception, their expressions were sweet and intelligent; and -they responded with warmth when introduced to the newcomers. After a -short talk, all sat down to the simple meal of pease, milk, bread, and -fruit—Sensel, meanwhile, leaving them, until the meal should be ended. - -When he returned, it was to bid the new handmaids follow him. This they -did, passing from the eating room into the court, and thence to the -passage they had been in the night before. Through its length they went, -and paused at a great arched door at the end. Then Electra whispered: - -“Æole, look within.” - -This door opened into the temple proper. Thus Æole, who had never -attended the services because the queen did not, exclaimed of her -exceeding wonder and admiration. For this is what she saw: - -A great circular space, marble paved, and inclosed by walls and ceiling -resplendent in settings of gold, silver, and orichalcum; at the eastern -end, a richly engraved golden altar on which the sacred fire blazed -high, and above which the morning light streamed in through a wide -aperture; a row of handmaids and one priest standing by who had been in -attendance the night through; flowers, flowers everywhere, on altar, -statues, in niches, and the apertures; numbers of lamps of silver and -gold pendent from the ceiling by silver chains or supported by alabaster -stands—each lamp simulating a bird or flower, and all having a handle at -one end and a beak at the other for pouring in oil, while through their -upper surfaces projected wicks from the reservoirs below; great stands -of alabaster bearing golden vessels in which smoked the incense;—and, -wonder of wonders, the many golden statues! - -After entering, Sensel led them among these golden statues—these -representatives of Poseidon, Cleito, and the Nereids. Poseidon in his -chariot, and with head reaching to the roof, was a piece of work so -stupendous that Æole gazed bewildered, awed, until Sensel mercifully set -her to counting the Nereids disporting about him on their dolphins. - -But this was like making way through a labyrinth to the dazed Æole; and -she found no rest until her eyes lighted on the beauteous Cleito, who -was standing in her sweet serenity beside Poseidon. With a happy cry, -she darted toward the entrancing figure, put her arms about it, and -looked up with love into the tender face. - -“Electra, thus looked my mother. It is herself in gold. My mother—my -mother!” - -“She was the wife of Poseidon. It is Cleito. Hast thou not heard the -story? How, in the ages past, Poseidon came unto this island to find it -a wilderness with her for its one fair flower? How he wedded her, and -made of this a heaven almost? How ten sons were born to them in the -palace which is now the temple above? How, when she died, he could no -longer be king for grief? How he placed the crown upon his eldest, -Atlas? How, after fond last words, he speeded away nevermore to be seen -of the islanders, whose heavy hearts at last found cheer in the thought -that their father was a god, and had gone back to his heaven from there -to watch over and guide them?” - -“I have heard it all from Queen Atlana. How dear is the story. Ah, -Electra, if she were like this, what have we to fear?” - -The tears were in Electra’s eyes. And Sensel’s, could it be that his -were moist? Eager were his low tones. - -“Fear not, Æole. The spirit of Cleito may not be able to aid thee, but -the gods have other workers.” - -Then, perceiving that the priest was nearing them, he added in his -ordinary tone: - -“We may linger among these no longer. Thy duties, and those of Electra, -are now for thy thought. This priest will show you all.” - -To this priest they were then introduced, and he at once began to -initiate them in their duties. These were to dust, to arrange the -flowers, to fill and light the lamps, to watch the sacred fire, and to -assist in the chanting of the services. Thus entered they upon their -servitude. - -Through the day, the two looked forward to the night. Would Hellen be -permitted to join them, in deference to the voice, or would the king be -overruled? Their anxiety grew as the day waned; and, when dismissed late -in the evening, they repaired to their rooms without hope. When ready -for supper, and about to emerge from their doors, Sensel was perceived -standing near. At their greeting, he came towards them smiling his -brightest, and said: - -“Hellen doth wait for you on the hill above, near the temple of Poseidon -and Cleito. There ye may talk with him for an hour, when ye have ended -your meal.” - -“It is good,” returned Æole, overjoyed. “Sensel, we thank thee. To think -the king doth grant it. We feared to hope.” - -“Yea, the king granteth it. But—let there be care,” and turning quickly, -he glided off. - -After a hurried meal, they came out into the court to find him awaiting -them. He led them to a low door towards the west, and opening this -disclosed the hillside. - -“Thou wilt find him above,” he whispered, “and have a care. Well is it -the moon riseth.” - -They hastened out, and upward to meet Hellen just below the gold -inclosed temple. Much time did he take in embracing Æole, the while -holding Electra’s hand. When his ardor could no longer be prolonged, he -said in lowest tone: - -“I have found the spot for us. It is the watch tower on the northern -slope. There can no ear hearken.” - -He then took the lead. When passing the sacred temple, Electra forgot -not to fall on her knees in devotion to Poseidon and Cleito, and -afterward besought their intercession. Her face was the brighter when -she arose. - -This watch tower stood below the temple of Poseidon and Cleito, and -above the inclosures holding the sacred bulls that were roaming in their -grounds with much of bellowing. This bellowing was indeed a safeguard, -as it could but drown all sounds contiguous. - -The round tower must have been fifty feet in height, stone steps leading -up to its doorway which was fifteen feet from the ground. At the base, -the interior was about seventy-five feet in diameter, the wall here -being fifteen feet in thickness, this thickness decreasing gradually -upward, until at the top it was but eight feet. - -When inside, Hellen assisted each up the stone staircase. At the top, -they seated themselves on the broad ledge; and when the bulls grew -rampant of noise, Hellen explained: - -“Ere night fell, the king sent me word that we could meet here on this -part of the mountain for an hour of each evening, until it is his will -to change. But I think he recked not of the bulls.” - -They laughed. Then Æole asked: “Who brought thee the word?” - -“Sensel!” - -“Say not his name in such tone,” urged Electra. “He hath been very good -to us.” - -“His serpent self, then. I believe he is half serpent.” - -“It is because of his dress, and his manner of moving and speeding,” -interposed Æole. “But his voice is fine and rich in kind tones, and his -eyes speak good. Though let us not talk of him now. Tell us of the -queen.” - -“She hath been sick through the day. None have seen her save the ladies -Rica and Elna. They are in sore trouble. Ah, how my blood doth heat!” - -“Of a truth thou lookest in a fever,” said Electra. “But calm thyself, -for the air surgeth much about us.” - -He smiled. Electra continued: - -“Ah, the poor queen! How fond is her heart; yet she hath but a stone in -the king!” - -It was Hellen’s turn. “Electra, thou speakest to be heard—in thy warmth. -We must have a care. The air surgeth, and in it there are ears. Thus it -is wise to keep cool, and speak low.” - -Good was it to hear Electra laugh. - -“Ah, Hellen, but thou hast the last. Though for this time—alone.” - -Here Æole, who had been far off in her abstraction, asked: - -“Hellen, thinkest thou the queen will see thee on the morrow?” - -“It is my hope.” - -“Bid her take cheer. Tell her my duties are light, that my room is next -to that of my sister Electra. Tell her my fond thoughts are hers, that I -live on my hope to get to her.” - -“I will.” - -“And give her my fond greeting,” spoke Electra. “She was the friend of -my mother, and I saw her much until these last years.” - -“Electra, why did we never meet thee before?” - -“Queen Atlana and mine Uncle Oltis have not been friends since my -grandfather Olto died. The queen doth think my grandfather was hastened -to his death through the lack of care of Oltis.” Her voice had sunk to a -whisper, and she looked cautiously about her. “That is why the queen -never cometh to the temple. That is why I have been kept from her.” - -“Oltis is a blight on all that is good,” responded Hellen. - -“Yea, and he doth master the king. It is no wonder that the queen doth -shun him.” - -Then followed quiet, the quiet of despair, almost. The three looked -sadly down from their eyry upon the scene beneath—upon the zones of -water[17] with their boats and galleys; upon the zones of land[17] with -their guardhouses and race courses; upon the plain to the west with its -many streams, its pyramids, its denseness of verdure, its brightly -lighted habitations; upon the restless bulls in their inclosures; upon -the dwellings of the artificers, miners and husbandmen that spread -northward beyond the third zone of water; upon the mountains towering to -the northeast; upon the ocean to the east. At length Æole spoke. - -“This is a most smiling spot. Why are not the people better?” - -“They lack thought for gods and man,” answered Electra. - -“Yet—they show faith in worship.” - -“It is the letter not the spirit. Theirs is a weak faith; their only -feeling a warm one for self.” - -“Yea, they are sunk in thought of self, and thus in the placing high of -self,” added Hellen. - -“It is too true. Atlano and Oltis would be gods. They would scale -heaven—there to be waited upon by even Amen and Poseidon. Ah, what a -spirit of evil hath mine uncle—he brother of my mother!” Poor Electra -turned away that they might not see her emotion. - -“Æole, Electra, I call to mind that, in Pelasgia, we were taught to put -away self, to seek the truth. Æole, I often heard our father say: ‘It is -much to win a battle, more to do a kind act.’” - -“Ah, Hellen, Hellen! Of late, I dream much of our father. But last -night, he came to me in sleep, and whispered, ‘Æole, all will be well. -Have hope.’ Thinkest thou it was his spirit talking to mine? Is it that -in sleep our spirits so throw off the bonds of flesh as to have full -being? Is it that they can see, can hold sweet speech with those beyond? -Yea, it is, it is! I know that our father is not of earth—that he cometh -to me in spirit. And our mother? If he hath gone, she hath not staid. -They look on us from above.” - -“Æole, wouldst thou rave? Dost thou think the above, a place of -torment?” - -“Hellen!” - -“Could they look upon us would they joy?” - -“They could see beyond this.” - -“It is well thou canst hold such a thought—better if thou canst believe -such—best of all, if thou wouldst have them dead. But I doubt them. -Often I think what if they live to forget us. The horror of it!” - -“The horror is in such a thought, Hellen. Wouldst thou sin?” - -“Æole, it is they who sin, thus to forget their children.” - -“Hellen,” cried Electra, “thou hast shocked Æole. Look how white she -is.” - -Indeed Æole was not only white, but quivering of her wounded love and -indignation, and she turned her head away when Hellen, of his -contrition, begged for her forgiveness. A miserable quiet fell upon the -three until Electra said below her breath: - -“Someone cometh down the mountain side.” - -“It is that shaking Sensel!” exclaimed Hellen. - -They remained still until the figure came beneath them, and proved to be -Sensel. He called softly: - -“Are ye above?” - -Electra answered: “Yea.” - -He returned: “It is past the hour. Thyself and Æole should be in the -temple.” - -“We will come at once, Sensel,” spoke Æole, firmly. - -This, her firmness, was the result of Hellen’s rebellious expression. -Thereupon, she made the movement to descend, but Hellen heeded it not. -Then she called: - -“Sensel, wilt thou come up?” - -“Never!” cried Hellen. Starting to his feet, he held out his hand, and -led her half way down, there to meet Sensel, who had been quick to -respond. - -“Hellen, thou wilt go back for Electra,” said she. “I will go the rest -of the way with Sensel.” Then quickly drawing her hand from his, she -gave it to Sensel, and down they went. - -Hellen returned for Electra. When without, they beheld the other pair -already far up the hill. The discomfited Hellen could only mutter, as he -began to lead Electra: - -“I merit this. But never have I seen Æole thus.” - -“Dost thou think thou canst ever know a woman, Hellen?” was the -unsatisfactory return. - -In unbroken silence, they continued their way. When the advancing pair -were joined at the hillside door, Hellen put his arm about Æole, and -kissed her good-night, afterward whispering, “I was wrong.” - -“But I have not been right.” - -With this, she kissed him again and again, so that he was comforted. -When he had well pressed Electra’s hand, off he sped. - -The next two nights, Hellen bore no better tidings of the queen. She -still continued too feeble to see any but her ladies, therefore the -three young hearts grew in sadness. - -But, on the fourth day, he received the message by Azu that the queen -would speak with him; and, overjoyed, followed the smiling pygmy to the -bower room, there to meet the Lady Rica who conducted him to an inner -room. Here, on a couch, lay Atlana; and, as he approached, his joy -became dread, so great was the change in her. Listlessly she held out -her hand, which the affectionate youth fell on his knees to kiss, while -the heavy sighs came fast. When Rica had withdrawn, Atlana murmured: - -“Hellen, be not cast down. I am better, though weak, weak. Tell me, how -is Æole?” - -“Dear Queen, Æole is well in body, but sore in mind because of thee. She -hath not smiled for days.” - -“My poor Æole.” - -“But for Electra she could not have borne it.” - -“Electra!” In spite of her weakness the queen half arose to stare at him -in doubt and terror. - -“Yea, Electra. She is a handmaid, and was called with Æole.” - -“Electra a handmaid! She is a princess—is of our blood. Hellen, thou art -wrong.” - -“Dear Queen, Electra, the niece of Oltis, is she that I mean—a maiden -most fair, most bright. There could be but one Electra with such eyes, -such a smile, such a grand spirit. To look upon her is to fall at her -feet.” - -The queen lay back and moaned: “Electra it is—it is.” Then clasping her -hands she implored: “O Poseidon, is this the next? And canst thou look -on? O Amen, hast thou no shafts of fire?” - -Hellen was awestricken at the intense despair of her tone, the reproach -even. - -“Dear, dear Queen, be not so wrought. Thou wilt die.” - -“Nay, Hellen.” To his amazement, she again half arose. “Nay, I shall not -die. I will live—live to bring to naught these fiends—these monsters of -false dealing. Yet, ah, Atlano, Atlano!” She began to weep in a way that -rent him. - -After a little, with the hope to divert her, he said: - -“Electra hath told us of thy fond feeling for her mother.” - -“Yea. We were most dear to each other. The horror of it, the crime, that -Electra hath been called to the temple!” - -“Queen Atlana, why is it a crime?” - -“Hellen, I will tell thee.” She looked about her in fear, before -whispering: - -“It is—that, at times, the handmaids have been called to the inner holy -place, where only the highest priests and the king can serve. And—these -handmaids never have been heard of more. Never hath one been seen after -passing into the inner holy place.” - -Alas for poor Hellen! He could only break away and utter cry after cry -of dismay until speech came. - -“What can I do? What can I do? Ah, why have I not known this?” - -“It is wise for these Atlanteans, in their lack of spirit, to be quiet, -Hellen. But, hearken.” Her tone was calm with all its anguish. -Insensibly, he also calmed, and again knelt beside her. - -“I must tell thee—these handmaids who have thus vanished were the -fairest of their sisters. Thus do I fear for Æole and Electra.” - -Hellen, groaning, sank prostrate, unnerved. - -“Thinkest thou, Hellen, they were yielded on the altar, the gifts of a -wicked worship? Or what else thinkest thou? What thoughts have been mine -since the first lovely young girl was taken from the others. And I have -had from Atlano but laughter, mockery, when I have questioned.” - -“Queen Atlana, thou hast rent me!” - -Hellen had arisen to pace wildly: and then stopped, and fell to -considering after the manner of one demented. - -“Hellen, it will not do to give way as if mad. Rather, case thyself in -rock. Thou shouldst be serpent and dove, wouldst thou help Æole and -Electra.” - -“Easy it is to talk thus!” He paused, choked for the moment. “But—what -can I do? How can I help them? Oh, ye base Pelasgians, to leave us to -this fate! I would wish to be born of stones, iron—not of such flesh and -blood!” - -“Hellen, thou art going mad, thus to charge thy parents, and such -parents! Call to mind that thou hast told me of their truth, their care. -Nay—thou art not going mad—thou art mad. Yea, demons hold thee. Leave -me, Hellen!” - -The queen’s indignation would have overwhelmed any save this fiery, -reckless, despairing youth. He was too far gone to be reached by -reproach of any kind. Thus, he turned away, saying: - -“Thou hast said it, Queen Atlana. I will leave thee. My own bitter -thoughts are more dear than the cheer thou givest. But with thee I leave -my fond wishes, for thou hast been father, mother in one, the gods bless -thee!” - -With this he began to hasten away. - -The queen watched him in anguish. He must not leave with such a sore -spirit. When he was even at the door, she murmured: - -“Hellen, one more word.” - -“Queen Atlana, thou hast given me too many.” - -Though he had paused and turned full around. - -“I am sure all will go well, if thou wilt wait and be calm.” - -“Have we not waited—years? And this is what they bring.” - -“It may be the first step to your home.” - -Hellen walked toward her with eager face. “That calleth to my mind -this,” he said. - -Then he related what had occurred between himself and the red-garbed -figure, and dwelt upon the intervention of the mysterious voice. The -queen acknowledged the force of Electra’s reason for being dragged to -the temple by bending her head in shame; and raised it not until he -spoke of the voice. At the end, she was so awed as to fall back -overcome. Her lips then moved as if in prayer, and Hellen distinguished: - -“O Amen—O Poseidon—ye have not forgotten, as I feared.” - -She continued quiet for a little, her eyes closed. Then she raised with -sudden strength and brightening look. - -“Hellen, hope. The gods answer. I feel it.” - -“Could I but feel it. Are there gods?” - -“Hellen, no more. Call to mind thy last sin. There are limits.” - -“Forgive me, dear Queen.” - -“The king seeth the powers above are in this, or he would not have -yielded. He hath granted Æole and thyself much.” - -“Every night since have we met, and Electra hath been with us each -time.” - -“Dear Electra. Hellen, she is noble. Such care was hers of her mother. -She is true and fond.” - -“Do I not know it?” - -Then he blushed because of the queen’s keen look. - -“Think not too much of her, Hellen. It will but cause thee further -sorrow.” - -“Dear Queen Atlana, didst thou know her father?” - -“Yea. Cairais was a most noble prince of Khemi. He came hither to visit, -and learn of our land of Chimu. Then it was that he met Lustra, the -sister of Oltis. At once were they drawn to each other; and soon were -wedded, and went to Khemi. They staid in Khemi several years; and there -was Electra born. But Lustra began to fail, and pined for Atlantis. -Cairais brought her back, and she grew better. Then he sickened and -passed away before we thought him in danger. Lustra so mourned that she -again failed; and was not long in going to him. Through her time of -pain, the child Electra showed a grand heart. She was a woman in thought -and help.” - -“Have not Æole and I felt it?” - -“Her mother was good and most fair; her father, noble of heart and mind. -Electra, in truth, is their daughter.” - -“But—dear Queen—why should the Atlanteans bear as they do?” - -“They have been changing fast since the rule of Oltis. They are blind, -lost to feeling, sunk in pleasure. When some have risen in their anger -they have been sore treated. The father of the first handmaid that was -called became too questioning, too threatening. Therefore, he and his -family were banished to Chimu. After a few such cases, the people -yielded. Thou knowest even I was forced to yield.” - -“How?” - -“Whilst I clung to Æole, a drug was held at my nostrils that made me, -for the while, lose all sense. Their arts are many.” - -“I shall be crazed again!” - -“Be calm, Hellen. Call to mind that the gods are hearkening. My dreams -long have boded some dire evil to this island.” - -“May such come. May this island sink into these waters, and soon—to rid -the world of such wicked work!” - -“Hellen, thou knowest not what thou sayest. Yet, thou dost but speak my -dreams.” - -She covered her eyes with her hands, and tremor after tremor passed over -her. - -“Dear Queen Atlana, we will cease this talk so full of horror. Let me -kiss thy hand. Then will I go.” - -“Yea, Hellen. It were better thou shouldst leave me for a little.” - -She held out her hands. He rubbed them gently, magnetically, so that she -became calmer, and soon lay quiet. Then he arranged the cushions, and -placed the shawl over her most tenderly. - -“Dear Queen Atlana, mayest thou now slumber. I go for a little.” - -“My fond wishes to Æole and Electra. And bid them hope.” - -“I will.” - -After kissing her hands he went from her. The ladies Rica and Elna then -came in and fanned her until sleep came. - -Alas, poor Queen Atlana! - - - - - CHAPTER VIII. - POSEIDON’S FESTIVAL DAY. - - -It was an hour past noon when Hellen left the palace. Soon he was -traversing the great roadway among throngs of people, some on foot, some -on horseback, some in chariots; and all, like himself, bound for the -great temple. - -For this was the Festival day of Poseidon, and he must now be honored -less from love than from habit. So much had this people fallen. - -This great roadway was stupendous of construction. Of thirty feet in -width, it coiled about the mountain, spiral-like, from the base to the -summit fifteen hundred feet above, in terraces of a hundred feet in -height—these terraces being interrupted only about the vast groundwork -of the temple, and there being continued in tunnels. In many places the -roadway was cut out of the solid rock; and, in others, built over solid -masonry in which the arch was a conspicuous figure; whilst transverse -paths led from it up and down in numerous available points, causing the -mountain to be accessible in every part. In this manner did the ancient -Atlanteans testify their homage for Poseidon and Cleito, whose temple -surmounted all—whose temple now was so seldom approached even by those -considering themselves the most devout. - -Along the roadway, with the throng, speeded Hellen until he arrived at -the wide transverse road that curved upward to the Grove of Poseidon and -through the grove to the great court of the temple. - -This Grove of Poseidon, dense in its shade, was planted in cypresses and -palms that stood in groups of threes, and about it were stationed -columns of orichalcum inscribed with the ancient laws, both civil and -religious. The largest of these columns stood in front of the gateway of -the great court, and of this more will be said anon. Sufficient for the -present is it to add that, as every Atlantean passed it, he was supposed -to bow in veneration. Though of late years even this simple observance -was falling into almost utter neglect. - -Hellen entered the gateway to find the great court quite filled with -people. On he pressed to the main portico—that vast portico about which -were ranged the golden statues of Poseidon’s ten sons and their -wives.[18] Here he paused, as did others, to admire the garlands flung -about these, as well as gaze upon the scene below, of mountain with -encircling zones of land and water, of the beautiful Luith winding to -the sea, of that sea spreading blue and serene to the eastward. And -Hellen thought that never had a day been so fair, never had the view -been so enchanting. - -He passed through the portal, and into a spacious hall whose stone -ceiling was supported by columns of granite and syenite. From this hall -opened the great circular temple proper, its wide portal facing the -entering one; and both looking to the east. - -Just within this sacred portal, Hellen took his stand so as to face the -great altar to the right. As the people entered, they also turned to -face both portal and altar, and consequently the east. Of the four -cardinal points, the east was held in the most reverence, it being -deemed the especial abiding place of the gods. - -At the northern curve of the temple were three doors that led to the -temple extension. The one toward the east opened into a passage leading -to the inner holy place, or sanctuary, and through it only the king, -high priest, chief priest, and the few priests highest in authority -could pass. The middle door admitted the inferior priests from their -gathering room. By the third door, toward the west, the handmaids -entered from the long passage that extended northward to their own -building. On the left of this passage were the rooms reserved for the -priests and the few male attendants. On its right, the first door opened -into the great gathering room, and farther along were other doors -leading to rooms connecting with this that were sacred to the priests. -As the rooms on the right of the passage, as well as the gathering room, -were inside rooms, they would have been dark had not this part of the -extension been run up higher, thus admitting of apertures in the walls -just below the vaulted ceilings. To the right of this middle part, was -the inner sanctuary with its rear connecting rooms. These were lighted -by apertures; and those of the inner sanctuary and the principal rooms -overlooked the eastern coast. - -On the great stone dais, holding the golden altar and leading to the -inner sanctuary, were gathered the priests, chanting. Toward the portal -were the minstrels with lyre, syrinx, harp, pipes, cymbals, and drum. At -intervals these accompanied the priests, the people swelling the -refrains. - -[Illustration] - -On a dais near the middle door, sat the king in his robes of state, and -about him on a lower dais were seated the nobles and their wives. -Grouped about the statues of Poseidon and Cleito were the handmaids, -attired in long flowing robes of thin white linen and garlanded with -lilies. Each held a bunch of rarest flowers, beside. A charming -spectacle were they of youthful grace and innocence. But the despairing -Hellen, as he gazed, could but shudder and grow faint at thought of -their probable fate. - -At first he could not distinguish Æole, nor Electra. But erelong, he -perceived them to the left of the statue of Poseidon; and soon was -brightening under a loving look from the one and a smile from the other. -Then, so great became the pressure of the crowd, that he lost sight of -them, and thus turned his attention to the statues of the Nereids -nearest him. These, as well as the others, were lavishly decorated with -flowers conspicuous among which were the blue lotus, chrysanthemum, -anemone, acacia blossom, convolvulus, water lily, rose, tuberose, lilac, -and the graceful plumes of the papyrus. Tall shoots of the last, over -ten feet in height, also adorned the apertures, producing fine effect; -whilst garlands and festoons hung from every available point. Most -elegantly did the vast interior bear testimony to the Atlanteans’ skill -in flower culture. - -When the temple was full, and but few stragglers arriving, the great -silver gong was sounded before the altar by a priest. Profound became -the quiet. And, almost instantly, the door leading to the inner -sanctuary opened to admit the high priest, the chief priest, and the few -priests of superior rank. - -Of course, Oltis was the observed of all, not so much because of his -office, nor the fact of his officiating so seldom, as that the people -held an unconscious fear and distrust of him. Every eye was fixed. - -Now, as he moved with slow, stately step toward the altar, a mighty -shock came upon these quiescent islanders. Oltis had dared to make -another innovation upon the ancient sacred customs! He had discarded the -white linen robe of the priests, the silver circlet with its sapphire, -and was resplendent in a purple woolen robe embroidered in gold and a -miter richly jeweled. Worse, he was wearing these with an air indicating -he would brook no interference. - -The great throng began to sway, and murmur; and those that could, looked -from Oltis to King Atlano, inquiringly, resentfully. - -But Atlano was smiling back as response to the salutation of the high -priest, appearing to think it in order that the priestly vestments -should rival his own in color and splendor. For Atlano wore the royal -purple sacred ever before to the king, and his high crown was no richer -in gems than the high priest’s miter. - -When the king showed no disapproval, the murmurs of dissent grew louder, -and even began to swell above the anthem the priests were raising to the -accompaniment of the minstrels. But this anthem was long, and in honor -of Poseidon, and of such beauty that the dissenting ones began to -listen, charmed. When it ceased, the vast assemblage had calmed. - -Then Oltis swept before the altar to chant with melodious voice an -invocation to Poseidon, the while heaping upon it the fruits and flowers -the people presented for offering. When the altar could hold no more, he -turned and implored blessings from the gods in return for the virtues of -their monarch. He dwelt long upon the king’s moderation, justice, -self-command, generosity, love of truth, freedom from covetousness and -sensuality in so fulsome a manner that Hellen writhed; and next caught -himself groaning as he wondered over the easy forbearance of this -listening people. - -When Oltis had finished, and was raising his head proudly to survey the -immense audience, Hellen took in as never before his strong likeness to -Atlano. Both were tall, powerfully formed, strong featured, slightly -receding of forehead and chin, red of skin, and fiery-eyed. But, in -Oltis’ face was a look of dissimulation and craft that repelled even -more than Atlano’s sensual expression. In a flash Hellen understood. - -“Ah,” thought he, “Oltis hath aims beyond this temple. Can it be that he -pandereth to Atlano with the view to be king himself? That royal robe -meaneth much!” - -While Oltis stood gazing at the people, and receiving with unconcern -their dissatisfied looks, a great stir was heard in the entrance hall. -As this increased, every eye that could turned to the portal, to behold -there entering—Queen Atlana with her ladies, whilst Azu himself held up -her long purple train! - -At this most unusual appearance, the audience went wild—smiling, waving -their hands, bursting into enthusiastic cries. The Atlanteans loved -their queen, and her long absence from worship had been wondered at and -deplored. Her vacant chair had been a protest of which they had not felt -free to speak. But now all must be right, as she was coming back. So -they went wild of their delight. - -The astonished king had arisen. Oltis stood fixed and staring. Queen -Atlana, crowned, clad in purple and gold, and ablaze with jewels, slowly -advanced—the people joyfully giving way—until she had come nigh the -king. With her ladies’ assistance she mounted the few steps of the dais; -and sank into the chair she had been wont to occupy at the side of the -king, but which now was placed toward the edge of the dais. Then her -ladies formed about her, and, following her example, bent in prayer. - -Intense had grown the quiet. They were as spellbound, waiting for the -queen to raise her head. When she did, it was to look toward the king. -But his face was averted. Then her glance was toward the priests. -Breathlessly watched the people. How would she accept the high priest’s -latest profanity? - -Her eye was quick to distinguish Oltis in his royal robing. And she -started violently. For this the people were prepared. But the olden -spirit of Atlantis stirred within them, when, accepting to the full his -intent, she arose and stared at him, astounded! - -Despite himself, Oltis’ eyes fell beneath hers. This encouraged the -awakening islanders, who began to murmur rebelliously, even to hiss. -Yes, it had come to this—a high priest of Atlantis was suffering -indignity in the temple, and from its worshipers! - -Shuddering, the queen again looked toward the king, to meet his scornful -smile. This smile the people beheld, and further, the grand manner in -which the queen drew herself up and questioned with her eloquent eyes. -In their appreciation, they burst forth into their favorite cry of “All -dear is Queen Atlana!” but at once hushed upon perceiving the baleful -looks the king was casting at her. - -Mute of their rage, they began to sway tumultuously, vengefully: then -made as if they would array themselves about her as she tottered, and -leaned upon the Lady Rica. And the ensuing mutterings grew into -imprecations. - -At this serious moment, diversion occurred. The door leading to the -inner sanctuary opened, admitting a figure taller than any in that -assemblage, and of such majesty that the surging crowd quieted, and a -few cried out in awe: - -“The ‘Silent Priest’! The ‘Silent Priest’!” - -The ‘Silent Priest’ bowing in grand, yet benign manner, advanced until -almost beside Oltis; then, facing the people, signed that the murmurings -must cease, and the ceremonies continue. Most graceful and significant -were his gestures: and even Atlano and Oltis followed them as if -charmed. - -As to Queen Atlana, her amazement was supreme. Never had she seen this -priest, though much had she wondered over his mysterious advent upon the -island, and what such presence meant. Thus she stood transfixed. - -Rarely had the ‘Silent Priest’ appeared at the services. Yet, among the -people, it was already whispered that, since his coming, things had -changed for the better. Fewer were the animal offerings, and no -handmaids had been forced into the inner sanctuary. Now it was plain -that he exercised some subtle force not only upon the subordinate -priests, but even upon King Atlano and the high priest as these were -regarding him in reverence, in subservience. - -When the king and queen were seated, the ‘Silent Priest’ went before the -altar, there to raise his eyes and move his lips in prayer. But no sound -came forth, for the ‘Silent Priest’ was voiceless. But such were his -magnetism and expression that king, queen, priests and people followed -him in awe, and partly comprehending. - -When his prayer was finished, he went from the altar, a little to one -side, and stood absorbed. - -Then Oltis moved before the altar, and signed to the handmaids. These -began to sing in such fashion that the people listened, enthralled. Soon -they were gliding about the statues of Poseidon and Cleito, and in and -out among the Nereids, still singing. To Hellen, knowing what he did, it -was unbearable to listen to the sweet voices, and watch the graceful -movements of these beautiful, innocent, perhaps doomed young girls, each -wearing so charmingly her robe of filmy white, her garland of purest -lilies. - -As they moved about Poseidon, they threw in his chariot their bunches of -flowers, so that quickly he was standing amid heaping floral tributes. -And Cleito was not neglected, for each took off the garland running from -shoulder to waist, to lay it about her, after stooping to kiss her hand. -And, oh, the grace of it all! - -Quite a while did this last, to the delight of the beholders. After the -handmaids had again resumed their places, all grew grave, for the time -had come when Oltis was to deliver the speech eulogistic of Poseidon. - -He stood up high before them in front of the altar, and his haughty -tones rang out: - -“Gracious King, Gracious Queen, Priests, Nobles, People: another year -hath brought plenty upon Atlantis. Another year have the gods smiled: -another year have they breathed into our minds their will. And, this -day, as a year since, yea, as thousands of years since, we meet to joy -in the festival of our Father Poseidon, and to plead for his further -favor. I, his high priest, though far from worthy—” - -Here was most fearful interruption. From the statue of Poseidon emanated -a groan; and then it flung at Oltis this. - -“Why art thou far from worthy?” - -Oltis shrank back, mute, and gazed in horror at the statue. The people, -screaming in terror, fell against each other. The king and queen started -to their feet, and stood rigid. - -But Oltis, with greatest effort, rallied. In loud, though shaking tones, -he continued: - -“I call myself far from worthy, because with the years I the better know -my failings, my evil turnings—” - -“Is thy new robe an evil turning?” was now spoken abruptly by a powerful -voice at the rear of the assemblage. - -There was a simultaneous looking backward to discover this speaker. -Oltis stared in the same direction, paling even to his lips. Fearful was -the hush that followed. At length, he desperately resumed: - -“On this day so promising—” - -But paused to gaze, petrified, at the people, who were reflecting his -stony horror. - -Far off, beneath the waters, was beginning a loud, menacing rumbling! It -was approaching the island! On—on—it was coming—even to beneath their -feet! Was the sea pouring into the bowels of the earth? - -As they stood dazed, the massive walls began to shake violently, -threatening to fall inward—the accompaniment to the earth now quivering -fast beneath—that earth they had deemed so solid, so stable! - -With the cry of panic, the islanders began to rush upon each other, no -purpose in their movements. Great loss of life would have resulted had -not the silver gong sounded imperatively. - -The frantic people turned to see it held by the ‘Silent Priest,’ who was -still standing in his place with mien undaunted. He returned their -agonized looks by smiles; then gesticulated that the worst was over. -Indeed, the earth was already quieting. Next, he pointed to Queen -Atlana, as if beseeching their consideration. They looked to perceive -her fainting in the arms of the Lady Rica. Then they calmed. - -The oscillations had ceased. Atlano, haggard and trembling, signed that -the queen must be taken out. Accordingly, she was placed in a chair and -borne by some of the nobles to her chariot, the people looking on mute, -motionless. - -But when she had been borne out, they began to hasten after her, with no -regard for the benediction Oltis was endeavoring to mutter. When king -and priests alone remained, these, by one accord, speeded to their -respective passages, thence to escape into the air. Surely such a -convulsion must have direfully disfigured the face of nature. - -But without, all was bright, serene, unchanged. Not a stone had fallen. -But—what did it mean? Never within the island’s existence, had there -been any evidence of the earth’s instability. And it was Poseidon’s -Festival Day! Was there warning in this? - - - - - CHAPTER IX. - THE ‘SILENT PRIEST.’ - - -During the earthquake, Hellen had tried to force his way to Æole and -Electra in face of the panic-stricken throng pressing toward the portal. -He would have been crushed had not the people quieted under the -magnetism of the ‘Silent Priest.’ - -Æole and Electra were standing close to the statue of Poseidon when the -queen became prostrated because of the king’s baleful looks. And they -could not hope to get beside her, so great was the surging of the -people. - -Then appeared this ‘Silent Priest.’ From the first glance, Æole had -stood motionless, fascinated; and aroused only when her companions began -to sing and march. During the evolutions, her eyes were continually -turning to him. When in her place again beside the statue, she saw only -him, heard not Oltis when he attempted his speech. Then came the shock -of the mysterious voice. - -“Ah, Electra, it speaketh again,” she whispered: “It is the voice of our -friend.” - -“Yea, but not the voice of a friend to these Atlanteans. Look at the -queen!” - -Æole turned to perceive both king and queen gazing stonily at the -statue. She responded: - -“Electra, I fear for her. Let us get to her.” - -Desperately they tried to make their way, but vain was their puny -strength. It was some relief when the queen sat down; but again she -arose when the voice came from the rear; and was as marble until the -earthquake when she fell in Rica’s arms. - -Æole, of her dizziness, would have fallen also, had not a strong arm -upheld her, and a tender voice whispered: - -“Æole, strength. The worst is over.” - -It was Sensel, and he was offering his other arm to Electra; whilst -about him were flocking the nearest handmaids, as though he alone could -save them. - -It was at this moment that Hellen succeeded in getting sight of the two. -Reaching an aperture, he sprang up among its clustering papyrus plumes -to perceive them with Sensel. By this time, the people were quieting, -and Queen Atlana was being borne out. As the throng pressed after her, -Hellen was the better able to watch. Great was his relief when Sensel -began marshaling the handmaids to their door. “If he can but get them to -the air,” he thought, “before more evil cometh.” - -Hid among the papyrus, he waited until all had passed out even to the -priest and handmaids in attendance upon the altar fire. - -For once the great temple was deserted. Hellen was alone. As he realized -this, an idea came that he was quick to act upon. Springing from the -aperture, he darted across the great space toward the door of the -handmaids, opened this, and beheld, stretching deep, the passage through -which Sensel had conducted him to the priests’ gathering room; and knew -that some distance down, was the side passage leading to the cell where -he had seen the red-garbed figure. At the very end was a door leading, -probably, to the building of the handmaids. If he could but run down -this long passage, and come upon Æole and Electra! - -As if urged by a force uncontrollable, he sped onward—his eyes, his -thoughts on the door at the end. But, when midway, was arrested, and by -a voice. It was as though a wall had sprung up in front of him. Low, -strong in fear, it warned. - -“Rash youth, thou wilt ruin all. Go back ere the priests come. Wouldst -thou die?” - -Hellen still would have pressed on. - -“Call to mind thy promise. If here thou art found, at an end are the -meetings with thy sister—the hope of freedom.” - -Hellen, now irresolute, was looking about him for the red-garbed figure, -when Sensel appeared through the far door. For one moment, the latter -stood motionless. Then he bounded toward Hellen. Seizing his wrist, he -cried: - -“If thou lovest thy sister, out of this. Fly!” - -But Hellen shook off his hand as he answered: - -“Touch me not. I will go of my own will.” - -Sensel, holding with the more strength, began to draw him along as with -the force of the wind. On—on—they sped, and into the temple. Here it was -still empty, but voices could be heard in the passage leading to the -inner sanctuary. Sensel cried: - -“On to the portal!” still holding fast. And Hellen, at last realizing -his rashness, complied. But not to escape. The sanctuary door opened as -they neared the portal; and in came Oltis and Urgis. - -The former’s assurance had returned. But he paused in dismay at -beholding the temple thus deserted, and Hellen and Sensel by the portal. -The former was freeing himself; the latter looked worsted, conquered -rather than conquering. - -Hurriedly the priests approached them. And Oltis asked: - -“Sensel, what doeth the youth here with thee?” - -“He went not with the others. I would have forced him away.” - -“The place of a messenger is in the outer court,” said Urgis sternly. - -“He is the brother of Æole the handmaid.” Oltis’ tone was meaningful; -and his glare boded such evil that Hellen was roused to resentment. -Though he returned with surprising calm: - -“Yea, I am the brother of Æole—her wretched brother. When all fled the -temple, I staid that I might follow her. I was making my way through the -passage when set upon by Sensel, and carried back as if by the wind.” - -Oltis looked at Urgis. Triumph was in his eye. And triumph responded. -Though Urgis, in hypocritical tone said: - -“The temple doth pride itself upon this strength of Sensel.” - -“I thought I was strong,” continued Hellen, as he regarded Sensel. - -“Thou wilt find thy strength as naught here. Tell me—how far was he, -Sensel?” - -“Most Honored and High Priest, he was well in the passage. But I seized -him, and speeded him here.”—Sensel’s tone was very low. - -“Didst thou see aught?” demanded Oltis of Hellen. - -“I saw naught but doors and Sensel. Those doors are the same I saw when -brought before thee, Priest Urgis.” - -“Thou shouldst say, ‘Chief of the Priests,’” corrected Urgis, angrily. - -“Then,—‘Chief of the Priests, Urgis.’” And Hellen bowed to the ground, -but with little of reverence. - -His manner was not lost upon Oltis. Though smooth his tones, his eyes -emitted a lurid satisfaction. - -“He who cometh into that passage not bidden, mocketh the holy laws of -the temple. There is sore pain for this sin.” - -“There should be sore pain, then, for other sins. The presence of the -handmaids is a sin. Are the gods waiting?” - -Sensel’s eyes were piercing the rash Hellen, in their indignation. -Further, did they contain warning? It seemed as though the latter -predominated as Hellen looked from Oltis to him. As for Oltis, he was -exultant; though most grave was his expression. - -“The youth would chide us of the great temple—would even chide the gods. -For such sin there is worse than pain. He will go to the -‘Deeps.’—Sensel, the guards!” - -Sensel turned as if to obey, and then paused to arrange his sandal. - -“Hasten, Sensel. Every moment he doth stay bringeth taint to the -temple.” - -“Taint!” returned Hellen. “It is ye—thyself and Oltis—who bring taint -upon the temple!—Thou, Oltis, hast brought upon its face the black look -of guile, the slime of sense, the marring of every line of that pure -grace so long its own.—Tell me, where are the handmaids thou didst -thrust into thine inner holy place? Are they to be my neighbors in thy -‘Deeps’?” - -It was a revelation, the shrinking back of the two. Never before had -been such braving, such questioning! Sensel and Hellen read but the one -thing from their cowering attitude. - -As the four stood mute, the door of the gathering room was heard to -open; and there entered the ‘Silent Priest’ and several other priests. -The latter at once resumed their neglected duties; but the silent one -hastened toward the group by the portal. - -Oltis and Urgis were again breathing. And, strangely, a great hope -possessed Hellen as the ‘Silent Priest’ came opposite him. Eloquent was -the mysterious priest’s glance from one to the other, so eloquent that -Oltis, as if against his will, explained: - -“This youth hath sinned. He pressed within the west passage in search of -his sister, the handmaid Æole. Further, he hath scorned, mocked, Urgis -and myself. For these, he will go to the ‘Deeps.’” - -By a gesture, the ‘Silent Priest’ deprecated this going to the ‘Deeps.’ -But Oltis, though with less of determination in voice and manner, -iterated: - -“He will go to the ‘Deeps.’” - -Merely by the movement of his expressive hands, the silent one referred -to the earthquake and the mysterious voice, and advised clemency as the -youth had erred from love of his sister. All Hellen was as quick to -comprehend as the priests, so ably did the gestures speak. But Oltis -continued: - -“He hath chided the gods. It is the crowning sin. Sensel, the guards!” - -Sensel still hesitated. The ‘Silent Priest’ had glanced at him, his -glance expressing negation. As he stood irresolute, unmindful of the -indignation of Oltis. The ‘Silent Priest’ took from an inside pocket a -small roll of papyrus, and signed to Sensel for reed and ink. - -When these were brought, he wrote in large Atlantean characters swiftly: - -“It is the Festival of Poseidon. On this day, mercy is ever shown all -sinners. It is one of the oldest laws, the law of King Atlas.” - -Oltis and Urgis read. And Oltis, with exceeding reluctance, replied: - -“We know it. It hath ever been kept.” - -The silent one wrote again: - -“There is an olden prophecy—‘_When the stranger from a far land would -seek his own within the temple, the high priest is safe in forbearing of -the heart._’” - -“A prophecy I laugh at,” sneered Oltis. Though his uncertain looks -testified to the opposite. - -He of silence again wrote: - -“Putting the olden law beside the olden prophecy meaneth much on this -day.” - -Oltis and Urgis looked at each other in doubt, more than in doubt. For -fear lurked behind the doubt—the fear that comes of dread of penalty—the -fear that will attack the stoutest, most reckless villains, at times. -What was there in this mysterious priest that served to tongue-tie them, -as it were—yet loosened every evil and falsity of their souls until -their minds beholding, shrank from such as though they were ghastly -phantoms? Finally, Urgis, in his quality of lesser villain, broke -silence. - -“Oltis, it would be well to think upon it. Let us speak together.” - -“I will speak here,” vociferated Oltis. “There needeth no meddling -priest, no speaking together to show me my duty. If olden law and olden -prophecy join, I must obey. The youth can go free. But woe to him should -he sin again!” - -Well was it for Sensel that the two saw not the glad light that came -into his eyes, the happy color that swept over his face. As for the -silent one, the expression that irradiated him was not detected, either, -as, at the beginning of Oltis’ words to Urgis, he had turned as if to -walk away. Yet again, and instantly, did he face them, for Hellen’s -voice was ringing: - -“O ‘Silent Priest’ I thank thee, I bow to thee. In truth art thou of the -gods—as the islanders say!” - -The silent one stretched out his hands to him in blessing; and then, -with a peculiar look at Oltis, moved away. Oltis, with a strange -drooping about him, turned to Sensel with the order, “See the youth well -away.” - -Then to Hellen, he added, “Youth, go. But forget not—that olden laws and -olden prophecies will not ever be at hand to save thee.” - -When Hellen had bowed to each, he turned after Sensel; and followed his -gliding, quivering, dust-colored self to the gateway of the outer court. -After Sensel, without one word, had left him, Hellen went on to the -palace as if in a dream, absorbed over the ‘Silent Priest.’ Wonderful -was the power of this grand man, amazing the hopefulness that possessed -him when this being came opposite him! Was he, indeed, more than mortal -as the islanders hinted? Or were his powers natural in themselves, but -seldom bestowed upon man? - -That evening, it was evident to Æole and Electra that Hellen was unduly -disturbed, for his voice was husky, his eyes and color feverish. As to -themselves, they were very pale; and Æole owned to a feeling of -weakness, even looking in apprehension at the hill they were about to -mount. Perceiving this, Hellen, as he took an arm of each, whispered: - -“Let us not climb the tower. We will go to the alley on its right. There -no one cometh this late. Though, there are ears in the air.” - -“It is not so safe as the tower, Hellen.” - -“There is still the noise of the bulls, Æole.” - -“I forgot. May their zeal be great!” - -Electra laughed; and a little color came into her face. “How I thank -those bulls,” she said naively. “Well are they worthy to be held in -honor, and to be kept about the temple!” - -The three laughed, their spirits lightening in accordance; and they -began to walk with briskness towards the northern slope. As they neared -the broad leafy alley that extended downward to the right of the tower, -Æole paused to regard this distrustfully. - -“We could be followed, and not know it because of the trees.” - -“My eyes and ears will be well open,” said Hellen. - -Down the alley they hurried to come upon a thicket: and here paused to -listen. But no sounds could be heard save the songs of the night birds -and the faint chanting of the priests—when the bulls permitted. - -As they were about to pass around the thicket, Hellen thought to look -backward up the alley—just as a tall slender shape showed itself in -entering; and darted for this only to see it vanish. Vainly did he -search on all sides, thereupon returning scant of breath, but yet with -voice to air his indignation. - -“It could but be that Sensel—so fast did he fly. He is an evil spirit!” - -“Say not so, Hellen. He is good. Often doth he aid Electra and myself. -And the other handmaids never tire of speaking of his kind deeds.” - -“Æole, I forget not that he came upon me without noise when I met the -red shape.” - -“Hellen, I have the thought that good will come of those two,” insisted -Electra. - -They were around the thicket; and had come upon one of the streams -flowing down the mountain side. By this they sat so as to face the -thicket; and, under cover of the noise of the bulls, Hellen began with -this: - -“Æole, Electra, I have seen the queen.” - -The two jumped to their feet, and as quickly sat down again. “Tell -us!”—“Tell us!” they chorused. - -Hellen recounted all save the terrible part concerning the handmaids. -When he finished, they were weeping. - -“Thinkest thou the queen will get well?” asked Æole, finally. - -“Her spirit is mighty. She feeleth she should live to help us. I fear -not she will die.” - -“Great is the wonder that she found strength to come to the temple.” - -“Yea, but it is herself,” said Electra. “And well did Atlano and Oltis -cower before her. It passeth belief that Oltis should thus deck himself -when the law is strong the priests shall ever wear white linen.” - -“But, the ‘Silent Priest,’” interposed Æole, “was he not as beyond -earth? How did Oltis pale before him! What shame did his pure raiment -and silver circlet cast upon the purple and gems of the high priest! -And, even at my first look, what a spell took hold of me. Hard was it to -draw from him mine eyes.” - -“He is a power,” added Hellen. “The other priests fear him while they -look up to him. And, he doth cause me to thrill with hope and strength -at the first glance. What is it?—Ah—never can I forget how he came -before these islanders!” - -“Tell us of it, Hellen,” said Electra. “I, also, am drawn to him. He -seemeth more than man.” - -“Yea, Hellen—tell us—and hasten. The time doth fly.” - -“It is a year since. One morning, while I was on the sands, I chanced to -see far off on the water a moving speck. As it drew on, it proved to be -a boat, and a boat of strange behavior—for long it hovered far, as if it -feared to draw nigher. The islanders also noting this, watched with me. -After two hours, it began to near us a little. Then it stopped. - -“So we on the sands beckoned. Thus on it came again. And soon we saw -that it was of odd shape, and held two persons, one being clothed in -white. Slow, very slow was it in nearing us; but at length drew up on -the sands, amid our loud greetings. - -“Then stepped among us this grand man robed in shining white, and -wearing about his head a circlet of silver studded with golden stars. -His was the garb of the priests of Poseidon, save that he wore soft -folds of white about his brow beneath the circlet. So we pressed about -him to know whence he came. To our sorrow he answered not by speech; -but, by signs, made the king, high priest, and all, to know that Amen -had sent him to serve in the temple, and that he would speak at such -time as the gods willed.” - -“How chanced the king and high priest on the sands?” inquired Electra. - -“When we had watched the strange behavior of the boat for a while, we -sent for them.” - -“But—the figure behind him?” asked Æole. - -“He sat still until the ‘Silent Priest’ signed for him to come. It was -Sensel.” - -“Now I call it to mind, Hellen. I heard thee tell of it, but had -forgotten.” - -“Yea, I told thee. This second figure was Sensel. Out he glided, tall, -slender, shining of eye, the color of dust, and swaying. We fell back as -though he was a serpent; and watched him, charmed, as he took his place -beside the ‘Silent Priest.’” - -“I think he is fair, noble,” urged Electra, “in spite of his ugly dust -garments and wavy walk. How his eyes shine beneath that low cap he ever -weareth!” - -This pleased Æole much. But Hellen looked severe. In grimmest tone, he -said: - -“Look to it that he throweth not his spells about you. Such charming is -death!” - -“Hellen, thou hast need of more heart,” warned Æole. “Thou art getting -to look but for the evil in people.” And she turned from him. - -This, coming from her, was a blow. Hellen was so smitten, that Electra -entreated: - -“Æole, thou hast wounded him. But—look upon him with thy fond eyes.” - -Æole obeyed to soften. Taking his hand, she said in her loving way: - -“Dear Hellen, how could I thus hurt thee. Forgive me.” - -He kissed her. “Dear Æole, how can I forgive when naught doth need it. I -am wrong to speak evil of Sensel when he is kind to thee and Electra.” - -The last sentence though somewhat lacking in firmness, yet was strong in -its concession. In appreciation, sweet peace hovered over them again; -and Electra, that the gentle presence might not go on the wing, hastened -to say: - -“But, Hellen, thou hast not told us all. And soon should we go back.” - -“There is little more. As to the ‘Silent Priest’ already were we looking -upon him as a higher being. And this strange Sensel but added to our -awe. When the king and high priest had spoken further, by their signs, -we followed them to the temple. Here the new priest was given place. Now -he is a power, checking even Atlano and Oltis. But few animals have been -yielded on the altar; and no handmaids have been called to the inner -holy place, since he hath been in the temple.” - -Æole and Electra shuddered. The latter whispered: - -“Hellen, we are getting a dread of the inner holy place.” - -“What meanest thou?” - -“The other handmaids tremble and grow pale at name of it.” - -“We found it thus the first day,” added Æole. “Why is it?” - -“Ask me not, Æole. But pray that no more handmaids may go in there.” - -They looked at him in fear. - -“Hellen, much have we seen and heard that causeth us to believe evil -goeth on in the inner parts. I feel as if the air, even, is not pure.” - -“Dwell not upon such thoughts. I am sure that it groweth brighter for -us. Let me tell you what happened after the earth quaked, after Sensel -had led you from the temple.” - -Hastily he recounted the whole, not omitting Sensel’s perturbation. When -he had finished, the two, of their doubt and anxiety, were silent. -Finally, Æole murmured: - -“Hellen, what a risk was thine to go in that passage. And thine awful -words to the high priest.” - -“I have been smitten ever since. But the words would come.” - -“I know, Hellen. But, take cheer. Be not so cast down.” - -“I fear it will bring evil to thee and Electra.” - -“But—there are the ‘Silent Priest’ and Sensel,” urged Electra. - -“If Sensel is our friend. Though he came with the ‘Silent Priest,’ he -hath gained favor with Atlano and Oltis. Both look to him; and both may -have weight with him. It may be it was at their order that he came after -us in the alley. He may be beyond that thicket now.”—He pointed to the -nearest clump. - -“I will see,” returned Electra. - -Scarce had they accepted her words than she was speeding off to the -place designated, hopeful of convincing Hellen of his injustice. - -But, when almost there, paused because of a significant rustling. Though -the pause was only for the instant. Bravely she resumed her way; and was -at the thicket just as a tall form showed itself before vanishing! - -Poor Electra, overcome, could only turn and look to Hellen, who had fast -followed her. Pitiful was it to witness her trembling. Hellen, in his -loving commiseration, put his arm about her, nay, both arms; and thus -supported her. - -“Come, dear Electra, come away. Thou wilt be sick.” - -She burst into tears; and was emulated by the approaching Æole. As she -sobbed, she said: - -“I grieve not to believe him our friend.” - -“It doth not make him the less our friend that he hath done this,” spoke -Æole, with head held high. “How know we but he is the more our friend in -thus doing. It is plain he was not there to hearken. It is too far from -the place where we sat.” Sweet was her majesty. - -“Why, then, didst thou weep?” asked the keen Hellen. - -“I know not,” she faltered, her head lowering. “Unless it was -because—everything was so sudden—and Electra was trembling and weeping.” - -“Wert thou in fear, Electra?” - -“Nay, Hellen, but I became without hope.” - -“And I am, likewise. I fear he is not for us.” Hellen was gloomily -looking down. - -“I have it,” exclaimed Æole. “He came to warn us!” - -“Thou hast it, Æole!”—Glad was Electra to clutch at this straw. - -“Why ran he then?” asked Hellen. - -This was unanswerable. The two lovely heads bent, disconsolate, thus -causing softening in Hellen. In gentlest tones, he said: - -“Let us not question it. And, it is time to go back.” - -As they went, he thought to ask: “Where are those ‘Deeps’?” - -“They are beneath the temple. The handmaids whisper of them in horror,” -replied Electra. - -Nothing further was said until they reached the hillside door, when they -bade each other good-night dejectedly. As the door was opening, Hellen -whispered: - -“Beware of him!” - - - - - CHAPTER X. - LIGHT ON THE PATH. - - -The next evening, when Æole and Electra came out upon the hillside, -Hellen was not awaiting them. Then did each own to anxiety; and, as the -moments speeded, their uncertainty became sickening. Finally, as some -relief, Æole proposed that they should go on to the alley. To this both -inclined, the more as voices were heard nearing the temple from the -southward. In the alley they would be quite secure from interruption, as -it was seldom traversed after nightfall. - -So they sought its shade; and, just within its entrance, paused to await -Hellen. - -Exceeding was their relief when he joined them a little later. Hard was -he panting, not so much from his run, as from dread that he had missed -them. He muttered: - -“It hath been sore trouble to get here. It seemed as though the messages -of the king would end not.” - -“It may be his thought to stop these meetings,” spoke Æole. - -“The voice is yet too young,” reasoned Electra. “Though, Oltis may -master him. Ah, that voice! My father told of one that was heard in a -temple of Khemi, and how the people hearkened unto it.” - -“It seemeth a helper either of gods or man,” said Æole. “It is ever in -my thought that it cometh of our parents, whether they be of earth or -heaven.” - -“Let us hope they are in heaven, Æole.” Hellen’s voice was savage in his -despair. “If they are of earth, shame upon them!” - -“Hellen, I will not own thee, brother. Thus to charge the best we have -known in our lives. This is what Atlantis hath done for thee!” - -Sweet peace was again spreading her wings. And Electra was fearful she -would get far away. Yet, Æole, in her sweet indignation, was right. -Hellen was almost impious. In dread, she looked from one to the other. - -“Æole, our eyes were young when we were torn from them. Young eyes are -fond; they see no faults.” - -“Would we had died young, Hellen. To grow old enough to see faults, such -faults in those so dear—and to charge them—should cause one to sorrow -for his birth.” - -“Well would it be had we never seen the light. Thinkest thou that I -could have rested under it—thus to be robbed of my children? I would -have rent heaven to get them!” - -“Hush, Hellen,” implored Electra. “Thou art sinning. To dare to think of -warring upon the gods!” - -“Yea—well could I war upon any gods, that could look down, and not check -such evil. And make their heaven a thing of naught!” - -He looked upon the shocked face of his reprove—to become penitent; and -mourned: - -“Electra—Æole—it is ye who make me sin. My days and nights hold but one -thought—how to free you from the taint of the temple—from this island, -this fair, most evil spot—from this your dire slavery.” - -Of their pity, they seized his hands. Each implored him not to be so -bitter, but to be calm, even hopeful, and to consider that God’s ways -are not the ways of men. - -Thus stood they absorbed, unheedful of a gliding, noiseless shape that -was speeding toward them; that paused when near them to gaze with eyes -of pity, love; that, of its magnetism, was quick to draw Hellen’s glance -upon itself. - -Gently did Hellen release the two clinging figures as he eyed the -quivering Sensel. Then, with a bound, he was almost upon him, his hands -outstretched to strangle. But, swift as a dart, did Sensel move to one -side, there to stand motionless, and regard Hellen with eyes wonderful -in their keenness and brilliancy. - -Again did Hellen bound almost upon him; and again did the swaying -figure, with the same astonishing celerity, change its place. - -“Enough of this play, Sensel,” cried Hellen, seeing it was futile to -come upon him. “Tell me—what meanest thou by stealing upon us to view -our misery?” - -Sensel gracefully pointed upward; and, in low, musical tones, answered: - -“There are gods in the heavens. Why cease to hope?” - -“There are not gods for us. Parents—heaven—gods—are proving myths. The -evil spirits, though, have being.” Meaningful was Hellen’s tone and -look. “Yea, the evil spirits have being, and to good purpose for this -island.” - -“Thou hast thrown from thee, then, the warm feeling for the Higher Good, -the trust of thine early years. Only the evil spirits have being!” -Strong was Sensel in his rebuking. “Because sorrow is thine, there is no -Higher Good. Because thou art not happy, only evil ruleth. Look to -thyself! For false spirits close about thee. Their thoughts are thine. -Therefore cometh thy lack of warmth to the gods, of trust—thy wicked -thoughts. Hellen, beware!” - -Æole and Electra drank in these words; and then looked furtively at -Hellen. Glad were they to see he was touched, that he seemed -conscience-stricken. And he was conscience-stricken, for Sensel’s tones -were even more forcible than his words. After some moments, he admitted: - -“Sensel, I own that thou speakest truth. Of late, I have lost warmth, -trust. The Higher Good hath been shunned. But I am wild—torn with fears -for these. Therefore, canst thou wonder—blame?” - -“I wonder not. I blame not. But I have come to tell thee the clouds will -lift. Soon will light be on thy path. Be calm, and wait. Thou art not -forgotten of gods or man.” - -With a farewell wave of the hand, he turned away, and glided beyond the -thicket. - -Hellen moved as if to follow him; but checking himself, moaned: - -“He is right. Long is it since I have looked to the Higher Powers. My -trust is gone. I have been mad.” - -“Hellen, my trust hath not failed. Sure am I that all is for our good.” - -“Æole, thine are ever warmth, trust. But I am cold, full of doubt.” - -“After the way of men,” interposed Electra. “Men are cold of heart -toward the Higher Powers, but to reason the more: and, of their -reasoning, see the less.” - -“Thou art right. Ah, Electra, if thou wouldst but help me.” He looked at -her with tenderest eyes. - -“Thou shouldst ask help only of the Higher Good and Truth, Hellen.” -Electra was blushing. - -Æole, though listening, was thinking deep upon Sensel. During Hellen’s -last words, she was even saying to herself, “What a glance is that of -Sensel. What a voice is his. Without doubt, he is good. After this -night, Hellen can but believe in him.” - -So full was she of this last thought, that out she spoke: - -“Hellen, Sensel is our friend. Now wilt thou be sure.” - -“Unless he is full of guile, Æole.” Then, because of her hurt -expression, he hastened to add, “Æole, doubt hath firm hold of me. But -thou wilt forgive.” - -She was silent. Therefore, Electra entreated: - -“Hellen, thine is a strong, honest spirit,—but it is weighed down by -these doubts. Throw them off that thou mayst soar to find trust, peace.” - -Hellen, gazing into her earnest eyes, and listening to her thrilling -tones, was so carried away that he responded: - -“Electra, but to hearken to thee is to rise higher. Come, dear one,—give -me thy hand—that some of the grand ether filling thee may pass into my -poor frame—to give life to my spirit, to raise it a little to the -heights thou speakest. Ah, Electra, my strength is of the body. Give me -that of the spirit.” - -Electra was mute, though she held out her hand. This he took, and -continued: - -“Dost thou not feel how my hand leapeth because of thy living words? And -thine will I keep as we go back, for it is time that we part again.” So -did his look linger upon her, that she, paling, glanced at Æole to meet -her sad eyes fixed upon them. Already was she understanding Hellen’s -feeling for Electra; and she feared for him, feared for his further -suffering. Electra meeting this sad gaze, thought, “She is not pleased -with me.” And answered by a look so humble and beseeching that Æole -darted to embrace her, and say with utmost expression: - -“Dear, dear Electra!” - -“Yea, dear Electra, it is!” Hellen was elated. “And dear Æole! Now, ye -dear ones, take hold of me. For, it is time that we go.” - -Each clung to him; then buoyantly they sped to the temple. - -The next evening, Hellen was again delayed; and again hastened to the -alley, hoping there, as before, to rejoin the waiting ones. - -But, in the alley, they were not. Neither beyond the thicket. - -Back he rushed to the tower with the faint hope that they might be -teasing. But neither were they here—not even at the top. - -In a great dread, he tore down the staircase, and to the hillside -door;—thence back through the alley, and beyond the thicket: and there -paused to gaze on the stream as if it, if it would, might help him. - -Then he called; and, for response, heard but the bulls that seemed to -mock at him. Where were they? Could they be hiding? Were they laughing -in some near nook over his distracted movements? No—too well he knew -their tender hearts, their impatience ever to greet him! - -But, perhaps Sensel had come beyond the thicket, was there laughing at -his distress. Hellen waited, even hoping he might step forth. Hard was -it to bear up as the moments crept on, as his imagination grew riotous. - -Erelong, he started to run back to the alley. And was on the point of -rounding the thicket, when a tall figure came upon him. - -But, it was not Sensel. No, this was King Atlano! And without -attendants. - -At Hellen’s stony stare, the king smiled derisively; and asked: - -“Why art thou in such haste? Thou camest near falling upon me.” - -“King Atlano, I seek my sister and Electra.” For his life Hellen could -not bow. - -This the king noted. Though he corrected him not, but said, as if -indifferent: - -“So, here is the place where ye meet.” - -“For two nights past have we met here—as thou knowest, King Atlano.” -Hellen was now calm, and looking fearlessly at his tormentor. “This -third night, they come not.” - -“Nay—they come not!” The king laughed as the evil spirits might. - -“King Atlano, will they come?” - -“They will not come.” - -“Why?” The hot blood was surging now. - -“I like not these meetings. Evil will come of it. Other handmaids will -ask to creep out, and meet their brothers—or, fonder ones.” Again the -king laughed, and so that Hellen writhed. - -“But, the voice hath willed that we meet.” - -“I doubt the voice. It may be jugglery[19]—jugglery known to Khemi. -There such arts are beginning.” - -“Then is all in the temple jugglery!” - -“Thou forgettest fear, awe. For such there is pain.” - -“Tell me, King Atlano, where are Æole and Electra?” - -Again the king smiled, and replied suavely: - -“This night hath Æole been called to the inner holy place. Electra will -go in on the morrow.” So gloating had become his look and tone that -Hellen grasped at the air as if to steady himself; and repeated, dazed: - -“In the inner holy place?” - -“Yea.” Atlano’s tone was soft though his eyes gleamed cruelly. “The -priests have willed that thou art to be parted from Æole and Electra. -Their stay, for the coming time, is in the inner holy place.” - -Hellen’s agony was bewildering. Despair so clogged his utterance that he -could only gasp: - -“Not that—not that!” - -“It is a high honor.” The king regarded him in triumph and derision. - -Then Hellen’s tongue loosed. He towered grand in his passion. - -“Thou knowest it is not a high honor. Thou knowest thine inner holy -place is a hell. Thou knowest that thyself and those priests are fiends -worse than those of hell—for ye are fair in seeming, and fiends look -what they are. Ye are monsters of self and sense! And, by your arts have -ye worked upon these islanders, until they see with your eyes, walk in -your ways. - -“But—think ye there is no coming pain for this? Oh, poor, wretched, -groveling King, I tell thee sorrow and pain fast near thee. In the -height of this thy power cometh thy fall. The powers above are raging at -thee. Their vengeance is sure. It playeth about thee now. It is ready to -dart upon thee. It will crush thee. May it come this night!” - -And Hellen sank upon his knees to implore: - -“O ye Gods, send down your shafts of flame to confound this monster! O -spare to Æole and Electra their purity! Smite them dead ere worse -befalleth them!” - -The king listened as if turned to stone. The audacity of this youth was -more dreadful than his words. Whilst he stood glaring, and unable to -speak, Hellen arose, and, in commanding tone, said: - -“Yield to me Electra and Æole.” - -“Ah, thou askest for Electra first,” was sneered with strange slowness -and huskiness. - -Hellen darted for him, and in his young strength, and emotion, would -doubtless have prevailed had he not been mastered by the same force that -had rendered him helpless when endeavoring to rescue Æole from the -temple’s guards. An essence pungent and pleasant was thrown at him by -Atlano, and he sank upon the ground. As he lay inert, the king -continued: - -“As for thyself, it was meant thou shouldst join the warmen in a falling -upon the Afrite coast at a place where treasure can be gained. But, -because of thy words, thou shalt be yielded on the altar. Amen and -Poseidon are again calling for blood, as the late troubles prove.” - -A fearful nausea came upon Hellen. He struggled to defy: - -“Thou mockest Amen and Poseidon. My yielding upon the altar—all -such—come of thy longing for blood. But the gods thou wouldst make so -vile are ready to fall upon thee for the base deeds thou doest in their -name. Rather would I be yielded on thine altar than stand in thy place!” - -With fiendish face, the king bounded upon him, and would have strangled -him had not a rustling been heard in the thicket. He looked to see -Sensel glide out, quivering and pallid. - -“King Atlano, thou art wanted in the temple. A great evil hath -befallen.” - -“Æole! Electra!” panted Hellen. - -The king turned to go, but Hellen’s feeble hand caught at his robe. - -“King Atlano, yield me upon thine altar if thou wilt, but spare Æole and -Electra. It is but a crumb.” - -Atlano, smiling as the fiends, removed the hand, saying: - -“Thou wilt hear from me with the morn.” - -Then, motioning to Sensel to lead the way, he rejoined the attendants -awaiting him in the alley. - -Hellen watched until he had disappeared. If he could but move—but fly -after him—but crush him! - -Not long though, did his agony endure. It was scarcely five minutes when -the thicket again rustled. The startled Hellen listened, and with hope. -The rustling was repeated. Then, wonderful, his muscles began to grow -less rigid, his blood to course warmer. In another moment he was leaping -to his feet, and towards the thicket—when, from behind it, appeared the -‘Silent Priest’! - -“The ‘Silent Priest,’” murmured poor Hellen. - -The silent one approached, and extended his hands to grasp Hellen’s. -Instantly, their soft, firm pressure gave confidence and strength to the -forlorn youth. All fear and distrust vanished, and he looked into the -noble countenance bending over him with strange yearning. - -The priest signed that Hellen must follow him; and he acquiesced, -feeling as if this strange being could draw him to the worlds end. Arm -in arm they walked to the tower, to mount it, the priest showing an -agility as great as Hellen’s. - -They sat down on the ledge. And, to Hellen’s amaze, a sudden, strong -hope possessed him. Could it be owing to the tender manner of this -priest? Or could the warm pressure of his hand have aught to do with it? -Neither spoke, and both turned their eyes to the water, in the direction -of the far-off Pelasgia. After a little, Hellen moaned: - -“Ah—home, home! As if we sorrowed not enough in being torn from it! Yet, -what was that pain to this? The woe of this night! Tell me, ‘Silent -Priest’—how can I save my pure ones, or kill them ere too late?” - -“My son, a way openeth. Thou wilt come out of this with thy sister. But -woe—woe—to this wicked island!” - -Great was the shock to Hellen at the first tones of this voice. But it -was as nothing to that which followed. For, this hitherto voiceless -priest was not only giving utterance to Atlantean speech at the first, -but continuing his sentences in Pelasgian. - -“Who art thou?” Hellen seized his garment and stared, bewildered, in his -face. - -“Have care, Hellen. I am no priest of Poseidon. Feelest thou not—who—I -am?” The ‘Silent Priest’ extended his arms in longing. - -Hellen was speechless from the ecstasy of hope. - -“Hellen, this is but a mask—this garb. Feelest thou not—that—I am—?” - -“My—father?” - -“Yea—yea—Hellen, thy father!” - -But Hellen was unconscious in the arms so eagerly enfolding him. His -strained condition could not bear this quick change from agony to joy. -Self-reproachful, his father chafed his hands, and gave him of a -medicine he carried within his vestment. Overwhelming was his relief -when Hellen unclosed his eyes to look at him, and opened his arms for a -long embrace. - -When he was able to sit up, his father whispered: - -“We have need of care. The stones have eyes, the air hath ears. Now, -hearken, for soon will I go back to the temple.” - -Hellen pressed his hand in assent; then asked: - -“But, first—mother. Is she well?” - -“Thy mother is as well as she can be under her great grief.” - -“The gods be thanked. Ah, what a wretch am I! Father, when thou knowest -my evil heart, thou wilt not own me.” - -“Fear not, Hellen. Thou art but man. And now, hearken.” - -“I will.” - -“Hellen, after the Atlanteans had borne away thyself and Æole, I reached -Larissa to find thy mother nigh to death. Day and night I watched until -she came out of the shadow. Then I besought ransom of the people. But -they were deaf, in their rage at the Atlanteans. I ceased my pleadings -after it was given me to feel, yea, to see—hidden things—and to be sure -that all would end well. - -“Then came new misery. The tribes to the north sought battle with us; -and I was forced to leave thy mother, and go against them. For a year -did this last. - -“In the end, the loss and ruin were theirs. Then came I home to find thy -mother again nigh to death. But, after a little, new life came to her, -and with it hope. She was strong in the thought that we should get our -children—was of one mind with me—for, if knowledge can come from above, -such was mine. But of this later. - -“Yea, thy mother was her old self, and urged me to again plead with the -king and people for help. Our hopes proved in reason, for they agreed to -lend us a few vessels. Then friends gathered about us to do the rest. -And I built the boat in which I came hither. - -“Thus, after years of dread waiting, thy mother and I, with these dear -friends, sailed for the Great Rock that riseth where the Middle Sea -joineth the ocean. There, under its shadow, I left them. And, as a -priest of Poseidon, came to these Atlanteans. - -“Ah, Hellen, that day I knew thee, even as my foot pressed the sands. -Hard was it to keep from flinging myself upon thee in thy strong young -grace and pure look. Hellen, my dear son, all I had borne was as naught -when I beheld thee. How it was that I ran not to thee to cry, ‘Hellen, -here is thy father!’ I know not. So strong was my yearning.” - -“And, father, what were my feelings. Thy grand looks seemed beyond -earth. Ah, how thou didst draw me! Though, after that, was I willing to -think of thee evil.” - -“It was nature working in thee.” - -“But—how these Atlanteans have bent, yielded to thee.” - -“They fear the gods now that they have become wicked, and dare not make -light of my warnings. Though Atlano and Oltis hate me, and would harm me -if they dared. How often, by my signs, have I chided them, and made them -cease their evil. Upon their fears am I working that I may free thyself -and Æole. Oh, most wretched people!” - -He had arisen. And raised his eyes as if imploring heaven’s mercy. - -“But—Sensel—who is he, father?” - -Deucalion sat down again, and whispered: - -“He is young Prince Pelasgus, the son of our king.” - -Hellen, of his surprise, exclaimed so loud that his father again -cautioned him. As he sat confounded, it was to listen to this. - -“During our struggle with the tribes to the north, he served under me; -and dear did we become to each other. He is noble, brave, good, and so -true that he would not hearken that I should come without him. Though -with ill grace was his father willing. But in all Pelasgia, there was -not a youth who could run, turn, and bend himself as Prince Pelasgus—not -one so strong. Thus he asked to use these gifts as a mask in my service. -After some days, he came before me in his present shape; and I saw that -this mask of serpent look would aid me. I now know that I could not have -done without him. Sensel is an able one. And—the voice is his.” - -“Father!” - -“It is as I say. It is but in nature. Sensel learned it of a captive -taken when the northern tribes fell upon us. He said it was quite common -in his own land. But, as most of his tribe were killed, it is almost as -if of the hidden.” - -“How will Æole and Electra glory in this,” was said with due penitence. -“From the first, they liked and trusted him. But I—how have I tried to -stifle their belief in him. How have I scorned him for his serpent ways, -his services to king and priests.” - -“It is a lesson for thee. But look—yonder he cometh.” - -“Let us go to him, father. I would kneel for his pardon.” - -“Not here, my son.” - -They descended from the tower. Upon meeting, Hellen would have embraced -Sensel, had his father permitted it. As it was, his expressive face -testified to his regret, his contrition for his unjust opinion, his -former contempt, even before he whispered of such to the responsive -Sensel. - -Afterward, still under cover of the bulls, were imparted to Hellen -confidences at which he marveled. Then Deucalion and Sensel hastened to -the temple. - -Hellen remained to walk up and down the alley in a condition of mind far -removed from that in which he had parted from Atlano. Now hope was not -only showing herself, but promising abiding. - - NOTE.—“Down to the present century, ventriloquism was regarded as a - physiological mystery. And, of old, it seemed awful when the river - Nessus saluted Pythagoras, when a tree spoke before Apollonius, and - when a newborn infant, or animals, or statues talked.” - - - - - CHAPTER XI. - THE HAPPENING OF THE UNEXPECTED. - - -Deucalion entered the hillside door to be met in the court by several -weeping handmaids, one of whom cried out to him: - -“Æole is no more. Æole is no more!” - -He paused, and his look questioned; when another handmaid answered. - -“She had just been called to the inner holy place, when, therein, we -heard a great stir, and Sensel ran out to cry that she was lying dead at -the foot of the statue of Amen. He had borne her in there, as she, of -her grief, fell even at the door. Ah, poor Æole—poor Æole!” - -This handmaid began to sob so that she could not continue. Then another -handmaid spoke for her. - -“Thus we ran to the inner holy place, forgetting we should not go there. -And, at the foot of Amen, beheld her as Sensel had said, whilst about -her were gathering the high priest and the other priests. At first we -could not believe her dead; and rubbed her hands, and bathed her brow. -But she would not arouse. Now is the cold of death upon her.” - -And this handmaid began to sob loud, the others joining with her. So -extreme was their grief that Deucalion could obtain no further -information, in spite of his many signs. Thus he left them to hasten to -the inner sanctuary. - -This apartment, upon entering, gave the impression of mystery, luxury, -sensuousness—anything save devotion—notwithstanding its golden altar at -the eastern end, its sacred fire thereon; notwithstanding its great -golden statues of Amen and Poseidon, the one to the altar’s right, the -other to its left, and both most wonderful in their size, majesty, and -benignity of mien. - -Everywhere in this inner sanctuary were gold and silver used lavishly. -And, in the available places, were set magnificent gems, that, in their -artful clustering, simulated flowers and fruits, thus affording the -needful climax to all the splendors. - -Glowing with orichalcum and clustering gems was the ceiling, while from -it hung golden lamps resplendent in jewels. In corners, smoked silver -vessels emitting perfumes whose subtlety overmastered the will. About -the greenstone columns, the rarest flowers were wreathed. - -Yet, incongruously with the taste displayed, the fitness of the -splendors, were the effeminate furnishings. Softest mats covered the -tiled floor; couches, stands, and tables of fantastic workmanship were -scattered about; whilst, in the center, stood a larger table containing -stimulating drinks, fruits and sweetmeats. And elegant hangings fell -from the doors.—Could this indeed be a sanctuary? - -The vast apartment was a dream of luxury and sensuousness; and, from the -half-opened doors at its northern end, could be gained a faint idea of -the sumptuousness of its withdrawing rooms. No wonder was it that, upon -entering, the mind, instead of concentrating upon things divine, should -become enthralled by dreams of sense! - -The great Amen was represented as a human being with the head of a ram, -for the reason, doubtless, that he was considered as standing in the -same relation to the people that the ram does to the flock. He was -guide, governor, and protector. And, about his head was a crown -simulating the sun’s rays. For, Amen was the Sun God. - -Æole had been laid on a couch near this statue; and about her were -gathered handmaids and priests. Yes, here, pale and motionless, lay the -lovely form hushing the gazers into awe. Here, revelry had given away to -a strange quiet. Here, the handmaids, with blanched faces, were -restraining their sobbing. Here, priests were looking from the dead to -each other, mystified and apprehensive. Here, Atlano and Oltis were ever -casting terrified, quickly averted looks at the statue of Amen that -seemed to frown in response. - -As the ‘Silent Priest’ took his place among the watchers, they turned as -one to regard him. But, unmindful of their questioning gaze, his eyes -rested long upon the waxen form. Finally, at an impatient movement from -Oltis, he raised his head, and flashed from him to Atlano a look so -condemnatory that the spectators shook with dismay. Though neither of -the ones thus rebuked gave any response, save to turn as if to look upon -the dead girl. - -Then, the ‘Silent Priest’ moved toward the statue of Amen. But, had -scarcely reached it, when attracted by the sudden incoming of Electra. -As if beside herself, she ran to kneel before him; and in tones as -persuasive as piteous, entreated: - -“O ‘Silent Priest,’ is this how the gods would help? If thou wilt but -heed me. Beseech of them that I, too, may go. Life is such a woe that I -am tempted to end it. Ah, to die with Æole! If thou wilt but plead with -Amen and Poseidon to have mercy upon me—as they have had upon her. Let -me go to her.” - -He took her hand. And, oh the sudden strength that came to her! In an -instant, she was no longer despairing. Then, he signed for her to arise; -and she stood up as a queen. - -“‘Silent Priest,’ thou hast spoken. It is not mine to ask thee to -beseech the gods. If it is their will I should sorrow more, I must bear. -I will chafe no longer.” - -He regarded her with approbation; and bowed in acquiescence. She felt he -was saying inwardly: - -“Keep this, thy humility. It will lead thee to light. May the gods cheer -thee.” - -Though the tears were welling thick in her eyes, for all her strength. -As these fell, she moaned, “Hard, hard, will it be without Æole. How -soon she filled my heart. From the first was I fond of her. And fond was -she to me!” Then, impetuously, with arms outstretched, she turned to run -toward the couch, when called by one of several handmaids entering from -the passage. - -She paused. They came beside her; and the handmaid who had called, -whispered: “We have made ready the bed of lilies in front of the altar. -There Æole will lie until the embalmers send the word. We have come for -her.” - -Painful was it to witness Electra’s pallor. She murmured: “Let us draw -beside her. I would kiss her.” Whereupon, this handmaid led the -suffering girl in among the watchers, and to the place where she could -take Æole’s hand—to kiss, to bathe it with her tears. - -One of the handmaids left then spoke to a priest. This priest, in turn, -spoke to Oltis. Thus Oltis, in loud tone, asked: - -“Where is Sensel?” - -In answer, Sensel appeared in the passage. Oltis ordered: - -“Bring the white robe.” - -Sensel left to return at once with a robe of lamb’s wool, pure as snow. -Oltis continued: - -“Wrap therein the maiden. And bear her to the bed of lilies.” - -Touching was the reverence with which Sensel enfolded Æole in this. Amid -the hysterical sobbing of the handmaids, he raised her in his arms. And -bore her, as a babe might have been borne, through the great apartment -to the passage, and thence into the temple; king, priests, handmaids -following. - -Upon the bed of lilies was Æole laid—the robe being removed. With loving -touch, the handmaids drew her long gown about her feet, and arranged the -hands and arms. Then they kissed the sweet forehead, and caressed the -long, shining hair. After this, they ranged about her and the kneeling -Electra, who had again taken a hand to clasp to her breast. Thus, they -awaited the summons of the embalmer. - -Crowds of people were arriving, so fast had spread the news. Even Queen -Atlana came to hang stricken but unweeping over the body of this young -girl she had loved so well. Hellen also came, to stand and gaze fixedly -upon the dear, calm face. - -In an hour, word was brought that the embalmers were ready. Amid the -stir that ensued, the attendants deputed moved to the sides of the bed -of lilies, in order to bear it with its lovely burden to the embalming -room. But, scarcely had they taken their places than rendered motionless -by the shrill cry from Hellen: - -“See! Her eyelids quiver!” - -Awful was the hush. Instantly, the ‘Silent Priest’ was beside Æole, and -looking in her face. Breathlessly the people waited until he turned to -sign that Hellen spoke the truth. Then went up a great cry of gladness. -Then sank the relieved queen in the arms of her ladies. Then arose -Electra from her knees to stare at the ‘Silent Priest’ incredulously. - -Atlano and Oltis came forward for inspection; and found confirmation. -Oltis said to the people: - -“Of a truth, her eyelids quiver. She is not dead.” - -Another glad shouting went up. Each felt as thankful as though the young -girl was his own. From Queen Atlana, the blessed tears of hope were -beginning to flow; whilst Electra, in her revulsion of feeling, so -tottered that Hellen darted to her side to sustain her. - -Then, while the people were quieting somewhat, and the handmaids were -sobbing loud for gladness, the attendants and messenger from the -embalmers retired. - -Still Æole lay passive. Even the eyelids had ceased to quiver. Yet, the -faintest tinge of pink was coming into her cheeks. The great throng -about her scarcely pulsated more than herself in its expectation of the -unexpected when those beside her proclaimed this new development. - -There was a long interval of suspense. Then arose the cry: - -“Look! Her lips part!” - -Terrible was the hush. Would she speak? Would her soft tones issue -forth? - -Instead, there came upon them a sound as of the sweeping wind—a sound, -that, as it became intelligible, caused the listeners to shake as -aspens. This must be the voice of a mighty spirit! And these words none -could mistake. - -“Atlanteans, I would warn. There are gods! Therefore, call to mind how -ye have set aside the olden laws, what mockeries ye have brought upon -temple and inner holy place. - -“Further, hold no longer the Pelasgian children. This day, give them -over unto the ‘Silent Priest.’ He, with the sun of the morrow, will bear -them to their home.” - -The lips closed. - -Atlano and the priests had listened, shivering. Theirs was the -corruption of these islanders—theirs, the profanations of altar and -sanctuary. The sharp spear of dread was piercing them. It was minutes -before Atlano could control himself to ask humbly: - -“Mighty Spirit, is it in truth the will of our Father Poseidon that we -give over the captives to the ‘Silent Priest’?” - -“Thou speakest it.” - -“Tell our father that we hearken. We pray that he will plead for us with -Amen.” - -“It is heard.” - -There succeeded an awful silence. It was felt that the mighty spirit had -departed. And, as before, Æole lay as dead. - -Though the throng, in its expectation wavered not—to be rewarded within -an hour. For then, Hellen cried: - -“Look—look! Again cometh the color into her cheeks!” - -Frantically were they pressing about her when waved back by the ‘Silent -Priest.’ The queen and Electra, of their trembling, required support. As -to Atlano and Oltis, they seemed as if turned to stone. - -There came another cry from Hellen: - -“She doth breathe! Her eyes open!” - -He bent over her in such agitation that the ‘Silent Priest’ thought best -to lead him away, and beside Electra. She held out to him her hand, -which he seized. - -“Hellen, dear Hellen, be calm,” she whispered. “Our strength is needed. -The gods are with us.” - -She cast a grateful look at Sensel, who stood between them and Æole -vibrating and brilliant, and who returned her look with one that meant -victory. - -Meanwhile, the handmaids had been applying to Æole’s nostrils a sponge -dampened with a pungent liquor brought by Oltis. Under its influence, -she quickly revived, and shortly was being propped up on cushions, -whilst about her was tucked the robe of lambs’ wool. Afterward, the -‘Silent Priest’ brought her a drink which caused her to be quite -herself, though her bewilderment at her surroundings proved her -unconsciousness of what had occurred. - -But the priests, of their doubt, would question her. Therefore, Oltis -was not long in asking: “Handmaid Æole, didst thou dream in thy sleep?” - -Æole, reddening and paling, replied feebly: - -“Most Honored and High Priest, I dreamed not.” - -“Knowest thou aught of what hath happened since thou wert found as if -dead?” - -“Most Honored and High Priest, I know naught since I fell before Amen in -the inner holy place, and besought him to take me from this life.” - -Oltis shrank back, and a murmur arose that swelled through the vast -assemblage. This murmur grew to a shout as Queen Atlana, who had not -shown herself, leaned over, and clasped Æole to her. - -With a glad cry that brought tears to the eyes near her, the young girl -returned the embrace, and kissed again and again the hands of this -almost mother. - -But soon Queen Atlana raised to her full height, to her lovely, gracious -bearing, and looked about her. - -“Atlanteans,” she said, with a world of meaning. Delighted cries -answered her. - -“Atlanteans, am I right to take her back to the palace—this fair young -captive who hath grown to be my daughter?” - -Deafening were the shouts: - -“Yea! Yea!” - -“Ye will aid me?” - -“We will! We will!” - -She turned to Rica, and said: - -“Order a chair.” - -This Rica proceeded to do of an attendant, as Atlano, in a rage, -vociferated: - -“Nay!” - -Queen Atlana again spoke to Rica: “I will have the chair.” Then to -Atlano, she said low, and with emphasis: “If I am not obeyed, I go not -back to the palace.” - -They eyed each other as no man and wife should. Hard is it when a wife -is obliged, in presence of others, to assert herself. Terrible is it to -perceive a husband’s face take on an expression murderous! The people -again clamored their indignation until Atlana herself quieted them by -the eloquence of her hands. Though there continued cries here and there -for the chair. - -King Atlano had turned aside in sullen discomfiture, when the queen -again spoke the word for the chair. And now it was brought beside her, -and eagerly, if it must be told. - -The attendants were thronging to lift Æole therein when Sensel pressed -in among them, to urge: - -“It is mine to lift her, to bear her.” - -Before they had scarcely accepted his purpose, she was raised from the -bed of lilies and placed in the chair, and he waited calm beside it. - -The queen’s look pierced him, but he returned it proudly, growing so -brilliant that her look became one of amaze. Then, to her surprise, as -well as that of the beholders, she bowed in consent. With that, Sensel -and an attendant bore the chair on to the queen’s chariot. - -As Queen Atlana turned to follow, she beckoned to Electra. Electra then -came beside her, and the queen subjoined: - -“Electra, thou wilt come also.” - -Unmindful of the scowling king, she took the hand of the overjoyed young -girl, and passed with gracious smiles through the lines of intent -islanders, whose love showed in their looks, whose sympathy breathed in -eloquent undertones. Quickly they were entering the great broad low -chariot, on whose soft cushions reclined Æole. - -Sensel was standing very near her. He had been talking with her, and she -was smiling, rosy. Further, to the surprise of the queen and Electra, -she held out her hand when they were about to drive off, and said, in -her gracious way: - -“I will give the parting word, Sensel.” - -“Thou wilt do that after I have seen thee in the palace,” he returned, -in his brilliant manner. Then the chariot drove away. - -True to his word, he was in the courtyard when they arrived, and not -only that, but would lift her out, would place her in the chair, would -help to bear her within. When no more could be done for her, he said, in -softest tone: - -“Now is my parting word, Æole.” - -Then bowing low and elegantly to the queen, he darted away in his most -undulatory fashion. - -“What a strange being,” exclaimed Queen Atlana. “But I like him.” - -“So do we,” murmured Æole, and blushed. - - - - - CHAPTER XII. - THE EARTHQUAKE CONFOUNDS. - - -In the inner sanctuary, the lamps were casting feeble radiance, the -altar fire acting strangely capricious, when Atlano, Oltis, Urgis, and -the superior priests met for conference upon the day’s awful events. - -Close they drew their couches, and reclined to cast about them looks -serious, apprehensive. Only too apparent was the ease affected by Atlano -and Oltis as they surveyed the dark countenances upon which alarm was -setting its seal—as they averted their faces from the majestic, upright -figure that was eyeing them so fixedly. - -This silent one—how they were longing to fall upon him, to strangle, to -trample him under their feet! What was the strange power that held -them—that forced them to his will? Cravens had they become! - -After an ominous quiet of some minutes, and when Atlano was beginning to -chafe under the anxious gaze of these white-robed, imposing figures, he -said, with affected buoyancy, - -“This night we meet not here for mirth. The troubles of the day claim -our thought. But, first, I would ask are any among you shaken—weak of -spirit?” - -They looked at each other in doubt how to answer. Finally, Hafoe, a -priest old in wickedness, spoke out. - -“O King, I believe the gods are in this. I believe they look upon us in -anger.” - -Atlano’s was the utmost suavity. “Though why should the gods look upon -us in anger, Hafoe?” - -There was silence. - -Oltis, who had been glaring at Hafoe, now addressed him. - -“Thou believest the gods look upon us in anger, Hafoe? One week since, -thou didst mock at our rites in the temple, thou didst laugh at the -people because they still hold enough of the faith of their fathers to -come and worship in form, if not in spirit—with the lip, if not with the -heart.” - -“Who mocked, who laughed with me, High Priest Oltis?” returned Hafoe, -angrily. - -“I. And I mock and laugh still. I am not one to change. I tell thee, -Hafoe, I mocked and laughed because I believe not. I fear no gods. I -know not if there are any!” And Oltis brought his fist down heavily upon -the small table at the head of his couch, in his defiance. - -The other priests shivered. Whence had come this strange sensitiveness? -Such language as that of Oltis and Hafoe, such derision of holy things, -had been heard hourly in this inner sanctuary, and heard lightly—even by -those who could not quite steel themselves in unbelief. But now, an -indefinable dread, a strange horror, was creeping over them as they -listened. Therefore, they looked with disapproval upon Oltis because of -his defiance. They would have rebuked his temerity, had they dared, -would have bid him incur no further displeasure from the all too evident -Unseen. - -Yet, even as they looked with growing disfavor, did they begin to -wonder, and shortly, to stare in amaze. - -What was coming over him? - -Even as his hand fell had he become as it were transfixed. The hand that -lay heavily, began to press heavily; the entire body grew in rigidity; -and a deathlike pallor was overspreading his face. Atlano, who had been -gazing alarmed, demanded: - -“Oltis, what aileth thee? Cease that staring.” - -But Oltis continued to stare, and remain rigid. Fearful was it to see -his pallor, even amid this deathlike repose, increase. Hafoe, wan and -trembling, lifted his hand from the table. But it fell a dead weight. -The eyes, in their growing glassiness, were horrible. Hafoe cried: - -“Oltis, dost thou live?” But not a quiver of the eyelids answered, -although the eyes lost none of their intelligence. - -Stonily they watched, wondering if he would come out of this to laugh at -them. Finally Atlano spoke. - -“Oltis, cease thy spells. Wouldst thou have us as thyself?” - -Upon this, the king arose stiffly, and, with some exertion, walked -beside him to gaze in his face, and feel of his skin. - -“Oltis, thou art a corpse, with life in it! What—aileth—thee?” - -But Oltis replied not save by his eloquent eyes. Every other part of him -was marble. Nervously, Atlano bade a priest bring the life cordial. This -was applied to brow and nostrils, but had no effect. Still Oltis was as -dead, except in glance. - -Thus, Atlano sat down. To the terrified priests who had gathered about -the stricken one, he said: - -“Sit ye again. We will talk together—and Oltis can listen, that is if -his ears are as alive as his eyes. Should we settle aught, such can be -laid before him, when he cometh out of this.” - -But they were quivering with dread, and the calm they tried to assume, -made it but the more apparent. The voice of Hafoe shook, his words -dragged feebly. - -“O King Atlano, let us have a care what we say!” - -“We are here to talk upon the troubles of the day, and to settle this -matter of the Pelasgian children,” resumed Atlano. Voice and manner had -gathered assurance. - -“Was not the matter of the Pelasgian children settled this day?” asked -Kluto, the youngest of the priests. - -“It was not settled;” and Atlano looked at him confidently. - -“King Atlano—meanest thou—that thou hast the thought to keep them—after -thy promise?” - -“My promise to what? Kluto, believest thou in that jugglery?” - -“King Atlano, thou didst seem to believe even as much as we.” - -“Have a care!” - -“I mean naught save to fall before thee. But I have the dread that the -earth is about to fade away. Didst thou note the thick, dark look of the -air before we came in here—and how gloomy was our supper room, even with -its many lights?” - -“I did.” - -“And, King Atlano, hast thou noted how faint is the flame on the altar -of the temple—and on this?” - -“I have.” - -“And these lamps in their paling?” - -“I have.” - -“Then what thinkest thou of it all?” - -“It is that the air is heavier than common.” - -“May such not be to our woe!” - -“We can but wait and see.” Atlano’s laugh rang mockingly. - -But with his words, the priests were startled at perceiving a change in -Oltis. They pointed; and the king looked to see him slowly raising his -hand from the table. Then it paused as if to warn. - -“Ah—he doth rouse.” And Atlano arose, and went to him. Lightly he seized -the hand, saying as if to it, “Thou wouldst warn us—wouldst thou? Down!” - -But the hand, in this position, was as iron; and moved not when Atlano, -with all his strength, would have pressed it to the table again. It -remained fixed in the air, enforcing its warning. - -After several trials, Atlano returned to his couch. Very pale, but -determined was his face. He said to the trembling priests as he stood -and looked his haughtiest, - -“Why cower ye? Think ye this is also of the gods? Think ye this will -baffle me?” - -The silent one, the only priest calm and undaunted, arose, and looked at -the king in rebuke. Atlano, unwilling to own to himself the strange -effect of this look, struggled to shout: - -“And I would tell thee, ‘Silent Priest,’ that whether thou comest of -heaven or hell—thou art not to stand and look at me thus. To thy couch! -Further, turn from me thine evil eye. Or, thou too, wilt find that, when -the king willeth, the highest in the temple, if it needeth, shall feed -the holy fire.” - -The silent one stood calm, unblenching. - -“Wilt thou to thy couch?” - -And King Atlano made a step forward as if he would fall upon the man -towering so grandly before him. Another step, and he called: - -“Urgis, Hafoe, Sudor, Kluto—come—that we may bring him to the earth!” - -But neither Urgis, Hafoe, Sudor, Kluto,—nor any other priest—moved at -his bidding. They could but stare at this priest as he stood in his -majesty and fearlessness, could but wonder at the strange power of his -eyes. This strength of look must be what held them. Though, why held it -not Atlano, who was still advancing, with hand stealing within his -garment after his weapon, the mysterious liquor, that had rendered -Hellen impotent. - -Well the priests knew this liquor, for they, in their secret laboratory, -had concocted it after an almost illegible receipt found among the -possessions of the dead Viril, who had been their instructor in alchemic -arts. Well they knew its power! Now, they awaited, in their immobility, -for its sure effect. - -Onward drew Atlano with gleaming eyes and stealing hand. And, when well -upon the ‘Silent Priest,’ who still maintained his wonderful look, would -have drawn the weapon forth to fell him. But, with the significant -attempt, came dread resistance. The hand refused to move, to come from -out the folds that held it! - -Atlano, in his struggle to free the helpless member, grew black in the -face, black of his terror and desire for revenge. Yet, he made as though -he would still advance upon the immovable figure, desisting only when he -found himself inert. Then did his tones ring through the sanctuary. - -“Man—or demon—I fear thee not! I fear not thy spells. Think not this -will confound me. I say to the voice—to those not seen—that I will not -obey. I will not yield the Pelasgian children!” - -Then went up the cry of terror from this inner sanctuary, from the -priests so motionless before. But it was not because of Atlano’s words. -No, the earth was threatening again. Again was smiting upon their ears -the terrific rumbling of the day before. Again was the earth lurching as -does a ship when at mercy of wind and wave. - -Vibration after vibration increased in such force and velocity that it -seemed the hanging lamps must come crashing down, the walls fall in upon -them. Terrible was it to witness the statues of Amen and Poseidon sway -as though they would kiss the floor—and this continuously. More terrible -to hear Oltis’ hand fall with a loud thud upon the table, and yet -perceive that he remained rigid and staring. Most terrible to see Atlano -wrench forth his hand, turn from the silent one, and fly to the passage, -calling after him: “Come—come—ere it be too late!” - -Never had he been so well obeyed. After him sprang the priests, Urgis -leading. Scarce had the last escaped than the ceiling yielded its lamps, -which fell with terrific noise, one almost grazing the hapless Oltis, -who still sat as iron, listening to the swift running in passages and -apartments, the shrieks that filled the air. - -Through the tottering temple sped all to the great court—king, priests, -handmaids, attendants—when there, pausing to watch the temple as it -swayed in the semi-darkness. And, oh the fierce rocking of the earth -beneath! Where could they run? Not toward the ocean, for that was white -in its threatening. Naught was left but to fall on their knees, and -utter prayers that for once were heartfelt. - -The while, they watched the temple which was swaying less and less. -Would it stop, though? Incredulity answered. But, when no longer in -doubt, they fell to embracing each other; and laughed and wept -spasmodically. - -Then occurred another shock, a light one, that sent them into despair. -These light ones continued at short intervals, so that they could but -await the final one, which would bring down the temple. - -People were thronging in to inquire as to the safety of the temple, -remaining long enough to give their experiences, and receive those of -the attendants. Meanwhile, the king stood in his chariot near the -portico surrounded by his guards; whilst scattered about him were -priests and shrinking handmaids, the latter under strict surveillance. - -Long had Atlano been looking on every side in the gloom for the ‘Silent -Priest,’ but without perceiving him. Finally, he beckoned to Kluto. And -asked, “Hast thou seen the ‘Silent Priest’ since we fled?” - -“O King, I have not seen him since we sped from the inner holy place. -Then—he was lost in looking upon Oltis—with no mind for the terrors -about him.” - -“Poor Oltis! I wonder whether he hath moved,” was said ironically. Then, -with concern, he added, “Could it be that the silent one was -harmed—killed by the falling lamps?” - -“It might be, oh King. He seemed fixed, and with no thought of flying.” - -“I will go back, and find what hath happened to him.” - -“Gracious king, dare it not. Wait until the shocks cease I beseech thee. -Or I will go for thee.” - -“Nay—I would go. I can go in and out between them.” - -“There would be no time to get out should the heavy shock that we look -for come whilst thou wert within.—Here is it now!” - -But this proved light also. However, Atlano said, as if to himself: “I -will wait a little.—But—it doth trouble me.” - -Thus, he fidgeted, and looked most anxious. And at last whispered to -Urgis, who stood at his right, “Well would it be if the silent one were -lying stark—stiffer than Oltis!” - -“Gracious king, have a care.”—Urgis looked in fear about him. - -“I am having a care—a care for myself—for all of us. While he liveth, I -cannot breathe. Of that, am I sure. Ah—to see him on the altar!” - -Then, because of Urgis’ terrified look, he laughed recklessly. And -subjoined: - -“I wonder how are the queen and her children. At eve, when I asked after -the sleeping one, I was told that herself and Electra were fastened -within the inner room of the queen, where they were resting. Even the -queen denied me, being therein also. In meek manner did I come away. But -this day—that now is beginning—will they learn the power of the king!” - -Again he laughed recklessly. Though Urgis and the others hearing this -laugh could but shudder. - - - - - CHAPTER XIII. - IN THE ‘DEEPS.’ - - -As Kluto said, the ‘Silent Priest’ had remained in the inner sanctuary -to gaze upon Oltis who still showed no life save in the eyes, that of -his agony, were almost bursting from their sockets. - -Yet alas for Oltis—the greatest shock was to come. His humiliation and -despair were not complete. - -When the fleeing priests were without, the ‘Silent Priest’ moved nearer; -and standing over him, severe in his majesty, gave utterance to speech. -Fearful was it to hear his deep tones in the gruesome apartment, but -more fearful to witness the great beads that started upon Oltis’ -forehead at sound of this voice. - -“Yea, Oltis—I can speak when I will. The time hath come. I have to say I -go from thee for a little. I would look into the hidden things of the -‘Deeps.’ Then will I come back.” - -In Oltis’ eyes was a look of utmost horror, and the perspiration rolled -off him. Yet he stirred not—even when the ‘Silent Priest’ after lighting -a hand lamp, had left the apartment to penetrate those mysteries which -had been supposed so artfully veiled. - -Deucalion entered the passage dividing the withdrawing rooms of Atlano, -Oltis, and Urgis. Unheedful of the lavish luxury disclosed by the open -doors, on he hastened, his eyes, his thoughts intent upon a door at the -end that was set low in the wall. - -Reaching this, he pressed the lower left hand corner. There was heard -the sound of something smoothly moving. The door was disappearing within -the wall, disclosing a stone stairway extending into darkness. - -Lamp in hand, he darted down this to come upon two doors side by side. -He pressed upon the lower right hand corner of the left one; and it -yielded, gliding into the wall about the other which was but an -imitation. - -As though blinded, he stepped through. - -When the film had cleared from his eyes, he beheld spreading deep, a -vast, crypt-like apartment whose high ceiling was supported by pillars -of red syenite; and about which were burning lamps securely fastened in -niches. The walls were covered with a coating of lime so smooth that the -figures painted thereon in rich colors and quite elegantly, stood out in -fine relief. - -As these figures treated of the gods and the future life, Deucalion -would have been glad to study them, had the occasion allowed. As it was, -he but glanced at them; and then his eyes darted from point to point. -Almost instantly, at the farther end, where the shadows were thickest, -they lighted upon some indistinct white objects, that moved with every -vibration of the still rocking building. - -It was a terrible moment for Deucalion. Over him swept a mighty dread—a -dread to go nearer these. Yet, stifling this, he began to run down the -long apartment, tottering as he ran. And came beside these large white -objects—that proved to be beautifully sculptured coffins of alabaster, -mounted on great blocks of red syenite. - -In the extreme of weakness, he fell against the first; and moaned; and -implored for courage to look within. - -And arousing, did so—to weep and groan, to run like a madman from one to -the other until he had looked in all. - -For, here were no priests in these alabaster coffins. Instead, were the -embalmed bodies of what had been fair maidens—each with a lifetime of -woe upon its features. Such haggardness, such suffering, surely never -before were stamped on young faces. So fine was the embalming that every -line showed as in life—and with its weight of agony. - -He ran from one to the other, crying, “Ye powers—could such things be? -Their poor bodies tell the tale. The pretty ones—the tortured ones! -Ah—those thrice-cursed monsters! Yet they live—live to gloat upon their -work. Ye gods—crush them out. Never again let such work mar the face of -earth. Æole, Æole—to see what was before thee!” - -He fell on his knees, the tears streaming, and besought: - -“Mercy, ye gods! Help! Set us free from this house of death! (Ye vile -islanders—to lose these fair ones—and not pull down this pile!) Help me, -ye gods, to save my dear ones. And give Electra, too. Aid me still to -master king, priests, people, until I am on the sea, and bearing my dear -ones to Pelasgia. Ah, Æole, Hellen—what sorrow is like unto this?” - -He arose; and ran again, as if distracted, from coffin to coffin. - -“Ye pretty ones! Where were your fathers—your mothers? Was it for this -ye were given them? Do the gods grant that men may live lost to all save -sense, and die in peace in such? Never! Thrice-cursed island, thou art -doomed! Thou and thy vile people will vanish as down blown by the wind! -And coming ages will doubt thy being; or, if not doubting, will mock at -thee!” - -When he had turned from the last coffin, and was staggering about -aimlessly, he came upon a door set low under the stairway. “Ah,” he -muttered, “I know. It leadeth to the embalming room—the private one of -these priests. Well know they the art—as these tortured ones show.” - -He hastened to this door, and pushed it open. Here again was darkness. -He went for his lamp; and then stepped through into a low passage; and -thence through another door into a very large apartment. As he had -surmised, it was the private embalming room. - -With lamp held high, he walked in its fell shadows, examining. Here was -the crooked piece of iron for drawing out the brain through the -nostrils. Here was the Ethiopian stone for making the incision in the -side. There were the palm wine, the powdered myrrh, the cassia, the -other aromatic drugs. There were the bandages of linen, the gum, the -natron, even the cinnamon. And—yes—there in the most distant corner—were -more of those pure, translucent alabaster coffins. Empty—waiting for -whom? - -The apartment was shaken with his groans. He felt if he staid longer his -senses would give way. Wildly he ran back into the vault, and toward the -stairway. His soul was filled with horror. His eyeballs burned. His body -shook as if with palsy. So overcome was he that, on the topmost step, he -fell panting. And could not rise for many minutes. When he did, it was -to totter to the inner sanctuary. Here he fell on a couch, groaning -repeatedly. - -Finally, his strength returning, he went over to Oltis, and said, “I -have been down the stairway.” - -Over the marble figure passed a tremor. - -“I have seen the dead handmaids in their alabaster coffins!” - -There was another tremor. - -“Whose work was this?” - -The marble lips moved. - -“It was that of Atlano and myself.” - -“This was in thy base search for that draught said to give life without -end? To get this, thou hast tortured those fair young creatures?” - -“Yea. And the younger and fairer, the more the power,” burst from Oltis. -“Viril knew! Viril found it out for his own use! But was so base as not -to tell us!—Though, among his goods, we found a torn piece of papyrus -that gave us the clue. On it was written some of the parts forming the -draught. The blood of maidens—lovely maidens—was one. And, as their -blood dripped from them into the crucible, they were to stand and stir -the blessed mixture. Ah, how we worked! How we tried to find the missing -parts. Maiden after maiden lost her life!” Oltis had become gloating in -his remembrance. “And if, at times, Atlano would have had mercy, I would -not. His mercy, thou canst judge. As for myself, no maiden was so fair -as the one, who, in her mixing, most promised the draught. For, there is -power in maiden blood! Once, we almost reached it. Once, I believed I -should be High Priest—King, forever! But it came to naught.” And his -head sank on his breast. - -“They died then?” - -“Yea. Their blood was their life!” - -“This was done in the room yonder?” - -Deucalion had pointed to a door at the northwestern corner. - -“Yea.” Oltis again raised his head;—his eyes were resuming their -savageness. “Since thou camest—for some reason—we have not had the -wish.” - -“Then—why came Æole into this inner place?” - -“Ask me not.” - -“Ah—Æole—my child—my child!” cried Deucalion, involuntarily. And he fell -on his knees to utter his gratitude. - -“Thanks, ye gods! Thanks that I came in time. Thanks for these powers -that have aided me to this. Ah—Æole—Hellen—to have you again in -Pelasgia. To bring you to the arms of your mother!” - -Most terrible was the cry that burst from Oltis. In his horror at this, -sudden revelation, he started to his feet—but only to sink to his couch, -helpless. Untold agony was upon him. Light had come that was paralyzing, -blinding. Groan after groan rent his stiffened body. - -Deucalion arose to gaze at him; and quickly he calmed almost to stupor. -Then Deucalion questioned him. - -“Where got ye the coffins?” - -“They were made in Khemi;[20] and brought into the vault in the darkest -night.” - -“Doth Kluto know aught of this?” - -“He knoweth not. He was raised to this inner holy place as thou camest. -He hath not been told.” - -“The other higher priests know?” - -“They know, and aided, hoping for the draught. In the temples of all the -great cities are the priests seeking. I have been among them.” Here was -a sigh that had terrible meaning. - -“The rulers, like the king, have aided?” - -“Yea.” - -“That is the reason the captains meet no more?” - -“Yea.” - -“That is the reason the sixth year was not kept?” - -“That was the year before thou camest. We had not the time.” - -“O most wretched people! With all thine ease, there is now no time for -the keeping of thine oldest law, one handed down by thy father Poseidon! -How couldst thou dare to let the sixth year go by, Oltis?” - -“I care not for the olden laws. Thinkest thou because such are graved on -their columns that they must stand forever? We can make laws now for -ourselves; and have.” - -Deucalion shivered. - -This violation in not observing the sixth year was most heinous. The -first men had inscribed its regulations on the great column of -orichalcum, before mentioned, that stood in the grove of Poseidon in -front of the gateway of the great court. Here, before this column, were -the king and sub-kings (or royal rulers), to meet every fifth and sixth -year alternately, in order to consult about public affairs, inquire into -weighty transgressions, and afterward pass judgment. It was a grand -Congress. But before judgment was passed, certain pledges were given, -and in this wise: - -The sacred bulls that ranged the inclosures on the northern slope of the -mountain were hunted by ten chosen men with staves and nooses. When one -was caught, he was led up to the column, and struck upon the head to -fall dead before the inscription. Then, on the altar near the column, -were his limbs offered a burnt sacrifice. Afterward, a cup was partly -filled with his blood; and in this, each one of the Congress cast a -blood clot. Then the rest of the victim was laid on the fire. Thereupon, -each took a golden vessel, drew from the cup, and poured a libation upon -the fire, at the same time swearing that he would punish transgressors, -that he would not violate the inscriptions, and that he would not obey -any ruler who would command him to act contrary to the laws of Poseidon. -After drinking, each vessel was dedicated to the temple. - -When supper was eaten, and the altar fire was out, they put on beautiful -azure robes; and sat in the darkness before the embers of the sacrifice -in order to receive and give judgment. At daybreak were written on -golden tablets their sentences, which were then deposited in the temple -as memorials, together with the robes. - -At the end, they swore not to take up arms against each other; ever to -aid the royal house in case of rebellion; and, in common, to deliberate -upon war, giving the supremacy to the house of Atlas. Further, the king -promised never to decide upon the life or death of a kinsman unless he -had the assent of a majority of the sub-kings.[21] - -This was the most ancient and most important of observances. Yet rulers -and priests had combined to neglect it—whilst the people looked on. No -wonder was it that Deucalion shivered. - -Upon recovering somewhat, he exclaimed: “Oltis, it is the crowning -crime!” - -“We have not lost through it. Let not thy mind be weighted.” Scornful -was his tone. - -“Oltis, I am borne to earth. Yet will I rise that I may bring the people -to the ‘Deeps’—there to behold thy work—there to open their -eyes—shouldst thou not do as I bid thee.” - -The figure again growing into marble shuddered. Great beads of -perspiration started. But no words came. - -“Oltis, when day breaketh, thou wilt go with me to the portico, and tell -the people this: That the powers above will that the Pelasgian children -leave with me at once. A few words will do. Else—” - -The marble again quivered; the lips murmured, “I will.” - -Deucalion sat down before the wretched man, and pondered. - -“Those who pressed within this inner holy place yesterday, may have -noted that there were no signs of the missing handmaids. And, of this, -the people may have been told. They should, then, be more than ever in -doubt as to their present place—unless they are dead of all feeling. - -“Though, what else can come of a people who can bear such mockeries, who -break the marriage laws, who wed within forbidden limits, who are given -over to feasting, drinking, pleasuring; who think no longer of raising -higher the mind, but only of delighting the body; and yet, who, in the -midst of all, daily see and touch monuments that speak with force of -past virtue, of a worship once most pure. - -“Should these islanders be brought in to see the sight below, it would -not help. For the island is doomed. Not long could these evils last even -if the islanders should still be as stone, after seeing. And any trouble -now, will but hinder our going. - -“I have it. I will write what I have seen; and ere leaving, will send it -to the people of Chimo. They are the best and strongest of these -islanders. Yea that will I do. It may help the handmaids, should the -doom of the island be stayed a little. - -“But, ah, this strange inner sight, why faileth it? Why, for many days, -hath it left me, so that I know not if Pyrrha liveth. Yet, why should I -doubt, after what I have felt and seen? Sure am I that she liveth. Sure -am I that, in the end, joy will be ours. Yet am I weak—weak!” - -Whilst thus Deucalion mused and suffered, the day broke. With the first -entering rays of the sun, Oltis stirred; and gradually shook off the now -willing iron bands. Shortly he arose, but only to fall back of his -weakness. Then Deucalion gave him of the life cordial, after mixing with -it a few drops of a red elixir. Thereupon, Oltis arose, and stretched as -if arousing from sleep. Some minutes afterward, he was walking about -unsteadily. And Deucalion waited a little. - -“Oltis, lean upon me. We will go to the portico.” - -He complied. Sad was it to see the docility of this hitherto proud and -intractable man. As they walked, Deucalion spoke low: - -“Say but the words that will speed the children and myself on our way to -Pelasgia.” - -“I know thee, at last, strange man,” was returned wearily. “But what -knowledge! Ah, if Atlano but knew! Even as it is—how hath he longed for -thy blood. And—to find—thou art—Deucalion!” - -“This knowledge must be thine alone. He is not to know.” - -“I will be dumb. But how hast thou mastered us.” - -“I will master you—when, with the children, I am on the sea, and facing -Pelasgia.” - -“How didst thou get such power? Are there gods?” - -“Oltis, there are. Know sorrow for thy sin, ere it be too late.” - -“I cannot. Of what use is such sorrow? It would come only of fear. -Should the fear be no more, I would be as I have been.” - -“Thou speakest truth. Sorrow for sin should come of the heart alone. But -that may be thine. Sorrow thus for warmth to the gods.” - -“Sir Deucalion, I know no warmth of feeling. I never knew such for aught -of earth—not even for my children. How then could I know it for the -gods, if such there be? I tell thee if there is a life beyond, I am -doomed.” - -“Say not so, Oltis. If one spark of feeling could begin to glow in thy -heart, it would spread, giving heat, life to all the inner man—wouldst -thou grant it air. Faint though the spark, it groweth with little -feeding.” - -Oltis sighed; then said, “I could strangle thee, now, had I the power. -That is my spark of feeling! To be thus humbled, weakened! Oh, but to -have my fingers about thy neck, to see thine eyes burst from thy head, -to fix that head on a pillar in the air, to watch the birds of prey -gather its flesh, mite by mite! How I ache! How I pant for thy blood!” - -“Have done,” spoke Deucalion sternly, “or worse will befall thee than -thou dreamest. Wouldst thou be given over to the tender mercy of the -people?” - -“I will do that I am forced to. But—for one moment of freedom!” Dreadful -were his writhings. - -“Calm thyself. We are almost at the portal.” - -And, at the portal they were—most suddenly to come out before the -watching islanders. - -The sun was just above the horizon when the shouts arose, “The High -Priest!” “The ‘Silent Priest’!” “Behold!” “Behold!” - -Atlano, who was talking with Urgis, turned; and perceived the two -standing on the portico. Intense chagrin was expressed in his face as he -gazed and wondered. The ‘Silent Priest’ not killed! But, instead, thus -appearing,—bearing up Oltis who was trembling as an aged man. “What -meant it?” - -But the high priest was beckoning. In answer, the people surged forward. -When there was quiet, Oltis spoke. - -“King Atlano, Priests, People, these troubles are of the gods. Anger -them no further. Hearken to this, their will. Ere the morn is two hours -older will the Pelasgian children leave, and with the ‘Silent Priest.’” - -Atlano’s derisive laugh burst forth. But the people began to cry their -acquiescence. It was: - -“So shall it be!” “So shall it be!” “We will be rid of them!” “They are -a scourge!” - -The guards encircling Atlano appeared alarmed. Already they were fearing -some manifestation against him. But he, with wonderful coolness, replied -to Oltis, “How are we to believe that the gods thus will?” - -“In like manner as the people believed that, at will of the gods, the -handmaids were forced into the inner holy place—never to be seen more!” -Loud rang the imperial voice, seeming to be thrown from high above. - -Atlano paled in a terrible way. Many of the priests fell on their faces. -The people groaned, and pressed about the guards so that the latter were -forced to point their spears and raise their battle axes. And, oh the -sullen discomfiture smoldering in some eyes, the menacing lightning -ready to dart from others! - -But Atlano was brave. He spoke again, with boldness, “Oltis, go within. -Thou art feeble, too feeble, to stand there. Thy mind giveth way—as hath -thy body. Go within.” - -Oltis indeed proved the weakness of his body by falling against the -‘Silent Priest,’ who lifted him, and bore him inside, after signifying -that he would return. - -When Oltis had been laid upon his couch in the inner sanctuary, the -‘Silent Priest’ reappeared before the ominously quiet people, and signed -that he would at once depart, recommended them to the mercy of the gods, -blessed them, and bade farewell. - -Then to Sensel, who was near, he delivered a roll of papyrus addressed -to the queen. - -As for Atlano, he felt it was policy to be quiescent. After the besotted -conduct of Oltis, there was no knowing what might happen. As to the -voice, he would still disclaim it. - -Then, as the ground was resting of its tremors, he ordered the guards to -disperse the excited, awakening islanders. When the great court was -quite emptied, he entered the temple to seek Oltis that he might upbraid -him for his faint-heartedness. - -Speedily he was beside the wretched high priest, who lay with closed -eyes, scarcely breathing: though not a word was vouchsafed to all his -questions and vituperations. Thus, as a resource, he bethought him of -the queen and her charges; and, returning to the courtyard, called his -guards, and drove to the palace. - -As he passed along, much the people marveled. Never before had a king of -Atlantis been known to require protection in driving between the temple -and the palace. Attendants, of course, were customary;—but guards! What -meant such a passing as this? - - - - - CHAPTER XIV. - A TIMELY TORRENT. - - -Queen Atlana and her young charges were finishing a hurried meal in the -most delightful of morning rooms. This was in the east garden, and had -for floor, velvety grass; for ceiling, the interlacing boughs of two -fragrant acacias; for background, a trellis overrun with morning-glories -and flanked at each end by tall white lilies and the high blue shoots of -the papyrus. - -Further the favorite lotus flowers spread thick on the bosom of a stream -to the eastward that was running blithely to lose itself in the -beautiful Luith. Flowers, flowers were everywhere; for this was their -land. And those of the trellis in their white, pink, blue, crimson, and -purple, were preëminent for size and tint. - -Who, with any spirituality, can look upon these thick-clustering -morning-glories as they open joyfully to the morning sun, and not think -of a higher blossoming? In their delicate texture, and soft rich -coloring, they suggest the flowers of Heaven. Their ethereal loveliness -fills the heart with a most tender rapture. Fit types are they of that -fairer blooming of the Uplands, to which the eye has not yet pierced, to -which the ear is yet unopened! - -The grand eating apartment, or banqueting room, was in the western wing -of the palace, and facing the south. But the breakfast room proper faced -the east, and overlooked this garden morning room, the latter -superseding the former for about three-fourths of the year, from the -tenderness of the climate. - -In the simplicity of their diet and table service, the Atlanteans might -be held an example. Theirs were no cumbersome, broad tables weighed down -with plate and ornamentations. The dishes and drinking vessels were of -gold, silver, bronze, or tin, as accorded with the degree of the family -using; and were of simplest pattern and beaten light, the spiral being -the principal adornment. There were spiral handles, and spiral supports -to the larger dishes, also. As to the tables, they were hollow, either -broken circles or horseshoes in shape, and of three feet in width—of -course affording seating capacity on the outer side only. Thus, well -could the Atlanteans arrange for effective backgrounds, well could they -be served. Further, such waitresses were theirs! Through the openings of -these broken circles, or horseshoes, flitted beauteous maidens, -white-robed and garlanded, who could but whet the appetite. Maidens ever -served in Atlantis. Clever people! - -In the middle of her table, sat Queen Atlana, with Æole on the right, -and Electra on the left; while, farther along the broken circle, on -either side, ranged her ladies. For this morning, there was a -visitor—Hellen; and his place was at the end, on the queen’s right. - -All were facing the garden, and the sun which was well up; and feeling -happily conscious of the fairy-like background, the soft singing stream, -the warblers in the acacia blooms overhead, and the lovely gliding -maidens attending their few wants. - -Three feet was the space allotted each at the table; and the dividing -lines were rows of flowers extending crosswise, flowers of scent so -delicate that they could not interfere with the appetite of the most -sensitive. - -Fancy a breakfast of eggs, milk, honey, dried birds, fruit, and cakes -made of corn and honey—ye epicures. Well would it be could ye more than -fancy. Well would it be for your poor, ill-treated organs! - -But, upon this sensible, paradisiacal breakfast was stealing the -serpent. Through the garden was approaching Atlano, though not with the -soft, quick gliding of the animal mentioned, but with infuriated stride. -However, as the serpent is the symbol of sense, the comparison will -hold. - -And the happy eyes of the eaters fell as one upon him! For, they were -happy, in spite of what had been undergone, in spite of the parting to -come. They were happy in being together. - -Very calmly, cheerfully did the queen arise to meet him as he drew near, -though his scowling looks were sufficient to have chilled the stoutest -heart. However, in response to her salutation, he forced a smile; and -bowed to the others, who, following the queen’s example, had also arisen -and saluted him. - -Then he said, in questioning tone, “Ye are early at the morning meal.” - -“Yea, Atlano. But—for very good cause.” Rather faltering was the queen’s -reply. - -“I have not broken fast since this troubled night.” - -“Come, then; and be strengthened.” With the words, Atlana motioned him -to the seat relinquished by Æole. Quite tractably he took this, and was -permitting the maidens to serve him, when his eyes fell upon Hellen, who -was standing beside Æole and Electra, and talking fast. - -Direful was the anger that showed in his face; and this smote upon the -queen. Though she tried to talk with ease as he grew even angrier, -seeming with every morsel to choke the more. Finally, unable to restrain -himself, he demanded in what is known as a stage undertone, “Why is -Hellen here—and at this meal?” - -“It is his last morning, as thou knowest.” - -“I know it not.” - -“They leave this day.” - -“I have not said the word.” - -“Thou hast promised.” - -“I meant it not.” - -“We have made ready.” - -“That doth not matter.” - -Then perceiving that the three had ceased their talking, and were -watching him, he beckoned, and said, “Æole, come hither.” - -She, with the others, approached. - -He arose from his scanty meal, and in softened tone, inquired: - -“Æole, wouldst thou be glad to leave us?” - -“Gracious King, I would be glad to go to my home; but am loth to leave -Queen Atlana.” The lovely face had become downcast. - -“But Pelasgia is not so far,” interposed the queen. “And we have good -vessels. How strong is my wish to journey thither with thee, Æole, and -place thee in the arms of thy mother!” - -“Much good would the vessels do thee, Atlana,” said the king with -meaning. “It is not for thee to go so far.” - -“I forgot.” She laughed in a sorrowful way. “Too well I know the need of -my presence to the king!” - -“And thou, Electra, what wilt thou do when Æole hath left us?” - -“King Atlano, I will live in the hope of meeting her, if even in -Pelasgia.” - -“We will come for thee, Electra,” spoke Hellen. “Pelasgia will not be -Pelasgia—nor my mother, mother—nor my father, father—without thee. Where -thou art is the home for me. Rather would I stay here than go from thee -to the brightest fate!” - -“Hush, Hellen!” Poor Electra was trying hard to bear up. - -“Through the night and this morning have I wavered between my home and -thee. Now is my mind clear!” And Hellen looked about him, fierce in his -determination. - -“Trouble thyself no longer, Hellen. Thou wilt never go back. Neither -will Æole. I have need of thee, of her. Thou forgettest the pain in -store for thee. I am not done with that. Never spoke Atlantean to king -as hast thou, the stranger, the captive. This island may sink ere I -forget it!” - -The king was working himself into fury again. The listeners stood -petrified, all but the queen. She spoke out with fine spirit: - -“Atlano, I have this to tell thee. It hath been sent me that they are to -go. A little after daybreak came the word. Since then my serving men -have been making ready. I must tell thee,”—and she spoke faster,—“that I -have ordered my galley. And another galley is making ready with food and -drink for the use of Hellen and Æole. The two galleys are to sail down -Luith to the coast, and up along that until they meet the ‘Silent -Priest’ who will come in his boat.” - -“Where gottest thou all this?” stammered the king. - -“Didst thou not know? There came the written word from the ‘Silent -Priest’ scarce an hour since. Sensel brought it.” - -“Here is fine doing,” vociferated he. “And thou to obey! Art thou, like -Oltis, becoming weak of mind? Art thou crazed?” - -“If to be crazed is to wish well to Æole and Hellen, if to be crazed is -to wish to see them well away from this island, if to be crazed is to -wish to obey that grand priest—then that I am.” Drawing herself up, she -looked at him with such brave eyes that he, in fear for what she might -next say, temporized: - -“Atlana, thou must know—everything hath gone wrong since this meddling -priest set foot on the sands.” - -“Have a care, King Atlano.” - -“Ah, the fiery Electra speaketh. So, he is a favorite of thine.” - -“He is. Better, he is the worker of the gods. That is why things have -gone wrong, as thou callest it. Thy wrong meaneth right on the other -side. There are two sides to all things.” - -This was dreadful, but such was the force of example. If the queen would -demean herself by speaking her mind, what could be expected of -underlings. He glared from the rather aghast Atlana to this rebellious -Electra, and said, as if hurling a weapon, “This, thy worker of the -gods, is to come down from his height. Ere the day closeth, will he be -yielded upon the altar!” - -“Beware,” came from Hellen. And he made a step forward. - -“Ha! Now it is the rash Hellen of ready tongue. Boy, thou art not in -Pelasgia.” - -“But soon will be.” Then his crest lowered, for he thought of Electra. - -“Hellen,” urged the queen, “better would it be if thou didst not speak.” -Then to the king, she said appealingly, “Atlano, of a truth, the galleys -wait for us. Let us to them. As thou goest, it may be that thou wilt -look with other eyes upon this.” - -“Never will I look with other eyes. But I will go with thee to make this -naught.” - -“Make it not naught, King Atlano,” interposed Æole, to the amazement of -all, even himself. Never before had she been known to address him. “Make -not naught our going. The heart of Queen Atlana is in this. Let not her -hopes come to naught. And, anger not the gods.” - -“Hearken unto her, Atlano,” entreated the queen. “Let them go. Further, -grant that I may go a short way with them. And come thou on this little -sail.” - -Atlano was looking into the beautiful, starry eyes that were even more -eloquent than the sweet tones. And, most suddenly, felt like giving way. -But, checking the impulse, he replied, as if to Atlana, - -“However willing I may be for thee to enjoy thy ‘little sail,’ I may not -grant it for strong reason. Thou knowest why.” - -“Atlano, I will be gone but half the day. If thou wilt bring to mind, -thou wert willing I should go to Chimo, and stay for days, not long -since.” - -“Then skies were fair, and the gods smiling. But, I take it, these late -troubles make of need thy presence here.” - -“Atlano, once thou didst laugh at that prophecy.” - -“Then I was young, and not so wicked.” He laughed recklessly. - -“Of a truth, a stay so short cannot work evil.” - -“Atlana, thy words seem as though I had said this thing could be. Talk -no more of it.” - -“Gracious King,” urged Æole, again to the surprise of all, “shouldst -thou say the word, and then come with us, thou art with the queen.” - -“Æole, the prophecy doth run, ‘_With Atlana at the palace, no evil -befalleth Atlano._’ Wouldst thou have her go, did I grant it, after -this?” - -“Nay, King Atlano, not if it doth run thus.” - -“Æole, thou dost yield too soon,” cried Electra, in her annoyance. “What -are twenty prophecies to thy getting away!” - -“Ah, it is Electra again,” sneered Atlano, “the lady of the tongue.” - -“I bless heaven for my tongue if it doth wage for the right. So may all -women. Only cowards or tyrants need fear the tongues of honest women; -and of their fear they rail.” - -“And thou, it seemeth, hast had the hope of sharing in this ‘little -sail.’ Will this help thee to it?” - -“The gods will help me.” - -“The gods, it seemeth, are thy very good friends.” And, oh his mocking -tone! - -“Well would it be were they thy friends, King Atlano.” - -Her eyes held more meaning even than her solemn tones. As if to ignore -both, he turned to address Æole just as an attendant came from behind -the trellis with the message that the galleys were in readiness. Then -the ladies Rica and Elna who had gone within, reappeared, robed for the -trip and bearing the queen’s wraps as well as those of Æole and Electra. - -When Atlana’s mantle was placed about her, she addressed the king: “Now -are we ready to go to the galleys—if it needeth to see them off—if it -needeth to go with them a little. Say but the word, Atlano.” - -He replied not. She continued, “Come. And thou, Æole, walk on this side. -Electra, thou wilt follow with Hellen. Rica and Elna, ye will -lead.—Where is Azu?” - -For answer, there was heard a sound as of a falling body. All turned -knowing what this meant, knowing they should behold Azu flat on his -face. This was ever the manner in which he testified his knowledge of -the presence of the king. And there he was, prone in front of the -trellis, behind which he had been awaiting call. - -Even Atlano laughed. Then, as usual, he gave the word to arise, which -Azu did in sprightly fashion, to stand grinning and bowing, and showing -only the whites of his great round eyes. - -“Come, Azu,” said the queen. “Thou wilt hold up my robe.” - -Azu lurched to this; and held up the train tenderly. The queen -continued, “Now will we go.” - -In this order, was the reluctant king borne through the garden, and on -to the landing place. With scowling eyes fastened on the ground, he -pondered as to the words he should speak upon arriving there. And no -speech would he vouchsafe by the way. - -Hellen and Electra, naturally, fell a little behind. When well beyond -hearing, Hellen said low, “Electra, the king will never give the word.” - -“Hellen, the king will give the word.” - -“Thou art as full of hope as of strength. How didst thou come by a -spirit so light?” - -“Always hath it been mine. Never have I known fear.” - -“But, of late thou hast known it?” - -“Nay. Though I lost hope when I believed Æole had passed away. How I -prayed to go to her.” - -“Hadst thou no thought for me—for my double sorrow?” - -“Hellen, I did think of thee. I knew thou wouldst sorrow much. But -further, I knew it would not be for long. Thou wouldst have come to us. -And what joy to be in the other life together!” - -“Had I thy hope.” - -“Now shouldst thou have it if ever.” - -“It cometh. Electra, hearken. I hug to myself that which even Æole -knoweth not. Who, thinkest thou, is the ‘Silent Priest’?” - -“One sent of the gods.” - -“But who—what person is he?” - -She looked at him keenly, and noted his excitement.—“Thou meanest -not—that he cometh from Pelasgia?” - -“But I do—he cometh from there.” - -“It cannot be that—he is—thy father?” Her voice had sunk to an awed -whisper. - -“Electra, thou readest my mind. Yea, yea, he is my father, that father I -have so doubted. Thou canst imagine a little my shame, my sorrow. But I -have told him, and he hath said that he doth know—that it was but in -nature. Such is his grand heart.” - -Electra had paused, and was breathing hard. For the first time in her -life, words refused to come. Thus Hellen went on. - -“Yea, and this is his plan for saving us. His wisdom hath caused these -wonders—all save the quakings of the earth, and the voice. In Pelasgia, -so much of hidden knowledge was his that the people called him the -‘favorite of the gods.’ And the gods are with him now.” - -“But—the voice—Hellen?” - -“The voice—ah, that is Sensel.” And he enlightened her. For the moment -she stood motionless; and then seizing his arm that they might hasten -on, murmured: - -“Thou, Hellen, to further doubt! It is past belief. Help me to believe.” - -“Electra, where now is thy surety?” laughed he gaily and fondly. - -“That is right, Hellen. Turn upon me. I merit it after making naught thy -words.” She smiled bewitchingly. - -“Turn upon thee, I will! If the king sayeth the word for us to go, thou -wilt see such a turning upon, shouldst thou not be of us. I will turn -away from them to thee. Thus will I turn upon thee. Never will I leave -thee!” - -Hard was it for Electra to bear up under this. And more might follow. -Hellen would do the wildest, rashest things, without doubt; for this -reason she must divert his thoughts. - -“I think when the thought cometh to one as strong as it did to me, -during last night, that we should this day go sailing from Atlantis, it -meaneth much. It meaneth we shall go. But what a drear night was this -last, Hellen.” - -“It was spent with thee and Æole. Therefore, was it bright.” - -There was danger again. Fortunately, a turn in the garden brought them -in sight of the landing place, where the others of the party were -pausing, with faces turned toward them expectantly. Thus, they quickened -their pace. - -At the marble landing place awaited the two galleys, gay in their -bright-colored awnings and hangings; whilst hovering about, were other -galleys belonging to the palace and the neighboring nobles. The queen’s -galley, the smaller of the two, was built of cedar, and its sides were -ornamented in ebony and gold. It had but one mast, whose sail was of the -costly byssus. The hangings and awnings were also of byssus, white, and -richly embroidered in pale blue and corn color. The deck was inlaid with -fine woods; and in the middle was the withdrawing room. This was built -of satin wood, and paneled within in sandalwood; and was furnished with -rugs, couches, tables, and chairs, all luxurious. On either side of this -apartment, were stretched awnings, beneath which were more rugs and -couches. - -The other galley was arranged much like the queen’s, but was not so -luxurious in its appointments, or lavish in its hangings. Evidently it -was built for use. Scattered about its deck were baskets of provisions; -whilst near the prow was a shallow hold, also containing baskets, and -jars large and small. The withdrawing room had doors instead of -hangings. The one sail was square, large, and of strong linen colored -blue. Indeed, there was an air about this galley indicating it meant -work. Thus, the eyes were attracted toward it full as much as toward the -elegant one of the queen. - -The figurehead of the queen’s galley was a bust of Amen; that of -Hellen’s, a bust of Poseidon. Both flaunted banners bearing the symbol -of Atlantis, a cross surrounded by a circle,[22] in gold. From each, -many pennants were flying symbolic of Poseidon’s arrival on the island -and his meeting with Cleito, the symbols being wrought in gold upon a -blue ground. - -Of the sailors, or oarsmen belonging, a few were at the oars; but the -greater number were on the decks of the neighboring galleys. - -Overhead, the sky was welcoming the beauteous Aurora who was now -treading securely on her way. The hush, the glow, the heavenliness of -young morn was upon all; and a little of its peace fell upon the spirits -of the queen and her young charges, so that they stood silent, for the -moment; giving inward, upward voice to their yearnings, and finding -hope. - -O East, with thy potent beams! It was for reason that the most ancient -nations looked in thy direction for the especial Divine presence! It was -for reason that their temples faced thee, their altars were placed -toward thee; that they themselves, when bending the knee, looked to -thee! For reason was it that the Star was set in thee, that the wise men -journeyed—of their knowledge—toward thee and It! - -Already, on this bright morn, were the islanders forgetting their -terrors of the night. Banks of canal and stream were lined with them, -for they of their curiosity, were awaiting what the king would do. Would -he obey the voices of the past few days? Would he fulfill his promises -to the Unseen? Would the queen show herself when her young charges were -to leave? - -And now,—here she was! Surely the king was about to make good his -promises. With keenest expectation, they waited until the queen should -look a little about her. Then, they shouted their love. She, deeply -touched, bowed again and again; and smiled rarely. - -But, there were no welcoming voices for the king; and the queen felt a -culprit that she had received all. Meanwhile, Atlano had affected to be -observing the galleys, such affectation giving place to interest until -his dark face grew darker. Not long was he in bursting forth: - -“Good work was this. And in an hour! Whom didst thou get—of these slow -Atlanteans to manage this?” - -“Sensel ran much—and helped in the bearing.” The queen’s tone was -meekness itself. - -“He is the spawn of evil,” vociferated Atlano, regardless who might -hear. “And his fitting master is that ‘Silent Priest.’ I tell thee, -Atlana, it is they have brought these evils upon us. I am more than ever -sure it is their presence that doth anger Amen. Now I again say—and -before you all—that Hellen and Æole shall not go. Then for some fine -gifts on the altar with the morrow. The gods would thus order! Ha—ha!” - -He looked a demon. Queen Atlana became gray in her terror, and clasped -Æole to her. Hellen, freeing himself from Electra’s detaining grasp, was -about to dart upon him when prevented in a manner as unexpected as -appalling. - -They were standing on a marble terrace beside a placid stream, beneath a -smiling sky, and about them were heard the murmurings of the listening -islanders. But, in an instant, came dread change. The sky darkened to -blackness; great raindrops splashed down; and a shower succeeded that -flooded the terrace in a moment. Further, wildest cries of terror arose -from the fleeing islanders seeking cover. - -Panic seized upon those on the landing place. They flew down the -stairway to the shelter of the larger galley—Atlano leading and helping. -Into the withdrawing room they sped, to close the doors, and drop upon -the couches. - -For full a minute the torrent beat—whilst they sat voiceless, cowering. -Then it ceased as suddenly as it had come; and the sun poured its beams -with such strength that they began to pant for the air. When the doors -were opened, they looked out upon a scene so brilliant that they were -obliged to shade their eyes. Never had the sun been as potent thus -early. - -They sank again upon the couches; and listened with dread to the running -off of the water from the galley’s deck. - -“My poor galley,” the queen murmured after a little, “in what a state is -it. And the food—it is ruined.” - -“Thus is it that the gods smile upon me,” triumphed Atlano. - -The four confounded ones glanced hopelessly at each other. Even Electra -was despairing. What evil fate was this? - -Suddenly, footsteps were heard just without the door. Electra arose; and -looked out to perceive Sensel. - -“What is it, Sensel?” - -“Naught is harmed.” And he pointed toward the hold. It was closed and -the deck shorn of its baskets. He pointed next to Azu, who like himself -was dripping, but whose port was that of a conqueror. Then at Electra’s -inquiring look, he continued: - -“I was in the hold when the sky darkened. It took scarce a minute to -gather the baskets, throw them into the hold and close it. I had ended -while ye stood confounded and then began to flee. As ye darted down the -stairway, I called Azu; and we leaped from this galley to that of the -queen, and threw over her withdrawing room the shield used for showers, -and drew in the outer rugs and couches. The awnings and hanging are -dripping; but, with this sun, will dry in a few minutes. Thou shouldst -have seen Azu work!” - -“Sensel, thou hast saved us. Azu, the queen shall know.” Then Electra -turned to the eager listeners inside. - -“Thou seest,” she said to the king. - -“I hear, and it is Electra,” he returned mockingly. Though it was plain -that Sensel’s words had upset him, as he was paling and flushing in a -manner distressing to witness; and his eyes were sullen and averted. - -The queen was silently giving thanks. Then she arose, her expression -most confident. - -“Hellen, Æole, Electra, what is this strange heat but the more aid from -above. Let us not sink under it, but go out, and look as it drieth -everything.” - -They arose to follow her, therewith hearing the familiar sound of a body -falling. Azu was ready. He again lay flat in expectation of the king. - -But when they had passed out, and had waited, and the king came not, -Queen Atlana said, “Azu, arise.” - -When he was on his feet, she continued, “Azu, I speak the thanks of all. -Well hast thou done. May I never forget it!” - -Azu’s smile was ecstatic; and, between bows to the ground, and gasps, he -managed to reply: - -“Most gracious, most glorious Queen, for thee I can never do enough. -What hast thou done for me!” - -It was a long speech for him, and rather overcoming. Seeing this, the -queen said in her kindest tone, “And now, Azu, my robe.” - -When he had shuffled behind her, and was holding her train in his loving -manner, she beckoned to Sensel who came to kneel gallantly before her. -Then she extended to him her hand which he kissed in prince-like -fashion—and to her surprise. - -“Sensel, thou wilt not look for words. None could speak what I feel.” - -“Gracious Queen, the smile thou givest me, speaketh beyond words. And, -it was but little.” - -“It hath saved Æole and Hellen.” Her low tone was so impressive that the -hearers were thrilled. Then, in sprightly fashion she subjoined: - -“Now, Sensel, arise. And lead us that we may note the power of this -sun.” - -Thereupon, they walked about to exclaim, “The wonder of it!” “The wonder -of it!” For, so rapid was the drying that clouds of vapor were -ascending. Already was the deck as free from moisture as it had been -before. - -As to the king, long was he in appearing. When he came out to them, his -head was drooping, his tones mumbling. - -“Atlana, I yield. Hellen and Æole may go. And thou mayest take thy -‘little sail;’ though let it not go beyond a few hours. I look for thee -by the wane of the day.” - -In the midst of the sudden joy, was felt perplexity, fear. What had come -upon him? Was this most alarming interposition of the elements producing -effect? Or, was there more beneath? - -After some moments’ quiet, the queen of her incredulity, asked, “Atlano, -meanest thou—that I can go?” - -“I mean it.” Again were the words mumbled: then, with bent head, he -turned to leave them. - -But Æole, in her pity and gratitude, went after him; and said bravely: - -“Gracious King—” - -He faced her. “Speak, Æole.” - -“Gracious King, bid us good speed. And, we would thank thee.” - -“Æole, thank me not. I would have done thee—harm. But—the powers—have -come—between!” He spoke with a queer reluctance of articulation. Then an -expression came into his face that caused the beholders to shrink with -horror. It was that of a soul that, at last, sees the vortex, the -Gehenna, to which it has been trending; of a soul that, in spite of its -better knowledge and its fast coming fate, would not shake off the -evilness of its bent, the sensuality that had destroyed it! - -Æole, alone, did not see this look. For, as the king faced her, she had -glanced at Sensel to receive his intent gaze; and thereby had blushed, -and bent her head. She lifted it to behold him staring at the king, -horrified. When, in her alarm, she looked about her, it was but to see -horror depicted on every face. As all eyes were on the king, she then -turned to him. - -The questioning look of her deep, clear, innocent eyes was as a shock to -Atlano; and a good impulse stirred him. Possibly some unselfish spring -was yet remaining within him. His lips moved as if he would speak, -though no sound came at first, with all his effort; but finally, his -unwilling tongue moved spasmodically. - -“Good speed, Æole. And know—that—for thee—I would have dared earth and -the powers beyond. But now I tell thee—I am glad that ruin doth threaten -me—to thy saving!” - -Bending over, he kissed her robe. Then with no look about him, moved -from their sight. - -Æole was so overcome that Sensel came beside her, and led her within the -withdrawing room, and to a couch. As she sank thereon, he entreated, -“Æole, cheer. The worst is past. Now for Pelasgia!” - -“But thou, Sensel?” she murmured. - -“I will go with thee. I came to go when I willed. It is my will to leave -this island.” - -All precious was the joy that came into her face. - -“Sensel, always have I felt that thou camest for our good.” - -“Æole, the service of my life is thine.” Then, noting her changing -color, her shrinking attitude, he added, in his usual voice, “Now will I -go to the queen. She hath sore pain.” - -But the poor queen, weeping bitterly, was just about to enter, supported -by Electra and Rica. These drew her to a couch. When she had calmed -somewhat, Sensel bowed low before her, awaiting permission to address -her. “What is it Sensel?” she was quick to ask. - -“Gracious Queen, shall I give the word to the captains to call the -oarsmen that we may go?” - -“Yea, yea!” she cried brokenly. “And forever! May I never more see this -landing. May Atlano be forever freed from my presence. Better were it -for me to sink beneath the sea than to cumber him further. Oh, for -death! So that he may no longer see my sad eyes, and through them the -grieving heart beneath. Electra, I pray for death!” - -“Not so, dear Queen,” answered Electra, bending over her in tears. “It -is not thine to pray for death. It was not mine to pray for death as I -did when I thought Æole had passed away. It is ours to be calm, and -bear, believing all is ordered.” - -“Electra,” was whispered, “this moment I feel that I hate Æole; and now -that I say it I am flooded with fond feeling for her. I am torn—torn!” - -“Ever art thou fond of her, dear Queen. But, thou wouldst have reason, -were she not so pure, to hate her without end. But, thou must think, it -is Æole—pure, weak, grieving Æole.” - -“I know, I know. I will go to her; and clasp her.” With this, she arose, -and went to sit beside Æole, to draw her to her as a mother might. Then -they whispered together to their comforting. - -Meanwhile, Sensel had informed the captains of the galleys that they -were to depart; thus, pennants of red and gold were run up to call the -oarsmen to their posts. When these were in their places, Sensel came -again to the queen to report; and added: - -“Queen Atlana, I go now to my master. We will meet the galleys off the -great pile of rocks on the eastern coast.” - -She smiled faintly, despite her sore heart. “Thanks to thee, Sensel. -And, good speed to thee.” - -After one look at Æole, he bounded from the galley to the stairway; and -vanished. - -Then the queen, with Æole, Electra, and her ladies went on board her own -galley. Instantly the galleys moved off; and were followed by many of -those of the nobles as well as those of less degree, in compliment to -herself. While these glided through the canal, and through the water -lilies of the stream, the islanders on the banks chanted their love for -her. And happily they sang. - -Atlana, in response, stood under her awning, bowing to right and left, -and kissing her hand. Thus, on sped the galleys to the harbor; through -the harbor to the ocean; and along the coast to the point where the -‘Silent Priest’ was to join them. - -Here, opposite the pile of rocks, did himself and Sensel push off in the -fantastic boat; whilst grouped on the sands, priests and people watched -them, strangely quiet. - -But, when the ‘Silent Priest’ had crossed the smiling water almost to -the galleys, Queen Atlana showed herself. At once, the mass of islanders -on the shore became vociferous in their acclamations. Many, of their -zeal, threw off mantles, dashed into the surf, and swam even to her -galley, arriving there almost with the silent one. When the latter had -ascended, and was bowing low before her, the swimmers again burst forth -in acclamations to be echoed strenuously by those on the galleys. The -air was full of gladness. - -Grouped under the queen’s awning were herself, the ‘Silent Priest,’ -Hellen, Æole, Electra, and the ladies Rica and Elna—when the signal was -given to move on. After Sensel had fastened the fantastic boat to the -queen’s galley, he came on board also. At once, the voyage was resumed, -and to the eastward, the swimmers and those remaining on the shore -chanting melodiously their farewells. - - - - - CHAPTER XV. - THE ALTAR FIRES GO OUT. - - -On hastened Atlano to the courtyard of the palace. And from there, drove -to the temple in wild fashion. For a great dread was besetting him. - -When the others had gone out to watch the quick evaporation, he, whilst -pondering in dismay upon Sensel’s promptness, had suddenly realized that -a strange torpor was overcoming him. Horrified, he essayed to break -this, succeeding only after great struggling. Then, his tongue seemed to -swell to twice its size, and clove to his mouth. In an agony of fear, he -tried to burst its bands, it, at length, also yielding. Thereupon, an -abject terror of his misdeeds and their penalty so possessed him that he -hastened out, to atone in slightest measure, if possible, by accession -to the voice’s demands. - -Further, spurred by his dread and some remnant of good yet left in him, -he confessed his evil desire, and deprecated it. Now he was speeding to -the temple to confer with Oltis as to what these evils might forbode, -what might be done to ward off further visitations, aye, judgments! - -In the temple, he found only the presiding priest Kluto, and the -handmaids whose duty it was to attend the sacred fire. - -“Kluto, where are the other priests?” - -“Gracious King, they have gone to the sands that they may wait upon the -silent one.” - -“Where is Urgis—that this hath been done?” - -“Gracious King, Urgis hath gone, likewise.” - -“Urgis?” - -“Gracious King, thus is it.” - -“And—hath the high priest gone?” - -“Priest Hafoe hath told it that the high priest sitteth again as stone -in the inner holy place.” - -“Why is the altar fire thus feeble?” - -“Gracious King, I know not. In spite of us, it will but flicker, and, at -times, doth threaten to go out.” - -Here was a dreadful omen. - -The king would have spoken further, but his voice was thickening, his -tongue growing sluggish: so, he turned abruptly from Kluto; and, with -uncertain step, passed into the inner sanctuary. Here was still burning -the ‘Silent Priest’s’ hand lamp; here the altar fire flickered feebly as -that of the temple proper; here the great apartment was in shadow save -where the sun’s beams entered faint through the hangings of the -apertures. - -In a passion of fear, Atlano looked about him, and called, -“Oltis—Oltis!” - -There was no response. Though quickly his eyes lighted upon the unhappy -Oltis, who was sitting behind the statue of Amen, his rigid body bent -forward, his eyes bright to madness. - -The almost frenzied Atlano dragged a chair opposite him; and, as he sank -into it, his sluggish tongue mumbled, “Oltis—speak.” - -Oltis’ eyes showed his struggle to comply. - -“Is thy tongue dead?” - -Oltis gave a sigh so long and deep that the king shook in terror. - -“Oltis, strive to shake off thy torpor. I felt the like coming but -mastered it; though my tongue is not yet right.” - -There was another sigh. - -“Oltis, the silent one hath gone. Ere this, he hath joined the Pelasgian -children. And they are sailing away—even to the queen.” - -“The queen!” - -The words burst from the marble Oltis, so terrifying Atlano that he -leaped from his chair. - -“Ah—thou speakest!” - -“The queen hath left the palace?” vociferated Oltis. - -“Yea, for half the day.” - -“And—with the Pelasgian children—and—their father—Deucalion?” - -Atlano almost fell back in his chair. As it was, he was obliged to lean -upon it; and then stared at Oltis, his eyeballs protruding, his lips -ashy. - -“I say—with Deucalion. Thy Deucalion—the ‘Silent Priest’—hath mastered -us.” - -“Oltis, thou ravest!” - -But Atlano felt it was not raving. Like a flash, it went through him. He -fell into his chair, confounded, baffled. Great sparks danced before his -eyes; his tongue refused to move. If he could but speak the dreadful -thoughts surging in his brain; if he could but kill Oltis for telling -him this! - -Oltis spurred on, in spite of his helplessness and fear, continued: - -“The Silent One is Deucalion. I knew it when ye had fled. He spoke to -me. The horror of it!—He said he would search into the hidden things of -the ‘Deeps.’ He opened the door. He went down the stairway. He saw the -handmaids. He threatened to bring in the islanders. He forced me to go -on the portico, and speak. Ah, he is a master!” The marble figure sighed -as if it would rend itself. - -Atlano was writhing and groaning in his torment. But joy—his voice was -coming. He hissed, “Oltis, thou art a craven. Oh, for strength to get at -thee! To aid—Deucalion! I will strangle thee for this. Then will I be -king, high priest, chief priest in one. For Urgis shall die, likewise!” - -Then he made the motion to spring, his hand out-clutched, Oltis, with -tongue again mute, awaiting him: but in spite of his mad hatred, his -baffled revenge, he had not power to arise. In his immobility and dread, -he moaned: - -“My foe—Deucalion—here—under my hand—and I not to feel it. How often -have I longed to yield him on the altar—that ‘Silent Priest.’ Baffled, -and by such arts! Oh, for Deucalion! To have him here for one instant, -even!” - -“Call to mind how thou didst pale before him but last night,” derided -Oltis. “Wouldst thou grow weak again under his eyes? The man is master -of strange, dire powers. Well is it he hath gone. Though—the queen!” - -“Name her not. Ah, how hath she known thee. How hath she borne with me. -What sorrow hath been hers. Mine eyes open to it. Fool that I am. Oltis, -add another to thy doings. Call me fool!” - -But Oltis again was dumb. - -“Oltis, I curse thee! Some good was in me when I came to the throne. -Some good was in me as long as I hearkened to the queen; but that good, -thou hast turned to evil. The evil in me thou didst pander to—so that I -am what I am. And why, Oltis, didst thou pander? It was not for warmth -for me. Nay, nay, I read thee. I saw thou didst look to be king. I knew -of thy draught of death; that thou hadst just got it in shape so that it -would leave no sign. (Thy father, of his age, needed not such art.)—Ah, -but I like to see thee writhe!—And well I bided, laughing at thee. Poor -Atlana, how often hath she warned me. Now—for thee!” - -He half arose, Oltis again awaiting him, his eyes flaming; but, as -before, he sank in his chair, his muscles refusing to go farther. - -“Why can I not walk?” he cried frantically. “Oltis, thou art bewitching -me? Or, is it, in truth; the gods? We made the show not to believe in -them—did we not? We believe now, ha—ha! Let us not fear. Let us curse -each other—and them. Then will I go from here, and hunt up those lagging -priests. This light on the altar groweth too dim. The gods will be -getting in even worse temper because of it. Come, Oltis, raise thy -voice. Let us curse together!” - -Again he essayed to rise. But, in that moment, all power of volition -forsook him. Instantly, his feet, hands, head, body, seemed encased in -iron, in iron weighing tons. Not a muscle could he move for the immense -pressure. His tongue was the deadest weight of all. His will was all of -strength remaining him; and that struggled long, superhumanly. But the -end was that he like Oltis could only sit as stone, and stare before -him—and into the terrible eyes opposite. - -Yet, how active was the mind becoming. How keenly, already, was it -suffering in its recollections of evil, its regrets, its humiliation at -being baffled—its horror of the oncoming fate. Oh, for madness, instead! - -Thus sat the two in the growing gloom. Thus sat they when the priests -returned from the seashore where they had been carried by the silent -one’s will. When they entered, the hand lamp was burned out, the altar -fire so feeble that they hastened, alarmed, to restore it. The more than -semi-darkness was terrifying. - -Search was made for another hand lamp. When one was found and lighted, -Atlano and Oltis were discovered sitting behind the statue of Amen. Both -were marble, save their baleful eyes. At sight of them, the startled -priests fell back one upon another; then turned, shrieking, to flee. - -When without in the temple, Kluto said to them, “We have brought -vengeance upon us. Let us try to win pardon while we may. But look—I -cannot make this flame last long.” - -“We will help.” - -Terror-stricken, they fanned the dying blaze. Though no life would come -in it. At length, they tottered to the portico, suffocating of dread. - -But—what had come over the face of earth? It was smiling when they had -entered the temple after returning from the shore; yet now, a strange -gloom, a murkiness was enveloping sky, ocean, stream, valley, hill. And -significant, far-off rumblings were beginning; the ocean was becoming -white; the stream Luith, as well as the other streams, was leaping up -its banks. On every side, people were crying out in affright. What was -this? - -Priests and handmaids ran out to the great court; and paused to look -about in horror. Suddenly, lurid lights filled the northern heavens. -Were the mountains of the northeast belching flame? Was that deafening -noise to the east the roaring of the incensed waters? They fell on their -knees to supplicate forlornly. - -But Kluto, best of his fellows, could not pray long for thought of the -king and high priest. He started to his feet, crying: - -“Who will go with me to save King Atlano and High Priest Oltis?” - -None answered. Indignant, he turned from his brethren to dart back to -the temple; and flew through it to the inner sanctuary. - -The hand lamp shed a feeble light. Upon the altar were a few faint -sparks. Kluto made his way toward king and high priest who still sat -rigid, glaring. He spoke, implored them to rise again and again—but only -their despairing eyes answered. - -Then he pulled the one, the other. As well might he have tried to move -the temple itself. Almost frenzied, he cried: - -“King Atlano, High Priest Oltis, come, come. The ocean seetheth, the -streams leap their banks, the mountains throw forth fire, the earth -grumbleth. Come, come! Break your bonds!” - -But they stirred not, though their eyes grew like flames in their -endeavors. Kluto then tried to lift Oltis’ hand. As well might he have -tried to move the statue of Amen that frowned in front of them. Before -this statue, he flung himself. - -“O Amen, have mercy. Break their bonds!” - -So alive was his faith, that he felt some answer must come to his -passionate appeal; but the silence remained unbroken. - -“Amen, I cannot go. I cannot leave them to this. I will share their -fate!” - -Now was the silence broken. There were heard the pattering of light feet -and the cries of women. These, speeding through the western passage were -the greater part of the handmaids who had been resting in their rooms -after the vigils of the night; and who had just aroused to the terrors -without. At their despairing tones, Kluto forgot king and priest, and -ran out to them. - -“Get ye to the great court, there to pray. For the end is upon us!” - -They crowded about him, terrified and irresolute. When he had led them -without among the priests and other handmaids, he went before the people -thronging into the court, and bade them pray for the safety of the -island. - -But the majority, in scorn, received his words. Not even the most -anxious could bring themselves to believe this paradisiacal island in -danger. Possibly Atlano and Oltis might suffer, but their dear island -could not come to harm! Had not the gods loved it? Had not one dwelt in -it? And was he not their father? Had not blessings ever been showered -upon it? No—no—their island must be safe! - -But, as they ran in and out of the court, up and down the hill, along -the banks of canal and stream, complaints of king and high priest began -to rise. - -“Said we not evil would follow that loss, ruin in Pelasgia?” murmured -one. - -“True, one evil bringeth another,” returned a second. - -“It may be that the gods were angry then, with King Atlano,” whispered -an old and thoughtful-looking man to his wife. - -“But, Queen Atlana is good,” spoke their daughter, a young mother who -was standing beside them with a little child clinging to each hand, and -who was eyeing in dread the encroaching water of the stream. “Would she -were here. Why, why did she sail away?—But look, Father, Mother! The -water riseth even to the top of the bank! Oh, my dear ones!” And she -kneeled to draw forlornly within her arms her little ones. “Oh, wert thy -father but here!” - -For their father was afar. He was the captain of the queen’s galley. - -Past this kneeling, weeping mother were surging the distracted -islanders, some making their way to the shore others rushing to gaze -upon the menacing streams, others flying to the court of the temple -there to plead for mercy, others running to the summit of the hill in -order to view better the fast brightening sky of the northeast. And -continuously now was the earth shaking, groaning beneath them—whilst -great raindrops were beginning to fall, and Amen’s thunderbolts to play. - -About this mother moaning over her children gathered other mothers with -their husbands and little ones, the plaints mingling in chorus. But soon -came a shaking so long and severe that every voice hushed, every face -set in terror. Then all groveled on the ground. - -When the trembling had subsided, and they were standing erect again, an -old woman said to be the most aged person on the island, spoke in -shrillest tone: - -“This is what cometh of handmaids and animal gifts upon the altar. Think -ye your fathers would have been thus led to evil. Oh, ye fools of -Atlantis!” - -She eyed the islanders about her with such derision that they forgot -their terror, and felt like rushing upon her in a body. - -A gray-haired, quivering man retorted: - -“It is well for thee, old Nogoa, to stand there and taunt us islanders -when it is known thou hast ever been loudest in favor of these new -doings. Oh, thou old feather that goeth with the wind! Have a care—or -thou wilt be more dragged in the dirt than thou hast been!” - -“Hah, it is the craven Puppo who speaketh,” returned Nogoa viciously. -“He who saw his daughter forced into the inner holy place, and lifted -not his voice to man or heaven against it. It seemeth he can cry out -only when an old woman talketh.” - -Puppo darted for her. As she fell over backward in her effort to get out -of his reach, a tall young man rushed between them. - -“Puppo, she speaketh truth. Thou wert a craven; and hast been a toad to -king and priests ever since. Look at me,” he continued to the people. -“Dear to me was his daughter Lota, and I would have made her my wife. -And in an hour—ah instant—the world became black to me. But became it -black to him? Hath he not laughed with the loudest, bent the lowest, -slept through it? Thou worse than hypocrite! Get thee away!” - -He looked so evilly upon Puppo, and was so seconded by those listening, -that Puppo, after a wicked glance at old Nogoa who had been lifted up -and placed on a fallen bough, slunk off. - -The young man continued: “Nogoa, though as false, as full of guile as -Puppo, is right in this: we have looked on when Atlano and Oltis changed -the worship in these vile ways with never a nay. For this, woe is upon -us! I come from my cave on yon mount where the fires rage to bid you -flee in your galleys while there is time.” - -“Why dost thou not flee, Monon? Show us the way,” screeched Puppo, who -was now brave because he was quite well to one side. - -“I flee not because I wish death. Every moment have I longed for it—as -thou shouldst have done—since thy daughter vanished!” - -A shout of derision went up for the benefit of the hidden Puppo, whose -habitual discretion forbade further speech for the while. - -“Monon,” shouted a young man at his right, “I, for one, will stand by -the island to the last!” - -Vociferous became the outcries in accordance. When these were subsiding, -a scream was heard from the wife of the galley captain: and then the -words, “Look, look! Luith floweth up over the bank; and higher—higher!” - -They followed her glance to perceive that the stream was rising even -above its banks, whilst the affrighted islanders thereon were beginning -to flee, shrieking. The beholders, in their terror, swayed as one; and -then groveled to implore mercy. - -But in wilder terror, at once arose to shake off the gray dust that was -beginning to fall everywhere. And one voice shrieked, “The ashes from -the mouth of the mountain! To the sands—to the sands!” - -The mass stood irresolute, dazed. Then went up the cry, “Yea, the -sands—the sands!” - -They parted to hasten toward that goal, youths supporting the aged, -parents bearing their tender young. But they had not gone far, when, -from the east, came one running as if pursued by demons; and he was -crying: - -“We are lost! We are lost! The sea riseth even to cover the great pile -of rocks! It will be upon us!” - -Therewith he fell senseless among them. - -After him came others running like madmen, and repeating his words. One -of these asked, “Where is the king?” Another, “Where is the high -priest?” - -An islander who had been in the court when the priests and handmaids -hastened from the temple, answered: - -“Atlano and Oltis sit in the inner holy place behind the statue of Amen, -frozen in body, burning in torment of mind. There they will stay until -the end, for no one hath power to move them.” - -A cry of horror went up. - -“How knowest thou this?” asked another of the newcomers, as he wiped the -ashes from his lips. - -“I heard the chief priest and Priest Hafoe tell of it after they had -fled the temple.” - -“Who fled from the temple?” - -“The priests, handmaids, and serving men. None are left save those two -frozen ones. Good company are they for each other!” - -Unanimous were the angry outcries of agreement. - -“Well is it that the queen hath gone,” remarked another newcomer. “We -saw her off. May she have sailed too far to get back to this. The sea -doeth its best to keep her away.” - -“The dear queen!” cried one after another. - -“Poor queen—she hath sorrowed and been meek.” - -“And we have known it, and lifted not our voices,” rang Monon’s tones. - -“Yea; and many of us wives have been treated as herself,” said a clear -voice from among a group of women. - -The male hearers accepted this in different ways. Some smiled -scornfully; others glanced furtively at their fellows; a few appeared -conscience stricken. A brave one exclaimed: - -“I will own I have sinned. I wedded my niece, which was against the old -law. But—there is Puppo—he wedded his aunt!” - -“And tormented his first wife, the mother of Lota, to her death that he -might do it,” screamed old Nogoa. - -“Who put away five husbands?” yelled the unseen Puppo. There was -silence. Then he answered sepulchrally, “Old Nogoa!” - -Old Nogoa was speechless. - -But Monon spoke up, “Nogoa is not the only one. How many are there who -have done as she! Until these last years, how holy hath been wedlock; -yet now, on every side, is its mockery. The handmaids and the animal -gifts on the altar are but a few of the wicked changes in the laws of -our olden fathers. Further, the curse of avarice is upon this island. -And we have been steeped in pleasure, in sense. The body of flesh hath -been our one thought. The inner body—the spirit—hath been forgotten, -hath become of evil shape—is evil. Let us look to it! Should this storm -pass by, let us begin a better growth of the spirit. Let us go back to -the warmth and trust of our fathers. Then may we have the knowledge of -heaven that was theirs.” - -“Thinkest thou there is still hope, Monon?” interrupted a by-stander. - -“Of what?” - -“That we may come out of this?” - -“I believe there is no hope. But, we can die without murmur.” - -In the next instant, he pointed to the temple gateway. - -“Behold—Priest Kluto and the handmaids.” - -They looked to perceive Kluto marshaling the handmaids without. Well had -he pleaded for this with Chief Urgis, pleaded that the wretched young -creatures might be restored to the arms of their kindred whom he knew -must be awaiting them. And he prevailed, as Urgis and the other priests -had become so given over to terror as not to care for consequences. - -Further, Kluto was in the main, correct; for, as the handmaids stood -clinging to each other, and glancing piteously about them through the -falling ashes and rain, they were surrounded by watching, anxious dear -ones; and began to be suffocated almost of embraces. All save three! - -Yes, three there were that stood shrinking, as they lost hope of -recognition. In dreary silence, they waited a little, and then moved -beside Priest Kluto, who had been looking inquiringly from them to the -islanders. But all, excepting those caressing the fortunate handmaids, -were acting dazed because of the thickening showers of ashes and the now -pelting rain. And prayers and groans were filling the air. - -So Priest Kluto gathered closer the three handmaids; and whispered to -them. Thereupon, the four began to make their way through the excited, -ejaculating crowds in order to ascend to the summit, to the temple of -Poseidon and Cleito. - -“Priest Kluto, thou goest the wrong way,” called out a youth as he -pointed to several galleys, that, unfastened from their moorings, were -being borne higher and higher by the rising stream. “Why not set off in -those galleys, and save the handmaids?” - -“No galley could live on the white water beyond. We go to the summit, to -beseech the mercy of Amen and Poseidon; and, should the last moment draw -nigh, to meet it as becometh us.” With encouragement, he looked upon the -shrinking handmaids. - -But one cried hysterically, “If my mother and father were not in Chimo. -There is cheer in dying together!” - -In sweet, plaintive tones, spoke the second, “There is cheer in not -being forgotten. I have father, mother, sisters, brothers. Yet not one -cometh to look for me!” - -“For very good cause,” screamed old Nogoa, who was still sitting on the -fallen bough, and whom they were passing. “Celesa, I saw thy father, -mother, sisters, and brothers go off in their galley after the queen.” - -“I thank the gods!” And Celesa, with face illumined, fell on her knees -to implore that they might be beyond danger; to give further thanks that -she was not forgotten, that she alone of her family was selected to -suffer. - -But Kluto raised her, and drew her arm within his. Then the third -handmaid spoke low, “Happy are ye two! Though I have neither father, -mother, sister, nor brother, yet one there was who cared for me when I -was dragged to the temple. But him I see not. He hath not watched to -know if I should need him. Yet—we played together—as children!” She laid -her head upon Celesa’s breast, and sobbed. - -“His name?” whispered Celesa. - -“Veris.” - -“Where is the youth Veris?” inquired Celesa in low, clear tones, but -without looking about her. - -A voice quite near replied, “It is even now time for him to come back -from Chimo, whither he went a few days since.” - -Luta was overjoyed. What were these dangers if she was not forgotten? -What was death if Veris shared it? Her face lighted rosily as she looked -around her, half expecting to see him speeding through the blinding -showers of ashes and rain. Then she seized Celesa’s arm, and said in -exultation, “Now Priest Kluto, can I follow thee even unto death!” - -Thus, when Priest Kluto had given his other arm to the first handmaid, -did the four stand abreast, and look up to the summit, and at the -volcano’s light beyond undauntedly. They began to move upward, upon -their faces coming the expression of the loving, trusting martyr. In -amaze, the people beheld them; and could not but show some reflection. -One cried: “They will die well. Why cannot we?” Then he, being a singer, -commenced a hymn to Amen. So magnetic were his tones that the people -about him joined in; a moment more, and the multitude was swelling the -refrain. To this music, the four ascended to the summit, there to kneel -before the temple of Poseidon and Cleito. - -But along by the palace was coming a horseman from the west, his horse -smoking and foaming, for he had fairly flown over the country between -Chimo and this place. As horse and rider came in among the chanting -multitude, the singing ceased, and many voices cried, “Veris! Veris!” - -Veris, as he walked his horse in among them, shouted, “The island -sinketh! Everywhere as I came across, rise the streams! Already hath the -sea laid Chimo half under water!” - -He had been nearing the temple gateway. In a few moments more, he was -looking through with most anxious face. Then he said, “I will go in.” - -“Veris, look not there for Luta,” called an islander who had been -running after him. - -“Whither shall I look?” - -“Herself and two other handmaids have gone with Priest Kluto to the -temple above to pray.” And the man pointed in the direction. - -“I will join them.” Then, in happy tones, Veris thanked his friend, -shook his hand, and turned to mount the hill; and as he mounted, the -rain began to fall in sheets, the thunderbolts to strike. - -Terror-stricken, the people scattered, seeking shelter. Some ran to -their homes, others to the palace. But many rushed into the great court -of the temple, thence on to the temple, there to utter dismayed cries at -beholding the altar fire but a faint spark. Despite the almost darkness -they pressed on, invading the sacredness of the inner sanctuary. Here, -by the dim lamplight, did they further behold Atlano and Oltis, still as -iron, still glaring at each other. And but a faint spark was remaining -on this altar, likewise! - -Shriek after shriek went up as these intruders looked upon king and -priest; these shrieks being echoed by the dazed ones running through -passages, apartments, and temple until it seemed as though the weight of -sound must bring the walls about them. - -Some of these intruders even ventured to pass on through the private -passage of Atlano and Oltis. Perceiving the end door open, they went -toward it, and its dark stairway allured them. Down they rushed to the -open door below through which a faint light could be seen. And hustled, -awed, into the crypt-like apartment whose lamps were still burning, -there to look about them in wonder, terror; and then dashed for the -white objects at the far end! - -There was an agonized staring, screams, yells, a frenzied retreat up the -stairway, frantic disclosures when they reached the inner sanctuary. -“The lost handmaids!” “Dead—dead!” “In the vault below!” “See for -yourselves!” were the cries to the ones that were here. - -Many of these ran down to look for themselves, whilst the discoverers -hastened out to inform others. The second party, in turn, came tearing -up, maddened; and rushed without to corroborate the reports of the -first. The listening islanders, aroused to their gross neglect, their -insensate yielding, were excited to extreme hatred and desire for -revenge. With Monon as leader, they hastened in mass to the inner -sanctuary, showering curses the while upon Atlano and Oltis. And, when -before them, further cursed; then spat upon them. Yet still the two sat -rigid. - -As they were thus reviled—as the revilers endeavored to tear them from -their seats—the great structure began to rock, and so terrifically that -the infuriated ones, forgetful even of their revenge, turned to flee. -Better the rain, the lurid sky, the unearthly gloom, the showering -ashes, the thunderbolts than this! - -The last to leave cried in their flight, “The spark is out! The spark is -out!” but to repeat the same when the temple’s altar was shot by! - -But Luta was in Veris’ arms; and Kluto was holding fast Celesa—whilst, -on the summit, the four received the full fury of the elements. But they -were happy. As to the first handmaid, she had passed away while praying. -And was lonely no longer! - - - - - CHAPTER XVI. - THE SILENT ONE SPEAKS. - - -As the galleys sailed to the east, the Atlantean eyes lingered with -pride upon the island. Never had it looked fairer. What other spot of -earth was so fitting to be chosen the abode of a god? What other land -had so thriven, so conquered, so repeated itself even in the farthest -climes? Surely upon this island the sun must shine forever! - -Thus, in happy accord, did they begin to sing praises to their father -Poseidon, the while throwing back fond kisses at their island, and even -at the water which was alive with porpoises and dolphins, the former -leaping their highest in their sportive appreciation of the music, the -latter enjoying it with a dignified serenity befitting the state which -the Atlanteans ever accorded them. - -Yet continually were the singers of every galley glancing at the group -under the queen’s awning. In the midst, stood the ‘Silent Priest’ before -the queen; and about them were Æole, Electra, and Hellen; while near -swayed Sensel, a being as mysterious as the silent one. Small wonder is -it that the inquisitive islanders would have gladly ceased their singing -could they have heard what was spoken by those so interested. - -When presented to the queen, the ‘Silent Priest’ had bowed, then taken -the hand she extended, and regarded her fixedly. At his magnetic touch, -his eloquent look, she thrilled; and her voice trembled, as she said: - -“Father—whom we call the ‘Silent,’ rather should I bow to thee. For thou -art one whom the gods favor. Of a truth, art thou sent of them.” - -As the silent one stood calm, intent, Æole thought, “How is this grand -being to answer the queen?” And she drew nearer to him, her eyes filled -with love rather than awe. Noting this, Hellen, Electra, and Sensel -watched her eagerly. - -The next moment, she received a shock. The silent one, though -gesticulating as usual, was also speaking, though in lowest tone. - -“Queen Atlana, now will I loose my tongue. In truth, can I say the gods -have favored me.” - -As his deep, musical tones continued, Æole had seized his robe, then his -arm; and next was looking up wistfully in his face. Therewith, Electra -began to weep; and Hellen and Sensel turned away, for they could bear no -longer this look so commingled of remembrance, longing, hope, doubt. - -The queen of her wonder and perturbation, exclaimed, “We believed thee -dumb!” - -“Queen Atlana, I spoke not that I might baffle.” - -“Baffle what?”—Very faint was the queen’s voice. - -“The foes of Æole and Hellen, gracious Queen.” He put his arm about the -half-fainting Æole, and drew her to him. And Sensel glided beside them -to whisper, “Be strong, be strong, dear Æole.” - -She, though but half conscious, comprehended: and never had she been so -happy. In her ears was the music of this sympathetic voice; upon her had -come a tranquillity hardly of earth. In these arms so strongly enfolding -her was she to be borne to heaven? Were the years on the island a dream? -Surely these were the arms in which she had been wont to rest when the -rambles over the dear Pelasgian fields had been too long, this was the -touch that had ever soothed her! - -Meanwhile, the queen was noting the astonishment of the sailors, who had -ceased singing, and were resting on their oars. Thus, she whispered to -Sensel: - -“Look that no one is within the withdrawing room. Hither will we go.” - -Sensel glided off. The queen said, as though to herself, “The ‘Silent -Priest’ can only answer there.” - -Great was her agitation. The priest, because of the quiet about them, -bowed in acquiescence; further, signing that there he would make all -plain. - -Sensel returned to say the apartment was ready. Waving for her ladies to -remain, the queen walked off supported by Electra; and was followed by -the priest bearing Æole, and Hellen and Sensel. - -Deep was the hush as they passed along. Not only those of their own -galley were interested. The occupants of the galleys attending them had -also quieted. Every eye was fastened in wonder. When the six had entered -the withdrawing room, the hush continued as the galleys pursued their -way. - -The priest placed Æole upon a couch. But, as she regained strength, she -arose to her feet to gaze at him as if charmed. - -Meanwhile the queen had sat down; and now was motioning for the others -to sit also. But the priest shook his head, thereby causing her to -question by her look. - -“Queen Atlana, I will stand until all things are made plain to thee.” - -The others chose to stand also. Electra brought a fan, and fanned the -queen, who had closed her eyes. - -Shortly Atlana was able to ask, “Thou whom we call the ‘Silent -Priest’—who—art—thou?” - -“Queen Atlana—I am—of Pelasgia.” - -He spoke in Atlantean; and repeated in Pelasgian. - -As the once familiar tongue was heard, Æole ran half way toward him, -clasped her hands, and looked up in his face with eyes brilliant from -unspeakable hope. The most beautiful color came into her cheeks, and her -lips parted in a heavenly smile. So lovely, so angelic was her -expression that the beholders gazed spellbound. And low, fervent were -her tones. - -“I felt it, I felt it!—‘Silent Priest’ who art thou? Thy name?” - -“Daughter,” and he approached her, his arms extended, “my -name—is—Deucalion.” - -“Father!” She would have fallen at his feet, had he not caught her. - -The strong man was sobbing. “Ah, Æole, Æole, to hold thee once again!” - -“Father, father, after these years! But I knew thou wouldst come, if of -earth!” - -The rapture of her tone was so intense that he began to fear for her. -Thus, he bore her to a couch, and sat beside her, supporting her; and -then Electra came to chafe her hands, and bathe her brow. Her trembling -was excessive; and she kept repeating, “Father—father. Thanks—thanks!” -Though soon she calmed to question, “Father, tell me of mother. Is she -well?” And extreme was the pathos of her tone. - -“Æole, thy mother waiteth for thee.” - -“What, then, is the past? One look from her will heal all. -Mother—mother!” So intense were tone and look that Sensel turned away. -And Electra sobbed. - -Throughout this scene, Queen Atlana had gazed stonily. Though, at Æole’s -cry for her mother, she thrilled, and her eyes moistened. But she -conquered her feeling, and now asked in irony: “Sir Deucalion, doth -this—thy guile—come of the gods?” - -He arose, and bowed. “Most gracious Queen, this is not guile.” - -“How callest thou it?” - -“I call it working to the best end a matter between Pelasgia and -Atlantis.” - -“That is the look from thine eyes. I can see it in but one light.” - -“Queen Atlana, I have a right to mine own.” - -“But not a right to lead us wrong—to—to use us.” - -“Queen Atlana, how have we been used?” - -She answered not. - -“Queen Atlana, to gain my children, I have used powers given from above. -If through such, I have mastered king and priests, have caused the sleep -of Æole, have drawn thee, judge whether or not the gods are with me. -Answer me in this, seemeth they to be with Atlantis?” - -The queen arose; and ignoring his question, demanded, “Sir Deucalion of -Pelasgia, if it doth agree with thy will, let it be ordered that the -galleys turn toward Atlantis.” Bitter, scornful was her tone. - -“Dear Queen Atlana, not yet,” interposed Electra. “If thou wilt think -for a moment, thou wilt judge he hath done what thou wouldst have done -in his place. Wouldst thou not have done as much for children of thine -own—even for Æole and myself? Further, with all his art, his power, none -hath borne pain, hath lost life. Think, he might have brought an army -upon Atlantis.” - -“Electra, I could stand the bringing of an army better than this. How -have I been tricked! To think I have set myself against the king, even -to coming on this ‘little sail.’ And to please whom, to wait upon whom? -Why, his foe Deucalion. Atlano—Atlano!” Utter despair was in tone and -gesture. - -“Queen Atlana, thy coming is not of thine ordering. Cast such thought -from thee. If it hath been of mine ordering, the higher will is behind,” -urged Deucalion. - -“Sir Deucalion, thy words are idle. As if the Higher Good should set -aside thought for all save thee and thine. Thou hast high thought of -self. But the sun shineth on all. It is my will that my galley be -turned.” Hard had it been to control herself. And now her tones broke. -“Should harm come to Atlano, I cease to live! The blame, the grief, I -could not bear! Sir Deucalion, why hast thou not moved? My galleys are -not ordered!” And she turned to Sensel, as if he might help her. - -“One moment, Queen Atlana, and I will. But first, think not thy presence -with Atlano could turn aside that which doth threaten.” - -“What meanest thou?” - -“Thy presence, can it turn aside the judgment of the gods?” - -Faint, wondering was her tone, “So runneth the prophecy—so runneth the -prophecy.” She clasped her hands to her forehead, gasping, “I shall go -mad with this dread upon me!” - -Æole ran to her, and put her arm around her. “Dear Queen Atlana, call to -mind it was thy kind thought for us that made thee leave the king for -this short season. Could the gods make use of such?” - -At her touch and voice, the queen shivered, and averted her face. “Æole, -Æole, what thou hast cost me!” - -“Dear Queen, thou hast not ceased to care for me?” - -Atlana held out her hand; and as Æole took it, replied: “Nay, I have not -ceased to care for thee. For thy sake, I could joy over this. But, the -king! Atlano—Atlano!” - -There was a painful hush for a little, until she stooped to kiss the -suffering girl. Afterward, with her old dignity, she commanded: “Sensel, -as Sir Deucalion heedeth not, I ask that thou wilt order the galleys to -be turned.” - -“Dear Queen Atlana,” explained Deucalion, “how could I give the order -whilst thou art angered with me?” - -His tone and manner touched her. “Sir Deucalion, speak not of anger. Let -us have no further words as to the right or wrong. We will part in -peace.” - -He stooped and kissed her robe. “Queen Atlana, thou art a queen, in -truth. I go to make good thine order.” - -“Father,” burst from Hellen, “wilt thou note this fast gathering -darkness?” - -In his absorption, Deucalion had not remarked the very sudden change. -With serious, awed countenance, he looked about him; and then spoke -lightly, hoping to reassure the blanching queen. - -“It meaneth rain. It seemeth as if the clouds gather.” - -But the suddenness of this gloom was as nothing to the way in which it -was deepening. It threatened to hide them from each other. In her alarm, -the queen moved toward the door; and this was opened for her by Sensel -just as her ladies were about to knock. - -“Gracious Queen,” said Rica, the first lady, “it will storm. All is -dark.” - -Atlana stepped out; and those behind her, followed. They looked to -become appalled. - -The atmosphere was thick and dark. The heavens were obscure. An inky -cloud lay over the island. The sea was in foam. And the galleys were -trying to keep close, whilst on their decks were huddled the -fear-stricken islanders. These, upon perceiving the queen, cheered -faintly. Then a spokesman inquired: “Most gracious Queen, shall we now -go back?” - -“The order hath been given,” shouted Hellen, at behest of the almost -rigid queen. - -Instantly, Sensel went to the captain of the queen’s galley, who, -thereupon, gave orders to the other galleys. Thus, all the galleys were -speedily pointed for Atlantis, excepting the one appropriated to Hellen -and Æole. - -Then did Hellen’s and Æole’s thought turn to the downcast Electra. -Indeed, poor Electra seemed overwhelmed. Hellen, feeling he could not -part with her, grew fierce in his determination to the declaring, -“Father, if Electra goeth back, I go with her!” - -This was an unexpected obstacle, as Hellen looked a rock. For the -moment, Deucalion felt he was not equal to it; and then spoke -hesitatingly. “Queen Atlana, can we have Electra?” - -The queen recovering somewhat, was resolute. “Sir Deucalion, Electra -will go with me.” - -“To go again into the temple?” demanded Hellen. “To be forced within the -inner holy place? To—” - -“To lose her life?” interrupted Deucalion. “To pour out her blood as -water to aid the vain, fiendish quest of king and priest? To stand over -the crucible, and stir this lifeblood until she perisheth of the drain? -Thrice cursed draught! The ‘Deeps’ tell the tale!” - -They stared aghast at Deucalion. But the queen interpreted. Every -unguarded sentence, every sudden pause of Atlano reverted to her until -she felt like accusing her memory for its tenacity. And her horror grew. -Tornado-like it swept over her—the sufferings she had borne through him, -his contempt, his neglect, his indignities, his infidelities. Now this -revelation of Deucalion filled the measure. - -Her spirit revolted. The words came clear and firm. “Electra will not go -back. I go to the king without her. He can but yield me on the altar. Or -try the blood of a queen, for change, in seeking his draught.” - -Electra ran to embrace her. “Speak not of the altar, dear Queen. After -that, I cannot leave thee.” - -Atlana kissed her. “Dear Electra, I meant but to jest when I spoke of -the altar. We know the need of my presence to the king.” Sad, bitter was -her tone. Then, bethinking her of their present condition, remorse swept -over her so that she tottered, and would have fallen but for Sensel. - -At this moment, the blackness of the atmosphere became appalling; and a -cry of horror went up from the galleys. All were pointing to the island. -The queen looked, and fell half fainting upon Deucalion. As he sustained -her, he whispered to Sensel: “It hath come!” - -Yes, it had come. There lay their beloved island at the mercy of fierce -warring elements. For, about it were dread waterspouts; upon it were -falling sheets of water; above it were playing the fiery messengers of -Amen. And the ocean responded white. - -Although so terror-stricken, the occupants of the galleys were anxious -to return; and but waited to follow the queen. Already she was reviving; -and presently stood up for another view, saying reproachfully, “We move -not toward it.” - -“Look! Look!” cried many voices. - -And utter despair came upon all. The island was rocking as if in the -throes of a mighty earthquake, the waves were leaping up its cliffs, the -waterspouts were breaking, the thunderbolts falling, the northern sky -beginning to blaze. - -“The mountain burneth!” they cried. And fell on their knees. Once, only, -in the history of the island, had this volcano burst its bands. - -Queen Atlana had looked to fall back insensible into the arms of -Deucalion. He bore her to a couch in the withdrawing room; and then hung -over her with restoratives, Electra, Æole, and the ladies—each dumb with -apprehension. - -Outside, Hellen was addressing the galleys with tones firm and -far-reaching, for he felt all-powerful now that Electra was not to -return. - -“Ye Nobles, Elders, and Captains; the ‘Silent Priest’ is firm that the -island is doomed. If ye go back, it is to your death. If ye press on -with us toward the Middle Sea, ye will be saved. What say ye, captains -of the galleys?” - -There followed hurried consultations between the captains and their -employers. Finally, one captain answered, “We, of this galley, will -press on.” - -Another captain, he of the queen’s galley, spoke loud: “My wife, my -children are on the island. I would go to them.” - -“Thou art the captain of the galley of the queen,” cried another -captain. “Wouldst thou leave the queen?” - -The poor captain looked irresolute for an instant. - -“The queen is dear; but my family is dearer. I take it—my duty is to -them, even more than to the queen. There are other captains!” - -“Yea, there are other captains,” rang Hellen’s voice. “The captain of my -galley can take thy place, and I will take his. Thus mayst thou go back, -if any do, to the island.” - -The captain of the galley containing the relatives of the handmaid -Celesa now called: “We will go back. Come with us, captain of the galley -of the queen.” - -The captain of the queen’s galley looked upon the foaming sea, the beset -island, his sailors at their oars—the door of the withdrawing room -through which the fainting queen had been borne. - -“How can I leave the queen? My men? I will not. I will stay. Heaven help -me to bear this. Heaven help my wife, my little ones!” One heartrending -sob burst from him. Then he stood firm, resigned. - -Loud cheers rent the air, though little cared he for these. He stood, as -in a dream, seeing only his wife, his little ones, in their sore -extremity. - -Immediately, the captain who had said he would return, parted from them; -and after him, went a few galleys heroically. But the greater number, -those bearing entire families, determined to press on. - -Then Hellen called: “Captains, your queen—our dear Queen Atlana—lieth as -one dead. The captain of her galley will lead us. In my galley is food -enough for a few days, if shared with care. Moreover, there are islands -near. And the Afrite Coast is not far.” - -A faint cheering replied. - -Hellen then spoke apart with his father. “Would we could get the queen, -her ladies, Æole and Electra on my galley, for it is stronger, and -holdeth the food. It might be tempted to leave us.” - -“That is well thought of. But how to get them on board? The rowers -cannot keep near enough, so fierce groweth the sea. I like not the crest -of these waves.” - -“It would be well to throw the ropes, to keep the galleys close. The sea -may quiet a little; and then can they pass over.” - -“Sensel, what thinkest thou?” inquired Deucalion. - -“It can be done, should the sea calm a little. It would be well to throw -the ropes, when the rowers have come as nigh as they can.” - -“It is well.” - -At the word, Hellen’s galley drew as near as it could for the tossing -sea. Then, the ropes were thrown bringing them within unsteady touch, -almost. Whilst thus engaged, Hellen remarked: “Father, the air seemeth -more than full of rain. And yet none droppeth.” - -“I, too, have wondered over it. But, where is Sensel?” - -For Sensel had most suddenly disappeared. - -But even as they began to look about for him he reappeared, coming from -the direction of the withdrawing room. And in each hand was held a lamp -of beautiful pattern. These he hastened to lay before Deucalion. - -“Thou hast it, Sensel,” exclaimed the latter, his eyes brightening. - -“Yea I thought this oil might ease the troubled waters.” - -“Thou thinkest of everything.” - -“Thou hast taught me.” - -“What meaneth it, father?” interposed the wondering Hellen. - -“It is the Pelasgian custom in storms, Hellen. Tell him, Sensel.” - -“I will. But first, there is quite a vessel of oil upon thy galley, -Hellen, as I found when I was saving the food from that torrent. It is -for thee to order that a little of that oil be dropped upon the water -about thy galley when we have done the like with this.” - -“I will to it, Sensel. But, meanest thou that the oil hath the power to -still the waves?” - -“It hath.” - -“It doth amaze.” Then, at Sensel’s behest, he stood at that side of the -galley toward his own, and slowly allowed some drops to fall from the -lamp upon the tumultuous sea; and perceived that this small amount -spread rapidly, forming an expansive thin film upon the water. - -Meanwhile, with the second lamp, Sensel was acting to as good purpose on -the other side of the galley. For, in scarce less time, was an even more -expansive film spreading from his side also. Then he called, “Hellen, -speak now to thy galley. The oil is in an earthen jar in the hold. They -are to drop it at each side.” - -The film was continuing to spread in a manner astonishing; and more -astonishing, the water about them was unable to tear this film and send -its wavelets to the crest. The fierce sea was becoming subdued, -threatening no longer with its cresting waves. There was now but a swell -that was growing less and less. As Hellen comprehended this, a passion -of hope possessed him. Enthusiastically, he called to his galley, and -gave commands that those on board were quick to understand. For, in -scarce more than a minute were men stationed to pour the precious drops -on the cresting waves beneath. - -Meanwhile, the occupants of the other galleys were watching, and -gradually taking in this new position of affairs. In a few minutes, -there was not a galley but had its men dropping oil; for each was -supplied with lamps. - -And, oh the cheering that prevailed as the waves grew quieter, as the -blanket of oil—the thin, almost gossamer film—continued to spread, the -spreading so conquering the waters that the other galleys soon lay at -ease near Hellen’s galley, in obedience to his command! - -When the ropes had well united the queen’s galley with Hellen’s, Sensel -called: “Now is the time. Thou Deucalion, wilt bear the queen. Hellen, -thou wilt lead Electra. I will look to Æole and the ladies. And, thou, -Captain of the galley, wilt go over with us, and take charge for the -queen.” - -“Quick,” added Hellen, nervously. - -The three ran to the withdrawing room, and each seized his charge. The -queen was still unconscious; but to the others, explanations were made -as they were hurried along. - -Sensel, in delight that the calm was continuing, leaped over, and then -held out his arms, when, with Hellen’s assistance, Æole was passed over. -Then followed the queen, Electra, and the ladies in waiting. Next was -transferred Deucalion’s boat. - -Then went over the captain of the queen’s galley with his men, the -captain and men of Hellen’s galley taking their places. Meanwhile, -Hellen was gathering rugs and cushions, and throwing these over. Even a -few couches were transferred. Then himself and Deucalion passed over, -after Azu. - -Immediately the men on Hellen’s galley bestirred themselves to supply -the queen’s galley and the now adjacent other galleys with food, though -small was the portion allotted each. But, as Hellen had said, the -African Coast was not far; and several islands were between. - -Scarcely had all this been accomplished than a noise as of muffled -thunder was heard beneath the water, the galleys receiving the shock as -though they had struck upon the rocks. Again the waters began to rage -and foam. The films of oil had yielded. Again were the waves cresting, -and most threateningly. - -“Let us move on,” shouted Sensel. “And more oil!” - -“The island!”—“The island!” cried a few agonized voices. - -The island was shaking terrifically. And it had certainly lost in -height. Deucalion, as he looked, exclaimed wildly: “Sensel—Hellen—it -sinketh. It is lost!” - -He spoke very loud, forgetting himself, and the listening islanders, in -their amazement, concluded that the time had arrived when the ‘Silent -Priest’ could speak the will of the gods. - -“He knoweth,” called one captain to the others. “Let us press on!” - -“Yea—press on,” cried Deucalion in his mightiest tone. “Further, forget -not the oil!” - -Then to Hellen and Sensel, he added, “Ye will press on to the fifth -island to the east, and there wait for me. I will take oil, food, and -drink, and stay here in my boat, that I may witness the death throes of -the island.” - -“I will stay with thee,” said Sensel. - -“And I,” added Hellen. - -“I will stay alone. Your duty is with those on this galley. Hellen, call -to mind that thy mother looketh for thee and Æole.” - -“She looketh for thee, likewise.” - -“I will come.” - -Hellen, of his impatience, turned away. He dared not speak. - -“Sensel, thou wilt aid Hellen in caring for Æole, Electra, and the -queen. Further, forget not to take in water at that fifth island. It is -fine.” - -Fierce was Hellen’s tone. “Father, if thou goest, I go also. I will -share thy watch!” - -“Nay, I will share it,” urged Sensel. “I came with him. I stay with him -to the end!” - -“Thou art not his son!” - -“Hellen, calm thyself. I will bide alone. Look ye to the queen, and to -Æole and Electra. Bring me the food, drink, and oil while I go to speak -with them.” - -They gazed at him, irresolute. But, as he regarded them, they at length -turned to comply; whereupon, he repaired to the withdrawing room to find -that the queen was still unconscious, whilst beside her sat Æole and -Electra. He took a hand of each, saying, “I would speak with you.” - -When the ladies in waiting had withdrawn, he continued: “Æole, Electra, -gather your strength. I have to tell you that I will stay here in my -boat after the galleys pass on to the east, that I may witness the last -of the island.” - -They were bewildered. Thus, he repeated his words, and with such -conviction that they became horrified, and piteously besought him not to -leave them, not to go to his death. - -“Do ye not feel I shall come back? Æole, gather thy trust. Electra, -where is thy strength?” - -“Gone, gone is my strength,” moaned Electra. “I now know fear. Ah, Sir -Deucalion, think of us. Yield not to this wish. What is its furthering -to the delight of joining thy wife, of bringing before her Æole and -Hellen. And, tempt not the gods.” - -“Thou meanest be not too sure of the favor of the gods, Electra.” - -She blushed; but regarded him bravely. “I have said it. Take it as thou -wilt. Either is my thought.” - -“Thou art a ready one. And I like thy truth. But no talking will hold -me. I go.” - -He took them in his arms, and kissed them. “Now is my parting word for a -little. But I shall come back. And, give of this to the queen when I am -gone, a drop with every hour.” - -He laid a vial upon the table; then led them to a couch, and bade them -comfort each other. They replied not to him, but drooped their heads -forlornly as he passed out. As for Æole, she seemed turning to marble. - -At the threshold were awaiting Hellen and Sensel with their supplies; -and each looked most determined as he passed onward. Then, Sensel -knocked lightly at the door, when Electra opened to them. - -Sensel hurried on toward Æole; but Hellen paused by the door. “Electra, -I go with my father. Sensel will care for thee and Æole. And now to kiss -thee. For never shall I see thee more!” - -The last words seemed to tear him. Electra, pallid and trembling, -whispered: “Thou art right to go. But—the pain!” - -He caught her to him, declaring how dear she was, and begging she would -not forget his love; then kissed her, and ran out. - -Meanwhile, Sensel was pressing Æole’s hand so that she revived, and -looked up at him. At sight of the anguish in her eyes, he forgot -himself, and kissed her hair, her hands, her robe, as he cried, -“Æole—Æole!” - -She, flushing and paling, would have arisen. But he said, “Nay, nay!” -And after again kissing her hand, sped to the door where he paused to -bid farewell to Electra, and then vanished. - -Deucalion stood at the stern. When they joined him, he said as though -giving some simple order, “Press on to the island. There will I come to -you.” - -The two received his embraces, each biding his time, each watching the -other. Into the boat, they threw the bags of food, the skins of water -and wine; then, handing him the oil, waited as he began the descent, -each purposing to throw himself after. - -But Deucalion was not half way, when, in the hush of the amazed -beholders, was heard a sharp cry from Electra. Instantly, Hellen turned, -and ran to the withdrawing room. Thus Sensel found no bar to his -resolve. In a trice, he had leaped down beside Deucalion. “I came with -thee, I go with thee!” he cried. With this, he detached the rope, and -the boat tossed away. - -Deucalion, surprised at his insistency, demurred, “Rash youth, rash -prince, thy life is of too much worth.” - -Sensel smiled as he answered, “Is not thy life of worth?” - -“We shall have evil work.” - -“It looketh it.” Then Sensel waved his hand gaily to the astounded -Hellen, who was looking over at them; and who could only gasp, “Father!” - -“It is well. Be not troubled, my son. Think of thy mother. What aileth -Electra?” - -“Æole sleepeth as she did in the temple.” - -“Again is it well. Should I know I could not come out of this, I would -cause her to awake. But, let her sleep for three days, should I not come -back. Then, the written word I left for thee in my case will show thee -how to arouse her. Further, my son, press on with speed. Show thy fond -feeling for me in this. And forget not, my last word is for thy mother.” - -Hellen could not reply; but merely waved his hand in farewell. As the -boat shot off, he turned away without hope. - -But the galleys were awaiting his lead. Thus he imparted the directions -of his father to their occupants who were regarding the returning boat -in dismay. - -Then quickly certain whispers spread. Was the ‘Silent Priest’ an evil -spirit? And, was he going back to gloat over the condition of their -island? Or, was he indeed of the gods, and going to aid? Nobles, elders, -captains, sailors, women and children were divided, some judging him to -be on the side of evil, others on the side of good. But the majority -inclined to the evil. However, his directions must be followed, as -whether good or evil, he had shown proper knowledge of the fitness of -the fifth island as a stopping place. And much they needed the water. - -After the opinions had been well expressed, they grew mute, for the -vessels began to labor eastward. It seemed as though their eyes must -remain with the island, their heavy hearts drag them to the bottom. -Alas, these poor Atlanteans! - -When they had well gone on, Deucalion and Sensel stayed their course; -and shortly bounded back to the place they had left, from there to watch -the doomed Atlantis! That is, to watch the points within their vision of -this great, this magnificent island. - - - - - CHAPTER XVII. - THE SINKING OF THE ISLAND. - - -The two watchers were interested not only in the island, but also in the -galleys speeding eastward. Erelong, the galleys that had turned back -thought better of their resolution; and changed course again in order to -rejoin their fellows But one continued toward Atlantis, that containing -Celesa’s relatives; and soon this disappeared, thus leaving Deucalion -and Sensel sole spectators of the sequel of this frenzy of the elements. - -Through the night, the island seemed as if afire from the continual -thunderbolts and the volcano’s stream. The fiery river of the latter had -coursed down mountain and hill to the sea, and was leaping the cliffs a -tremendous fall of flame; whilst the released gases, in their -detonation, outrivaled the thunder. And waterspout was succeeding -waterspout, each discharging its angry contents; the rain, meanwhile, -falling as do the avalanches. It was indeed a deluge. - -Toward dawn, Sensel inquired, “Would it not be well to get farther away? -Should the island sink we are too near.” - -“There is yet time. Ah, the island rocketh again! Sensel, my heart -faileth me.” - -“The poor islanders! They merit it not.” - -“The gods know.” Yet Deucalion’s face was drawn in agony. As for Sensel, -his pallor was extreme. For many minutes, neither spoke; and their eyes -were turned from the dreadful sight. Then Sensel said, “Let us beseech -that they come out of this.” And he fell to plead silently, Deucalion -emulating him. In the bounding boat, the two found it hard to keep on -their knees as they implored heaven’s mercy, and hoped it would come. - -But mercy was not for the island. They gave up hope when another volcano -shot up, and poured its torrent broadcast to the left of the first. Then -said Deucalion, “Let us press on until the island looketh to be on the -line where sky and water meet.” - -When thus well away, they stood in the tossing boat, and gazed long, in -mute anguish, for the island though ceasing to rock, had sunk far down -in the water—was still sinking. Then their exhausted frames insisted -upon support. So they broke their fast, refreshing themselves with the -bread, dried meat, pulse, fruit, and wine. “Soon shall we need our -strength,” said Deucalion. “For the end is near.” - -By judicious use of the oil, the tempestuous waves were kept in -abeyance. Thus they watched until the early morning, amidst the din of -the rumblings underneath, explosions of gases, burstings of waterspouts, -and crashings of thunderbolts. The island was scarcely visible for the -great white waves leaping high upon it. The heavens were lurid with the -volcano’s flames; and two broad torrents of molten, fiery matter were -springing from the island to the sea, that answered in tornadoes of -spray. Whilst the dense vapors rolling toward them threatened to shut -off the spectacle entirely. - -Through all, the doomed mass was slowly, determinedly sinking -down—down—into the mad waters, the consolidating thunderbolts seeming to -press upon it to hasten its descent. The vapors, in their thickening, -obliged Deucalion to move the boat from point to point in order to -retain the view of what was now but the elevated portions of the island. -A few times had this been done when there came a shaking so excessive in -its length and severity that the two shrieked and closed their eyes. -When they looked, the island was disappearing even to the peaks. In an -instant more it vanished! And the waters lashed over it in a vortex -threatening all things—a vortex flame, steam, and smoke mounted! - -“Now will we fly,” shouted Deucalion, “or we shall follow the island. -Scarce will the oil be of use!” - -Though Sensel continued to drop, as Deucalion began his management. The -boat bounded over the water, hardly touching it. It seemed to fly. As -Sensel watched, he became awed, so bird-like, so sentient were the -movements of the slender frame! The water frothing madly about them -might be the verge of the vortex! Would its terrific suction seize them, -bear them down to share the fate of the vanished island? As they -labored, they scarce breathed of their dread. - -But the boat continued to respond to the promptings—bounding, skimming, -flying over the turbid, grasping waters. A half hour’s intensity of -labor brought them relief. The sea was certainly less violent. At times, -the boat could even rest. With hope, they began to regard each other as -they relaxed a little in their efforts. Though hardly could they dare to -accept it, when there was no longer any impetuosity of movement, but -merely the rocking and rolling of rough contact. Shortly, there was not -even rocking or rolling, but rather a gliding. Then fell they on their -knees. - -And that night, slept peacefully, in turn,—as the boat made good time, -in the morning coming upon a region of sunshine. - -Past island after island they speeded, keeping ever to the east by means -of Deucalion’s knowledge of the heavens, as well as by a kind of rude -compass known even in those days. This was a magnetized needle floating -in water crosswise upon a reed.[23] For well were the properties of the -loadstone understood, and utilized. - -On the morning of the second day, they sighted the vessels, that, with -some escaped vessels of Chimo, lay moored in a cove of the island -indicated by Deucalion. And then upon the two came a mighty dread. How -were they to tell these Atlanteans, these Atlanteans already signaling -to them gladly. Thus, in telltale manner, did they slacken their -oncoming, to the quick appreciation of the impatient islanders. The -waiting vessels showed only despairing faces, as the boat more and more -reluctantly approached. Then, when within earshot, a few would-be -hopeful ones began to cry out welcomings and inquiries. - -Standing mute, downcast, Deucalion and Sensel moved in among them. -Though this was not enough; for there came the cries, “The island—is it -well?” “Tell us the good word!” And so on. - -Yet still continued Deucalion and Sensel mute. - -Then demanded a voice, “Tell us the worst!” - -“That can I tell you,” answered Deucalion. - -“What is it?” - -“The island is no more. It hath sunk.” - -Wails, shouts of incredulity responded. - -Deucalion repeated his words, and convincingly. There were no more -incredulous tones, but instead despairing cries, wails, groans, fierce -imprecations. The wildest sounds of woe prevailed. At length, the same -voice that had asked for the worst rang loud, imperative, this time -demanding silence. It proved to be that of the captain of the queen’s -galley. He agonized, but firm, was standing out on the prow of Hellen’s -galley; and continued: - -“Sir Priest, in truth, is Atlantis no more? Have a care—there left we -our dear ones.” His voice broke, but he stood straight and strong. - -“Captain of the galley of the queen—thy wife, thy little ones—are above. -Look not for them—or the island—on earth.” Deucalion’s tones were -faltering, but he also stood firm. - -“We have but thy word. How can we believe? I cannot. I would see with -mine own eyes.” - -“And I!” “And I!” rang many voices. - -“Sir Captain, thy doubts are in reason. I should feel as thou. It is but -a short sail. Further, the queen should hear of it from Atlanteans.” - -There were cries of approbation. - -“Sir Captain, I ask that thou wilt lead a few galleys back, bearing the -nobles and elders who are with us Their word the queen will believe.” - -Loud rang the cries of approbation. - -“It is well. But what of the galley that went on to Cleit?” - -“We saw it no more.” - -“It was lost?” - -“Without doubt.” - -“We may come upon some who live?” - -“It cannot be.” - -“We will go back.” Sorely overcome, the captain held out a hand to one -of the sailors, with this aid, tottered from the prow to the deck, and -then hid himself. - -After further deliberation, it was decided that the few vessels should -return at once, and all the others await them here. Hard did Deucalion -struggle with his impatience to be off! - -Shortly, the two captains had again exchanged galleys. When the captain -of the queen’s galley was once more on board his own, and had been -supplied with food from the plenteous stores of the Chimoan vessels, he -moved off; and was followed by two of the Chimoan vessels bearing such -of the nobles as would return. To dire sounds, the three hastened away. - -When they were well off, Deucalion and Sensel went on to Hellen’s -galley, which lay quite to itself beyond the others—the queen’s -condition demanding this. Dimmer and dimmer grew Sensel’s eyes, and more -and more fluttering his heart. Was it well with Æole? When departing, -her unconsciousness had been his comfort; but, had such continued? Or, -had she come out of it to keenest suffering—not only for her father, but -also for himself? (This last thought, he held in humility, so little did -his selfhood prevail.) - -Continually was he imploring that she might still be sleeping. But when -beside the galley, his emotion became most evident. - -“Sensel, what aileth thee?” - -“Æole—thinkest thou she still sleepeth?” - -“Her sleep will not end until we are with her.” - -“Unless Hellen hath waked her.” - -He then became as in a dream until Hellen’s voice was heard in greeting, -when he looked up to perceive himself and Electra leaning over the -galley’s side. Notwithstanding the woe about them, the two were finding -it hard to restrain their joy. Near them were a few nobles, and their -attendants; farther back, stood the captain and sailors;—and all statues -of grief. - -Deucalion ascended; and was clasped in Hellen’s arms. Sensel went up, -still as in a dream; as in a vision beholding Æole in repose upon the -couch where he had left her. But he was recalled by the grasp of -Electra’s hand, her words of welcome. - -“Electra, the sight of thee doth gladden. Almost can I forget the -horrors we have passed through.” - -“Sensel, we thought never to see thyself or Sir Deucalion more on earth. -Drear was our way over the waters. And we reached this to learn there -had been a dire rocking of the land for days.” - -“I wonder that an island is left. But tell me, Electra, how is it with -Æole?” - -“She sleepeth as doth the babe in the arms of its mother.” - -The color flashed over his face, the light into his eyes. He was so -transfigured that Electra stared at him. “Sensel, art thou not wearied -after thy watching?” - -“Wearied! I feel as though I had come out of a long, sweet sleep.” - -And now, Hellen was seizing his hand. The two embraced as Deucalion and -Electra spoke together. - -“Electra, Æole doth still sleep?” - -“She doth.” - -“And the queen?” - -“She aroused but to faint again; and hath lain in a stupor through the -night.” - -“We will hasten to her,” spoke Deucalion hurriedly. “But first, Æole.” - -Æole lay as marble on a couch near that of the queen. Indeed, her -immobility would have alarmed one not acquainted with the idiosyncrasies -of her case. But, in her cheeks, was a reassuring, faintest tinge of -pink, and her lips retained their color and dewiness. It was as though a -rare statue was becoming replete with life; and these beholding, -continued to gaze in admiring wonder tinctured with awe. - -Sensel’s face was a study in its love and thanksgiving. He could not -raise his eyes from this enthrallment. - -After one keen look, Deucalion bowed his head as if satisfied, and -whispered: “I will first look to the queen.” - -He found Atlana’s set face like that of death, and instantly was -applying restoratives. Then leaving Rica and Elna to chafe her hands, he -returned beside Æole. - -Sensel seized his hand. “Ah, Deucalion, what a power is thine!” - -“Yea, Father. But, how camest thou by it? Never hath the like been known -in Atlantis. Else those priests would not have been mastered.” - -“Long hath it been mine, Hellen. Though I know not what it is. It must -be a hidden force of nature that few hold. Often through it have I -soothed thy mother. And, when Æole was a child, I used it upon her when -she was hurt, and in pain. With her, there came a state like sleep. -Again I used this force when she was called into the inner holy place; -and to my amaze. But, it is a dread power. Such evil could come of it.” - -“I can well see that,” said Sensel. - -“Hush, hush,” here whispered Electra. - -“Yea, hush ye all. Æole doth waken.” And Deucalion leaned over her, the -while signing for them to withdraw. - -The color was deepening, the eyelids fluttering, the lips parting. -Scarcely were they outside, than she opened her eyes. A joyous smile -lighted her face at sight of this dear father; and she held out her -arms. - -When they had embraced, he raised her to a sitting posture, and -supported her. She said, in glad tone, “Father, thou didst not go. It -was good of thee to hearken unto us.” - -“But, I did go. And have but now come back.” - -“Thou art pleased to jest. Is jesting a habit of the Pelasgians? I -thought them a people sober of mind.” - -He laughed. “Æole, thy chiding is fitting. But, I say again that I have -but just come back. I caused thee to sleep.” - -“As thou didst in the temple?” - -“Yea.” - -“I did not feel it come upon me. Why is that?” - -“I know not. I know this—thou yieldest well.” - -“Father, thou art an able one. It is well thou couldst do it, for my -pain would have been sore. Yet, Hellen and Electra, how bore they it?” - -“Well, as I knew. Each had the other.” - -“But—Sensel?” - -“Sensel went with me.” - -“Father!”—There was a fine condensation of amazement, horror, reproach. - -“It was not of my will. He and Hellen were strong in saying they would -go, when Electra screamed because thou hadst fallen into this sleep. -Thou shouldst have seen Hellen. Forgetting me, he darted to her. Here -was the chance for Sensel. He leaped down beside me, and loosed the -boat. I could but yield.” - -“It was wrong of thee, of him. There are other things than that island. -Thou shouldst have turned back rather than have risked a life so young -and noble as that of Sensel. And, for thee—thou wouldst have bereft a -waiting, sorrowing wife and fond children. Should not wife, children, -Sensel, have had more weight than the fate of fifty islands? Father, I -thought better of thee!” - -He rubbed his hands hard in his satisfaction. “That is right, Æole. I -merit thy chiding. Yet I could not but go. It is worth the going to -hearken to thy scolding.” His eyes were twinkling. - -“A fine thing will it be to tell mother.” Then her voice lowered in -dread. “If she be but well? If she hath not sunk beneath her woe? The -doubt doth torture.” - -Deucalion shivered. He also was doubting; though she must not know. Thus -he insisted: - -“Æole, the gods can but bring joy to thy mother. Never hath she -murmured, never hath her trust lessened. But come. Let us go out into -the air.” (Though he turned for the moment aside.) - -The queen was stirring; her eyes were opening. Before passing out, -Deucalion whispered to her ladies, “She is better. When she rouseth, say -not aught of what hath happened.” - -They went out to come upon Sensel who was standing near the door. At -sight of Æole, he hastened to draw a couch more under the awning, with -the words, - -“Æole, thou wilt find ease on this.” - -Much wondering at the sudden exhilaration possessing her, she sat down. - -“Æole, thou art well?” - -“In truth am I.” - -“She is well, and even strong enough to hear of the past night,” said -Deucalion, roguishly. - -“Father!” - -“Æole!” - -“I asked thee not of the island. How could I forget!” - -“Thou hadst much to do in chiding. Now will Sensel tell thee. I go to -Hellen and Electra.” And off he moved toward the other couple, who, at -sound of his footsteps, faced him; and both exclaimed, “There is Æole!” - -“Yea, she is well wakened.” - -The two laughed gaily, then, blushing, looked off on the water. Though -soon spoke Electra. - -“Sir Deucalion, we would hear of the past night.” - -“For that I have come.” - -In a few words, he described the sinking of the island. When he had -finished, Hellen reproached him. - -“Father, thou didst dare too much. What pain hath it caused Electra and -myself.” - -“I knew ye would cheer each other. Further, there was the thought for -the queen.” - -“In truth, it was dire thought for her, for thee, and for Sensel, day -and night,” spoke Electra. “It was not right of thee!” - -“Now is thy time, Electra, to chide, to scold. Already hath Æole done -her part. I will hearken well, for I merit all.” - -“If she can scold who hath lain in her sleep, free of dread, what might -I say who have been waking through it all. Sir Deucalion, I will seal my -lips. I should say too much.” - -“Right, Electra, say no more,” interposed Hellen. “Or, I, too, will join -thee. But, father, instead, will I speak of Electra. Without her, I -could not have borne it. Though she was torn with grief, she waited upon -the queen, helped the ladies, cheered poor Azu who hath been stricken -over the queen; and at times, walked with me talking in bright -manner—and to the helping of the captain and sailors—for the captain -told me they watched her white robe as it were a beacon.” - -“But I knew she would do thus, Hellen.” - -“Ye will spoil me. I have done but what I should.” - -Deucalion was suddenly falling into revery. Hellen was about to address -him, when Electra checked him. Then the two began to pace about the -deck, ever regarding him anxiously. After a little, Electra whispered: - -“Thy mother?” - -“Yea, he is lost upon her. The fear is great, at times, that she may -have passed beyond.” - -“The gods are kind, Hellen. Ye will see her.” - -Meanwhile, Sensel was giving his account to Æole. - -“Æole, we staid to see the island beset by high pillars of water, -pressed upon by bolts of flame, and as if on fire from the burning -mountain. The seething waves were leaping higher and higher upon it: and -it was plain it was sinking. Later, another mountain began to send forth -fire. Imagine, if thou canst, those fiery streams rising high above the -island to fall in rivers of flame, that rushed in fury onward to the -cliffs—from there to leap to the mad waters that answered in tempests of -boiling, hissing spray! And through all was the noise deafening. Ever -were the pent airs[24] bursting from the mountain with noise as of -thunder, the pillars of water breaking, the bolts of flame -crashing—whilst the rain fell in sheets, the ashes in showers!” - -“Did the rain and ashes fall upon you?” - -“They touched us not to our wonder.” - -Æole sighed, relieved; then shivered. - -“It is too much for thee, Æole.” - -“Say on, Sensel. I would hearken to all.” - -“The island was sinking fast, whilst toward us speeded dense vapors that -we feared would hide the end. Thus we moved from point to point that we -might still behold. Though not for long: as, in the early morning came -the end. There was a long and severe trembling—as if heaven and earth -were rending apart! We closed our eyes knowing the worst had come. We -opened them to behold the island vanishing! - -“Yea, in a moment more, we saw it not—saw naught but the meeting waters, -the whirl of their drawing—with flame and smoke rising high above! Then -cried thy father, ‘Now will we fly!’—And amazing became his guiding of -the boat. We bounded, leaped, flew, scarce touching the hungry waves -that we feared would draw us down. Long we thought we should not get -beyond. But the boat is charmed. And so is thy father. We bounded, -leaped, flew on—on—to less raging waters; thence to smooth ones; later -sighting these vessels to be stricken with further dread. For, how were -we to tell these Atlanteans that their island was no more?” - -“Ah—how?” - -“Though thy father did it, Æole.” - -“The poor Atlanteans!” - -“Æole, through it all, thou wert of more thought than the island. Ever -was I fearing thou wouldst come out of thy sleep. As I helped thy -father, I was dwelling upon thy grief shouldst thou waken ere we reached -thee. Less worked I for life than for thy peace of mind. Though life is -without price whilst thou art of it. Now, it is past belief that I am -with thee, that peace and joy are our own, that I hold thy hand, that I -kiss it thus!” - -Æole had never seen anything so beautiful as his smile. She looked down -at her hand, then at his; and upon her came the desire to kiss this hand -so enfolding hers. But, her look was more than many kisses, as she said: -“Sensel, our lives will prove our thanks.” - -“Our life, Æole.” - -Now upon his ears smote sore interruption. The voices of Hellen and -Electra were very near. Thus he murmured, “There can be but one life for -us, Æole.” - -Then in came the two under the awning. They sat down unmindful of the -agitation of Sensel and Æole, being all occupied with their own sweet -emotions. But, they began to speak of the events of the night; and -Sensel, in greatest patience, replied to their questions. Glad was he -when Deucalion appeared. Then he excused himself. And, when outside, -fell to pacing the deck absorbed; at times, pausing to gaze in -somnambulistic fashion upon the water. - -Under this awning, the evening meal was partaken of. This consisted of -bread, pulse, dried meats, honey, melons, pomegranates, wine, and a -sherbet made of almonds and honey—so well were the fleeing Chimoan -vessels victualed, so generous was the fifth island in its offerings of -fruit. - -Moreover, Azu served them. He was quite himself now that Deucalion had -assured him the queen would recover, that he would again bear her train. -Though, in this serving, his lurches threatened the gravity of the -eaters full as much as the downfalling of the things he bore. Indeed, -not a few of the latter came to grief, thus conducing to the lightening -of spirit of those being served. Azu was Azu. - -The night was soft and bright, to the comfort of Deucalion, Sensel, and -Hellen, who reposed on couches under the awning, using the rugs as -coverings. The oarsmen spread themselves about the deck. As to the -ladies, they were well housed in the withdrawing room. - -Every night was as this in temperature. Never a cloud obscured the -heavens. Thus were they favored. - -But a few more days, and the sails of the three returning vessels were -sighted. Then, as had been agreed, all the waiting vessels save the one -containing the queen, went noiselessly out to meet them. Laggard was the -approach of these three: and this told the story. At last they met, far -out on the water. - -The queen’s galley was ahead of the other two; and, at its prow, stood -the bowed form of the captain. Now was the worst verified! - -They called on him to speak. - -Slow were his words in coming: though, they burst forth with frantic -vehemence. - -“Atlanteans, we hearkened unto the truth! Our island hath vanished—all -save the highest peaks[25] far to the northeast! Scarce could we push to -where it hath lain for the mud and ashes that thicken the water!—And -dead men fill the sea even as the fishes!” - - - - - CHAPTER XVIII. - PYRRHA. - - -Soft continued the nights and bright the days as they sailed by the -islands, and along the Afrite Coast. Quick were they in sighting the -green gay Atlas Mountains, and then Cape Spartel. Upon viewing the -latter, intense became Deucalion’s emotion. With eyes eager and face -flushing, he cried in husky tones: “Ah Æole, Hellen, now is your mother -near! With what a heart I passed yon point to go onward to Atlantis! -Sensel, can we ever forget?” - -Sensel could reply only by pressing the hands held out to him. Then, -with moistening eyes, both watched, as did the three beside them. - -On they pressed into a strait; and toward a point on the African Coast, -the ancient Abyla and the Ape’s Hill of the moderns. Nine miles across -lay the great rock, afterward named Alube by the Phœnicians, and Calpe -by the Greeks. It is the Gibraltar of to-day. - -These two points, the Rock of Gibraltar and Ape’s Hill, constituted the -ancient Pillars of Hercules. Not that the Greek hero had any part in -their naming. Rather they were named for the Tyrian deity whose worship -the Phœnicians introduced into all their settlements. Long after the -sinking of Atlantis, in a forgetting, perhaps unbelieving age of -maritime sloth, these Pillars, the guards of the Mediterranean, came to -be considered the ends of the earth. Thus sank the glories of the island -into fable! - -When well off Abyla, the vessels steered northward toward the famous -Rock, the rock that was raising its mammoth proportions high—that rock -that has since been called “a mountain of histories”—the rock that was -overshadowing the waiting ones! - -Eyes hopeful yet fearing, eyes sad to desperation, were fixed upon -it—every heart throbbed wild—as the vessels crossed the waters of the -strait to the green and gray coast from which the Great Rock jutted -invitingly in its virgin stillness, even then exerting its strange -fascination: a fascination that would impel to itself the Saracen Tarik, -thousands of years later; a fascination that would cause Moor and -Christian to engage in warfare, as the years went on; a fascination that -would bring contention between Christian Spain and Christian England in -the Middle Ages; a fascination that would draw upon itself, in modern -times, that memorable, terrible siege of four years when French and -Spanish exhausted their resources but to prove its latent magnetism—in -that it continued to hold, against all odds, the English garrison that -had so long nestled in its rugged bosom! - -On their right, spread the beauteous Mediterranean; on the left, was a -small bay toward which lay the Rock’s only sloping side. Erelong, all -eyes began to ask of Deucalion which course should they take, this -Deucalion who was standing so motionless with rapt face. Before them was -the south end of the Great Rock, steep, precipitous, inaccessible; and -upon its grim height they began to look in fear. Should they go to its -left or its right? - -But, when the moment came, Deucalion was ready to give the order. -“Behold, the point on the right. That will we round. There left we the -vessels. Æole, Hellen, then shall we sight them!” - -So extreme was his agitation, that they forgot their fears in desiring -to calm him. Bravely Æole spoke: - -“Yea, Father, mother is there—as thou didst say.” - -“Yea, mother is there,” echoed Hellen. - -“As I did say,” murmured Deucalion vaguely. Then he closed his eyes, for -they were drawing very near. Already the Great Rock seemed looming over -them. - -“Round that point, Hellen, with speed,” he aroused to command. “Then -shall we behold them!” - -Hellen’s galley rounded the point, but not speedily; rather slowly, -timidly. Would the vessels of Pyrrha and her friends be there moored? -Would Pyrrha appear in answer to their shouts? - -In the moment of rounding, none of these interested ones dared raise -their eyes. But blessed sounds broke from the Atlantean sailors. In this -moment of rounding, they burst into cheers, for all their saddened -hearts. Then the fearing ones took courage. They lifted their eyes; they -looked; they beheld the Pelasgian vessels lying as if enchanted on the -bright, smooth waters of the beautiful haven. - -The cheerings strengthened as the other vessels also rounded. These -mighty tones quickly brought life to the enchanted vessels. Their decks -filled with patient, faithful, loving ones whose joyous welcomings -answered these newcomers—these returning Pelasgians, these sad-eyed -Atlanteans. - -But Deucalion, Æole and Hellen stood faint—waiting for the one form to -appear. The moments seemed ages. - -Though surely the hurrying of a few officers below on Pyrrha’s vessel -boded good. The three strained their eyes for the view of that dear form -when it should hasten to respond. Holding each other tight, they reeled, -when an officer returned, leading, rather supporting a white-robed lady. -That was she. That was the wife! That was the mother! Deucalion and his -children staggered to the edge of the prow, to wave and kiss their -hands. And it was “Pyrrha, wife!” “Mother!” “Mother!” - -Pyrrha raised her head, and looked; and ran, weeping her thanks, to lean -far over the vessel’s side, and hold out her arms. - -On went the galleys toward her. When Hellen’s was alongside, the rope -thrown, and the plank laid, such a speeding across as there was by -Deucalion and Hellen, with Æole between. - -Pyrrha awaited at the end of the plank. The spectators, as one, burst -into cheers, when the four met and entwined. Though their fears were for -the mother. Would she faint, perhaps sink under her happiness? - -And indeed dizziness did overcome Pyrrha for the moment. But Deucalion -held her; and whispered reviving words. Besides, these were her children -kissing her hands, her face, her hair, her robe, and calling in heavenly -fashion, “Mother!” “Mother!” - -So she strengthened to weep of her joy; to look from Hellen to Æole, -from Æole to Hellen in wonderment, so striking was their beauty, aye, -better still, their nobility, their purity of expression. - -And these children, in transport, were gazing upon their mother. They -had borne into captivity an enduring remembrance of her grace, nobility -and beauty; but the remembrance was as naught to this reality. They -could not take their eyes from her; and, at last, Hellen exclaimed: - -“Mother, how fair, how grand art thou. Sorrow hath not marred, but -glorified thee!” - -“She is a bright spirit,” added Deucalion. “Nay, Pyrrha, thou art a -goddess.” - -“Hail to the goddess Pyrrha!” cried Hellen. - -At this, the officers and crew of Pyrrha’s vessel shouted as one, “Yea, -yea, hail to the good goddess, Pyrrha!” - -“They know thee, dear Wife,” whispered Deucalion, “the _good_ fitteth -well.” - -But Pyrrha knew she was not good—that none are good save the Divine. She -could not _be_ good, but she could _do_ good through the Divine influx. - -Yet these exaggerated expressions were dear, coming as they did of love. -For ever is love precious. So she received them, blushing even as a -girl. No fear was there now of her fainting. Strong she stood with an -arm about each child as the friends from the neighboring vessels came -aboard to greet her husband. Sensel came also to clasp her hand, and -glide away. - -Very soon Hellen went to bring Electra. When this beauteous maiden bent -before her, Pyrrha gazed surprised, admiring; and next held out her hand -and drew her to her to kiss her well. Still retaining the hand, she -asked of Deucalion, “Are all the Atlanteans like this?” - -“Would that they were. The spirit of Electra is as fair as is her body -of flesh. With them the outer body was fair, but the inner one had -become evil of shape. Moreover Electra hath in her veins the best blood -of Atlantis and Khemi.” - -“Hath she parents?” - -“Her parents are above. There were Alto the king and his two brothers. -Alto was the father of the last king, Atlano. The wife of King Atlano -was Atlana, the daughter of the second brother by a princess of Khemi. -The mother of Electra was the daughter of the third brother and wife of -a prince of Khemi; and her brother was Oltis, the last high priest. Yet, -though Electra was a princess and his niece, Oltis placed her in the -temple as handmaid. From there, we freed her.” - -“Why did Oltis thus?” - -“He hated her father Cairais because Cairais well knew his evil spirit. -And he longed for the riches, that would come to Electra. Further, he -wished to trouble Queen Atlana who loved Electra well, after her -mother.” - -“Father, sudden was the passing away of Cairais. Could it be that Oltis -poisoned him?” - -“Ask me not, Hellen.” - -“If Atlano had died, would Queen Atlana have reigned?” - -“I feel sure that she would, though she is not all Atlantean. Hitherto, -the kings and queens have been of pure race. But the Atlanteans were so -fond of Queen Atlana that they would have made light of her Khemian -blood; and the more so that they hated Oltis.” - -Pyrrha had continued to hold Electra’s hand; and the latter had been -regarding her brightly in her lack of comprehension of Deucalion’s and -Hellen’s words. Thus Pyrrha’s heart warmed the more. - -“Would that she knew our tongue, Deucalion.” - -“It will come to her soon. In six months Sensel and myself mastered -Atlantean.” - -Pyrrha looked again at Electra. It was strange how this young girl -attracted her. With growing delight, Hellen watched his mother’s -interest. As to Deucalion, he was exultant—that is, within. Things were -going as he wished. - -For the next half hour, Deucalion was busy recounting to Pyrrha and -their tried friends the main events as they had occurred since he parted -from them. They listened to exclaim continually. When he had finished, -for this time, he spoke in touching manner of his gratitude to these -dear Pelasgians, exalting their constancy to Pyrrha and himself. - -In turn, Illyr and wife, Ephes and wife, Pelop and wife, with their -children, declared the stay with Pyrrha had been a bright holiday, and -that theirs was the pleasure of gratitude. Stoutly they insisted that -the obligation was on their side. This sweet wrangling was to the keen -enjoyment of Hellen, who, with Æole and Electra, still stood beside -Pyrrha. - -But, where was Sensel? After kissing Pyrrha’s hand, he had vanished, not -to return. Repeatedly had Æole looked about the vessel for him; and had -as often wondered if he were within the small cabin, or had gone below -to the sleeping apartments. At last, as she was gazing wistfully at the -stairway leading to the latter, she perceived a head rising into view. -But this was a head on which was a cap of white linen with crown -encircled by a fillet of scarlet cloth that tied in a bow behind and -with ends depending! - -Moreover, this figure, as it further arose into view, displayed a most -elegant garb. There was a broad cape of purple wool fitted to the -shoulder, and reaching to the waist; and adorned with yellow lace. -Beneath, was a coat of scarlet cloth fitting close to the body, opening -in front, and reaching to the knees. Still beneath was an inner garment -of yellow linen that fell in graceful fullness to the ankles. About the -waist was a golden girdle; and shoes of red leather ornamented the feet. - -It took but a few moments to view all this. And ah, but it was a rare -figure and garb; and bewildering—for the height was Sensel’s!—Further, -were not these brilliant eyes meeting hers, Sensel’s, also? Was not this -his smile? - -Her head swam as this noble, elegant, lissome shape approached to bow -gracefully, grandly to her and all. Next, she began to wonder why -everyone, even to her father, should bend with utmost deference, in -return. - -But Deucalion, who was much enjoying her perplexity, hastened to -explain. - -“Æole, Sensel hath left us. In his place is Prince Pelasgus, the son of -our king.” - -She closed her eyes, stunned. But the prince was taking her hand. -Thereupon, recovering somewhat, she opened her eyes, looked at him -calmly; and withdrawing her hand, made a low obeisance. He was the -prince. He was not Sensel!—Though most unhappy thoughts were crowding -upon the shock of this revealment, she managed to speak with sweet -dignity. - -“Prince Pelasgus, this cometh upon me without warning. Little dreamed I -that Sensel was other than he seemed.” - -Deucalion’s satisfaction was something to behold; and this the keen-eyed -Pelop laughed over to himself. For, the former was thinking, “Æole is -like her mother. She will rise above the pressing weight ever.” Then -aloud, he added, in Atlantean, that Electra might be benefited. - -“Yea, Æole, this is the young prince who shared with me the perils of -war, and who was firm in his wish to aid in freeing thyself and Hellen. -And, who, after short trial, so ably took upon himself the shape of -Sensel.” - -“Ever have I known the noble spirit of Sensel,” she returned. - -“So ever have I,” interposed Electra. “Scarce did I open mine eyes when -I heard he was the prince.” - -“Thou—didst know—he was the prince?” - -“Hellen told me but this morn.” - -“Why was not I told?” - -“It was for the reason that the prince wished thou shouldst believe him -but Sensel until we reached here.” - -“_But Sensel_”—Æole checking herself, turned to the prince. “Why was -this, Prince Pelasgus?” - -“I knew that thou didst look upon Sensel with good will; but I knew not -how thou wouldst look upon the prince.” - -A great load seemed lifted. She said naively, charmingly, “Thou wert -right to think I should like the old beyond the new. There have been -many princes, but never another Sensel. Prince Pelasgus, ever shall I -joy to think of thee as Sensel. No higher thought could I have for -thee.” - -Over Sensel’s—Prince Pelasgus’ face passed a beautiful glow, and his -eyes shone with a loving light that all might see. Pyrrha, -comprehending, glanced at Deucalion, to find him watching the two in -delight. As to the friends of their exile, they were receptive also. - -For one, the keen-eyed Pelop whispered to his wife: - -“I see it. Those two are fond.” - -She was as interested. “They are a noble pair. And most fair to look -upon. May it be so. Well I like it that his eyes are so dark, and hers -so blue. As thine and mine.” - -Pelop laughed to himself. Well he knew his Peloppa’s taste for romance. -Then he looked about with a view to further discovery. - -“Look at Hellen. How he bendeth over that fair Atlantean.” - -“It is another pair, that I see. Ah, Pelop, but our voyage over the -Middle Sea will not drag!” - -Again Pelop laughed, and hugged himself; and said with feeling, “We were -young once, Wife.” - -“And not so old now. Thou wilt speak for thyself; and I for myself. Ah, -but our own joy maketh me kind to all who wish to pair. May I live to -aid our children along the same bright path!” And she looked at her -gamboling ones with the air of a prophetess. - -“If one were old enough now, Peloppa. But matters will soon mend. And -our Zoe will be another like thyself.” - -“How?” - -“She is bright of mind.” - -“She is.” - -“She hath a quick tongue.” - -“Pelop!” - -“And—a most tender heart.” - -“It is well thou didst add that.” - -“And—she is one to hold most dear.” Here his tone was such that Peloppa, -in spite of the eyes about her, could but put her hand within the one he -so eagerly held out. - -Then they forbore further talking in order to listen to Deucalion, who, -at inquiry of Epha, was again started upon the subject of Atlantis; -whilst Prince Pelasgus talked with Pyrrha and translated much to -Electra, who stood with an arm about Æole. - -After a little, Pyrrha inquired of her husband, “When can I see the -queen?” - -“On the morrow, I hope. She is better, though she seemeth to see no one -about her, not even her ladies. If she could but arouse. It may be that -thou wilt do it, that thou wilt bring her back to peace. She is lost in -grief.” - -“The poor queen—without kin, without a land!” - -“Poor people!” said Prince Pelasgus. - -“We will make it bright for them in Pelasgia,” spoke Hellen. - -“We will,” declared Deucalion. - -“We will,” echoed all. - -“We know what it is to be strangers in a far land,” added Hellen. - -“Yet—we had our land to look to,” said Æole. - -“Ho for Pelasgia!” cried these Pelasgians. And then looked sadly over at -the Atlantean vessels. As with one impulse, they moved to the vessel’s -side to watch the Atlanteans long and affectionately; and thus adopted -them into their hearts. - -The Atlanteans appeared to understand, for they returned the looking -with smiles, sad though they were to desperation. Not one of them but -was mourning the loss of near or dear ones. Indeed, many were envying -Celesa’s relatives, that they had returned. But their grief must be in -silence, for they yet had their queen. - -On the morn of the morrow, Pyrrha left her vessel elated. At last she -was to behold this woman who had so tenderly cared for her children; and -entered the withdrawing room confident that she could help. - -As she passed on to the queen, Deucalion beckoned for the ladies in -waiting to come out. These, after listening to his explanations, sat -down under the awning, and regarded each other in wonder. Was this -Pyrrha—this fair, grand, most lovable looking woman but one of a type? -If so, what a race was the Pelasgian, after Deucalion and his children! - -Pyrrha stood beside the queen reverently, adoringly. Indeed her love so -went out from her as to affect the pale, passive recipient. For Pyrrha -had gazed but a little while, when Atlana turned and looked full at her, -and this though she had come without noise. - -Of her amaze, the queen strengthened to raise somewhat, and stare at the -angelic face bending over her; and finally whispered: - -“Who art thou? Comest thou of the gods?” - -Though the tongue was unknown, Pyrrha comprehended. - -“Gracious Queen, I am of earth. I am one who holdeth thee deep in her -heart, whose prayers will ever call down blessings upon thee, whose days -and nights will be favored in thanking thee.” - -“Thou sayest thou art of earth?” asked Atlana in Pelasgian, and so -correctly that Pyrrha answered not for wonder.—“Thou sayest thou art of -earth?” she repeated, after waiting. - -“Dear Queen, I am of earth,—and until these last weeks—one of its most -sorrowing daughters.” - -“Most sorrowing. Then know I how thou hast felt. But—why wert thou -sorrowing?” - -“Dear Queen, I was a mother bereft of her children. Not that the gods -had taken them to make Heaven more dear. But, through war—through -fierce, cruel man—had they been torn from me!” - -Atlana was rising higher, was looking at her piercingly. - -“Dear Queen, it cometh to thee. Why should I hold thee so dear, why -should I bow down to thee—I, a mother bereft of her children. Few such -mothers are there in this happy world!” - -“Thou—art—not—?” - -“But I am—I am! I am that mother who mourned for her children, Hellen -and Æole!” - -Atlana, who had raised until she was sitting erect, burst into tears, -weeping as if she could never cease. Pyrrha, as she supported her, -looked around for Deucalion; and beheld him standing near the door, -smiling. He signed that it was well. So she began to dry the queen’s -tears, pausing at times to embrace her, upon perceiving that such -pleased her. - -Still the life-giving tears ran on, sobs coming heart-rendingly, so that -Deucalion looked upward to murmur: - -“Thanks, ye Powers! And let the stream run long and fast. Let it be the -beginning of life to the desert place. May that parched field, her mind, -be so well watered that new flowers of hope may bloom again, and shed -their fragrance upon her sad Atlanteans. Ah, poor queen, poor people!” - -Long was it before the tears were spent. Then Atlana put out her hand -for Pyrrha’s. “I would kiss thee,” she murmured. - -Pyrrha leaned over. When Atlana had kissed her cheek, she pleaded, “Thou -wilt not leave me?” - -“Dear Queen, from now, am I thy sister, nurse.” - -“Ever wilt thou be my sister. But not for long my nurse. Already, I feel -new life. And thou hast caused it—thou—sweet spirit—thou—” - -“Pyrrha, call me Pyrrha.” - -“Thou—sweet Pyrrha—thou mother of Æole and Hellen.” So lovingly lingered -she over these names that Pyrrha kissed her again and again, while -Atlana sighed, content. Afterward, she asked as a child might, “Am I to -know rest again? Long is it since I have felt such ease?. I could sleep. -Should I, dear Pyrrha, thou wilt not loose my hand?” - -“Nay, dear Queen. I will but hold it closer.” - -With the confidence of a child, Atlana pressed the hand to her heart, -and lay back passive, drowsy, shortly to slumber so serenely that Pyrrha -marveled. - -Soon Deucalion drew near. “All will be well,” he whispered, “but how -knew she our tongue? Never was I so wondering!” - -“Nor I, though I knew she had studied it, so well did she speak. Only -this morning Æole told me that, when herself and Hellen had learned -somewhat of Atlantean, the queen began to study Pelasgian. Thus, it came -to pass that, on the one day, they would talk in Atlantean; and, on the -next, in Pelasgian.” - -“As thou sayest, she speaketh it well.” - -“She looketh wise; and, of a truth, is sweet and fond.” - -“Ah, Pyrrha, such a heart is hers. But it was wasted on her husband. How -hath she missed the good thing in life. Atlano could care but for -himself.” - -At this dread name, Pyrrha shivered. Deucalion put his arm about her, -and bade her lean upon him. Then she whispered, “Ah poor queen, life -hath not been life to her! To be so fond, and have naught but a stone!” - -“Say, rather, life is not life to the one who is not fond. Life was not -life to Atlano. Life is not life to the wife or husband who knoweth not -tender feeling. Such pluck but dead fruit.” - -“Ah but thou speakest truth. With each moment of our wedded life how -glad have I been that thou wert so dear. All bitter hath had its sweet. -Though grief hath held me, yet have I had thee to think upon, to look -for, to hearken unto.” - -“Yea, and to joy in, for of me art thou sure. To think I have come into -heaven again! And from hell. Ah, that island, Pyrrha, that fair -Atlantis! The thought of it cometh upon me strong at times, so that I -find it hard to bear up. That fair, grand, most favored spot—a heaven -but for man!” - -Thus, on they talked—of past horrors, of the present brightness, of the -happiness fore-gleaming from their children’s hopes—until the queen -began to stir. Her restlessness increased. Erelong, she was turning -toward them. After an intent look, she extended her hand to Deucalion. - -“I wronged thee,” she murmured. “Forgive.” - -“Gracious Queen, I have naught to forgive. We will be but the dearer -friends. It is all in knowing the right. Thou hast thought it over -since.” - -“Well and long have I thought it over. And I know the worst. Think not I -have been deaf whilst lying here. My body hath been as a stone, but the -mind hath been quick. My poor Atlanteans! Oh, to be of help to them! We -are bereft, bereft!” - -“Then—thou knowest?” - -“Yea, whilst lying here, I have heard that within and without to make me -know our island is no more.” - -“Some of thy people are left thee.” - -“Call them not people. Call them Atlanteans. It is the dearer name. We -are of Atlantis—though it is no more.” - -“Dear Queen Atlana, thy thought for these thy Atlanteans will make it -well for thee. Thy wish to cheer them will bring thee cheer. Cheer -cometh in giving cheer. And, here is Pyrrha for thy sister. Erelong we -hope to see thee thine old self.” - -“Never, Sir Deucalion, can I be mine old self. Mine old self was full of -hope, of joy, of sweet, warm feeling. Mine own self! Ah, I am -dead—dead!” - -She leaned back, and closed her eyes. Deucalion pressed her wasted hand -and spoke in softest tone, with intent to bring her out of her sad -thought. - -“Dear Queen, I should have said a little like thine old self. That will -be much. And now I would warn thee when next thou seest me, I will be -more of my old self—in garb. I shall be no priest of Poseidon. I shall -be in Pelasgian dress, fairer of skin, and shorn of this beard. I would -not change until thou couldst be told.” - -“In any dress, thou art Deucalion, the kind, the noble. Pyrrha, how -blest art thou! But go, Sir Deucalion, that I may soon behold thee as -Pelasgian. Whilst thou art gone, I will look at Pyrrha.” - -“Not this day, dear Queen. But on the morrow. Though now will I leave -thee that thou mayst look upon Pyrrha.” - - - - - CHAPTER XIX. - THE BEGINNING OF PEACE. - - -The next morning, the vessels began their course up the Middle Sea. And -with what a difference in the hearts they carried. Truly the Pelasgian -vessels were bearing feathers, the Atlantean vessels stones. Alas for -these poor Atlanteans! Well did their vessels, even in their port, -testify to the weighty spirits of those aboard them, for they ploughed -the water unwillingly, heavily. - -Later in the day, the noblest of Pelasgians appeared before his children -and Electra to dazzle their eyes; whereupon, Hellen after much -interchange of criticism with Æole, asseverated: - -“Ah, father, we would have known thee but for the beard. That it was -that hid thee.” - -But Electra said nothing so engrossed was she with the beauty of each -separate feature. Now were disclosed the noblest of chins, the firmest, -kindest of mouths, the perfect contour, the strength and sweetness of -expression, the high purpose. She could not gaze enough. - -And thus felt Queen Atlana when Deucalion presented himself in this -beautiful costume much like that of Prince Pelasgus, the difference -being that there was less of trimming, and that the cape and coat were -of one color, a rich deep blue. It was fine to see her admiration, finer -to hear it expressed. Thus, Deucalion really blushed, and to steady -himself, said, “Ah, dear Queen, if thou thinkest this so fine, wait -until I bring before thee two noble youths of Pelasgia, which will be on -the morrow, if thou art willing.” - -“Who are they?” she asked absently, in her study of his grand beauty. - -“The first is young Prince Pelasgus, the son of our king. The second is -my Hellen. Then wilt thou behold garbs.” - -“Dear Hellen! I can see him, as he will look. But when came this young -Prince Pelasgus?” - -“It is a year since he first saw Atlantis.” - -“What sayest thou?” - -“It is a year since he went with me to Atlantis—a year since he began to -serve in the temple—but a few months since thou didst see fit to praise -him. Call to mind his tall shape, his garb of dust color, his shining -eyes, his tender tones, his smile, the grace of his swaying body.” - -It was most evident that Atlana called all this to mind, so overwhelmed -did she show herself. She could only implore him by a gesture to -continue. - -“Yea, dear Queen, young Prince Pelasgus came upon the island with me as -Sensel. Well had he served with me in war; and fond did we grow of each -other. When I would come after my children, he would come with me in the -shape of Sensel. And, as thou shouldst know, well did he aid me. Though -little canst thou, or any other, know what he hath been to me. But for -him I could not have mastered.” - -“I believe it, Sir Deucalion.” - -She pondered awhile; and then said, “I would see the Pelasgian youths -now.” - -“Dear Queen, on the morrow. It is enough for this day.” - -She acquiesced, bending her head; and lay back in a sweet quiet, shortly -whispering, “On the morrow.” - -And on the morrow, did these youths of Pelasgia kneel before her. - -First entered the prince in his brightness, elegance, grace, and beauty. -Charmingly he knelt to kiss her hand, his courtesy so affecting her that -a faint smile came into her face as she gave him greeting. - -Then Hellen followed, kneeling and taking her other hand. Thus, the -smile blended with glad tears. Here was her handsome, brave, impulsive, -fiery Hellen, clad in blue and buff, and looking a young demi-god in his -rebound to freedom and happiness. His face was transfigured; and hers -grew in brightness as she greeted him. And she thought, as she pressed -the two hands, “Am I, in truth, to smile again?” - -Then in her gracious way she spoke. “Noble youths of Pelasgia, with fond -pride is my greeting. But rise that I may look with even more pride upon -you, that I may feast my eyes upon your brave, free port.—Ah, what -garments!” - -Gleeful was their laughter. Whereupon, she smiled back quite in her -olden way. - -“What thrills of joy ye cause me. Ah, Hellen—Hellen!” - -“Fine is it to be thus looked upon,” burst from him naively. “All day -could I hearken to thy praises. And to think I am that Hellen,”—he -paused, fearing to bring sad thought to her forgetting self, and -changed, “that Hellen, who, but yesterday, was lamenting his old -garments, who feared to put them on so worn were they, who was lost in -wondering where others would come from. When behold, this morning, did -my father bring me these.” - -“It was not that his garments were so old,” interposed Deucalion, “but -that he was rent with envy upon beholding me in my change of garb, -yesterday.” - -“Have it thus, if thou wilt, father. It is rising high to envy thee in -any state, or garb.” - -“That is well said, Hellen,” spoke the queen. “But I know thine envy -hath for meaning the wish to be like him.” - -“He will never reach to his wish,” said Prince Pelasgus, solemnly. “That -is for me. For I hold Deucalion more dear even than doth he.” - -At this calumny, Hellen made as if he would dart upon him; whereupon, he -took to his old posturing and evading. Then the two burst into laughter. -It was plain they were the best of friends. This so pleased the queen -that she declared: - -“Now is my spirit cheered to the full. Or will be when I have looked -upon Æole and Electra. Where are they?” - -Immediately two glad voices cried from without the door, “Here!” “Here!” - -In a trice, their arms—the arms of these two young girls she had so -befriended and suffered for—were about her, their fervent kisses on -brow, lip, and cheek. - -“Dear Queen!” “Dear Queen!” they cried. - -She embraced one, and then the other. Speak she could not. Then she lay -back to marvel at the change that happiness had effected—even in them. -In their white, flowing robes and golden girdles, with long waving hair -crowned with chaplets of flowers—flowers brought from beside the Great -Rock in the early morning by Hellen and Sensel—with eyes lustrous from -rest, happiness, and young love, they were beauteous as Aurora when she -early treads her golden days! - -And these lovely flowers they were pressing into her hands but completed -the spell. Supreme became her satisfaction, her delight. Surely now had -come compensation. Here were these four youthful ones, here were -Deucalion and Pyrrha, here were flowers that of themselves brought -peaceful rapture. No, her suffering had not been for naught. A tide of -thanksgiving surged in her heart; and she closed her eyes to allow it -full sway. - -They waited, mute, until she should again look at them. When she did, -new light, new life was in her face. Here before her were these -motionless ones, statues of sweet solicitude. In answering their gaze, -she thought only of them, for the moment. Thus joyous was her tone. “Sir -Deucalion, thou wert right. Much is there yet to live for. My life -cannot be void, barren. It hath its bright, its fertile spots. I see -them. They cheer me.” - -She held out her hand to him. On his knees, he kissed it, the others, -thereupon, emulating him: then, at his sign, the young people turned to -withdraw with him. And Atlana and Pyrrha were left together. - -Not many days after, Queen Atlana was able to show herself to her -Atlanteans, the while allowing the delighted Azu to bear her train. -Rapturously was she greeted, so that she wept for joy. In these tears -had gladness no place. For, gladness comes of the body, joy of the -spirit. The queen’s spirit was moved to its depths, for ever, as now, -had the Atlanteans shown her love and fealty. Never had they been -lacking. Always might she be sure of them. - -Well did Deucalion speak her words. Her Atlanteans with her were to weep -no more, with her were to hope, with her were to begin a new life in the -country of their refuge, Pelasgia. - -To which were returned assurances the most comforting. For, like -herself, her subjects were trying to look upon the side least dark. Thus -they declared their homage: that they would rally about her with no fear -and all zeal, and make a new Atlantis for her and themselves. - -She, standing stately, signified her satisfaction. And, thereafter, -retired to weep her last, and find the beginning of peace. - - - - - CHAPTER XX. - HAPPY PAIRS. - - -Meanwhile, the young people had been reveling in their happiness, and -this bright, smooth sailing over the Middle Sea. The hours were winged. -As well were they winged to Pelop and Peloppa, whose eyes found constant -entertainment, whose tongues, continual employment. Even Pyrrha and -Deucalion were as fruitful a source of interest as the young lovers. -Thus, Pelop and Peloppa were ever finding means to get upon their vessel -that they might watch the tender emotions so prevalent. - -One soft, breezeless, starlit evening, the friends met together on -Pyrrha’s vessel. Of course, conversation was not long in reaching its -accustomed height; when, in the midst of the noise, Hellen, who had been -standing at the stern, came beside Electra. - -“Electra, it is the night for a ride. Let us get in the boat. It -tempteth as it followeth in such ease.” - -For the fantastic boat had been attached to the vessel; and it was -Deucalion and Pyrrha’s habit to sit in it of mornings, and be pulled -slowly or swiftly, as the vessel pleased. - -Hellen’s tone, though subdued, was most eager. Thus, Electra, who had -never been in the boat, and who longed for the ride, answered fitly, -“Yea.” And at once arose and walked off with him. - -When they were at the stern, and looking over, Pelop, who had apparently -been all intent upon some remark of Ephes, turned and confided: - -“Ah, Peloppa, but that young Hellen is a wary one! Didst thou note him? -Well can I see what he meaneth.” - -Peloppa, who had been no less interested, returned, “I have lost naught. -And how quick is she to further him. What haste was in her gait, what -hope was in her eye. Is that Atlantean modesty?” - -“She hath no thought of his meaning.” Pelop’s tone was indignant. “If -she had thought of it, she would have looked wise, and said ‘Nay,’ -however much against her will. As if I know not young women!” - -“That is thou dost flatter thyself thou knowest them.” - -“Thou canst not deny I have had my trials.” Here he coughed and winked -in his waggish way, so that Peloppa laughed, as she retorted: - -“Of a truth, thy trials have been sore—if thou meanest me. Ah, to think -I was once young, Pelop. And what a race I led thee. There was no such -willing way as this, though I felt but the more willing within.” - -“That is why I boast of my trials. When thou saidst ‘Nay,’ and ran away, -I read thee, and laughed. But caught thee soon.” - -“Forsake not the truth, Pelop. And—young was I.” - -“Of a truth, wert thou young. And art young still. Therefore, in thy -youth of body and mirth of spirit, go not beyond the bounds of kind -thought. I speak of Electra.” - -“Thou hast the right, as ever, Pelop. I fear I have judged in haste. -But, as thou knowest so well young women, thou shouldst have knowledge, -also, of riper ones. We love to set up our sex in judgment.” - -“And yet, after judging, are but the more ready to forgive,” was the -gallant answer. - -Pelop, honor to him, was right. In all innocence had Electra gone with -Hellen. So, when he had descended the ladder, brought the boat well -under it, and attached it, she was ready to follow him; and did. When at -the bottom, she turned, and held out her hand to make the spring. -Hellen, as he stood firmly in the boat, spoke in calmest of tones: -“Jump, Electra.” - -She obeyed, holding out both hands to him. But ignoring the hands, he -caught herself, to hug her close and with the strength of his eager -young love as he drew her down to a seat. Rapturous was his whisper, -“Now have I thee to myself, Electra!” - -It must be confessed that, for the moment, Electra was helpless from -delight. But, womanlike, in the next, she rallied to say and do that -which was most foreign to her inclination. For all the times were so -ancient, she remonstrated with the usual dignified manner of to-day. - -“Shame, Hellen! Let me go. Thou dost forget thyself!” - -“Forget myself, Electra! At last am I acting my true self. At last am I -doing what I have longed for day and night, at last I clasp thee!” Here -he hugged her even harder. “And thus clasping thee, could I die, did I -think thou wouldst not look upon me. For beyond words art thou dear—as -thou shouldst know. Now, wilt thou be my wife?” - -This suddenness was overwhelming. But such was Hellen. As she struggled -to free herself, she spoke with fine reason. “For thee to talk of -wedding! Thou art too young. As am I. Let me go.” - -“Never—until thou answerest.” - -“Give me but breath to answer.” - -“Make not merry. Come, let me see thine eyes.” - -Hard he tried to turn her head; but she was strong, firm. There, under -the starlight, with the noise of the talking above, and to the purling -of the water against the neighboring vessels, they both persisted, he in -holding her, and she in trying to get away. Pathetically, he continued: - -“As thou sayest, Electra, we are young in years, but thou canst not add -we are young in sorrowing. We are ages old in that we have borne!” - -Too much was this for Electra. The dreadful past at once swept over her. -She thought of that time when she had first beheld Hellen in the temple; -of the swift outgoing of her sympathy, aye, love; of those meetings in -which she had come to know of his independence, his impetuosity, his -agonies. Then her eyes suffusing, she turned to look at him—looked to -perceive the old anxiety reappearing, for again was he doubting, -fearing. And this decided her. No more suffering should be his through -her. Instantly, her struggling ceased. Then her arms got about him to -fond murmuring, - -“As if ever I could forget aught that thou hast borne. Hellen—dear -Hellen!” - -His was then the distraction of joy. In a mad way did he embrace her, -the while whispering vehemently, “Electra, as soon as we set foot in -Pelasgia, will we wed.” - -Intent upon soothing him, she answered, “Yea, yea, Hellen, we will. But -I beg thee to be calm. I worry for thee.” - -He held her close, not speaking. She subjoined in a faint tone, for the -pressure was trying, - -“Hellen, I beg, let us behave.” - -“Callest thou not this behaving?” he entreated. - -She had to laugh; and this so impaired the small quantity of breath -remaining that he was obliged to hold her more at arm’s length. And well -was it that he did. For scarcely were his arms removed than a voice was -heard above. In the next instant, Deucalion was looking over at them, -and marveling at the staid manner in which they were comporting -themselves. - -“How is it with you?” he inquired dryly. - -“Never as well, Father! Come down.” - -“I think not.” - -“But I beg thee, Father. We have somewhat to tell thee.” - -“Can it not wait?” - -“Not many moments. Come—come!” - -Therefore, Deucalion descended. When he was well steadied in the boat, -Hellen said, with due caution, “Father—but now—have I asked Electra to -be my wife.” - -Hellen had thought to overwhelm his father. But nothing of the kind, for -Deucalion only looked from one to the other with provoking coolness. “So -I judged. I knew why thou didst wish Electra to come down here. We all -did.” - -“Father!” - -“Thinkest thou we are blind? Hath it not long been clear that thyself -and Electra would come to this? It is nature, and cannot be hid.—Come, -Electra, look at me.” - -Electra, after several invitations, complied; but her eyes were -shifting, and her color high. Deucalion, that he might reassure her, -said, with much affection, “Electra, after Æole, no one could be so dear -a daughter as thou. Of this, thou shouldst be sure.” - -She murmured, “Yea, yea, I know it.” Then with more strength, added, -“And where could I find such a father?” - -“I know thy mind. We are both pleased. So now to tell those above. Now -to delight Pelop and Peloppa after thy mother.” - -“What meanest thou, Father?” - -“It is that Pelop and Peloppa, after thy mother and myself, have looked -with strong favor upon thy heart for each other.” - -Great was the astonishment of the two. “But—how knew they it, Father?” - -“Call to mind that thyself and Electra have been so bent upon this as to -be without eyes for others.” - -“True—true!” - -“Thus was I. Thy mother caused me to think of naught but herself.” - -“Then canst thou feel for us. For, will not I feel with my children when -they come to this? Ah, but they will find in me the feeling they crave, -that sweet knowledge they will believe none have known but themselves. -Yea, this my delight, will live again in theirs. Its memory, even, will -be delight. Thinkest thou not with me, Electra?” - -Scarcely could Electra reply to so much. But Deucalion spoke for her. -“Hellen, leave that which may happen in the coming years to itself. Come -back to the present. There art thou on safe ground. There can Electra -answer thee. And that she may answer, I will leave you together, while I -go to tell those above.” - -“That is it, Father. After some little time, will we follow thee.” - -“Take thy time—take thy time. Life is too short to be in a hurry.” With -these last wise words, and a merry twinkling of the eyes toward the -blushing Electra, he turned to ascend the ladder. - -But the bliss of being left to themselves was like all bliss in general. -It did not last long. Scarce seemed it a minute when Pyrrha’s voice was -heard calling to them. Thus warned, they sat up properly to await the -moment when her dear eyes should be looking down upon them. Then it was, -“Come, come, my children. Come, that I may clasp you.” - -“Ah, Mother, if thou wouldst but wait a little. I have but just begun!” - -“Hellen!” reprimanded Electra; and so comically that Deucalion, who was -peering over, burst into a laugh. This brought all the friends about him -to peer over also. Foremost was Pelop. Upon catching his roguish look, -Hellen was forced to laugh himself, though he said thereafter, -lugubriously: “Electra, up will we go. No peace is our own for this -night, I know.” - -So, up they hastened to be caressed and congratulated in Pyrrha’s -sweetest fashion, and then set upon by the friends and the rather -pensive Sensel. As to Æole, she was in such a flutter of sympathy and -delight that her lips refused duty, though her eyes answered for both: -and her blushes almost equaled Electra’s. - -High ran the enthusiasm. Then succeeded the usual calm. So it was that -the plighted ones fell to regarding each other in surprise. It seemed as -though months had passed, so much at home did they feel in this new -condition. Upon parting for the night, Electra whispered: - -“Of a truth, Hellen, it seemeth an age since we left the boat.” - -The world was now of a rare brightness to these lovers, and this -increased in quality, if possible, with the days. Sensel, beholding, -rejoiced; and yet pined with envy. Why could not he become thus positive -as regarded Æole? It was sinful further to fritter away the precious -time! He, like Hellen, must make opportunity. But how? The boat was an -old story. What could he devise instead? - -Thus he fell to planning, as his eyes followed wistfully the happy pair -that were ever moving about together. He and Æole might be as they. Yet -were the precious hours wasting. - -Not that Sensel was always following with his eyes this couple. No, it -was only at such times as Æole was not in sight; otherwise his -absorption was in her, and was ecstatic. For with the happiness that had -come about her, she had grown even lovelier; and further, seemed to -tread the air. Besides, several times had Sensel surprised her regarding -intently himself when he had turned back to look upon her—and to her -evident discomfiture. For it must be admitted that, at such times, she -was deep in thought to some such effect: - -“What a noble beauty covereth the good in Sensel! What an air, what a -movement is his! He walketh not—he soareth! Never was there such grace, -such a tread in man before. It is no wonder he could so well take his -strange part. And, can I ever cease to think upon him as Sensel? Hard is -it ever to bring to mind that he is Prince Pelasgus, harder to call him -that. Ever will he be to me Sensel—dear Sensel. And to think that his -was the voice!” - -But Sensel would have been no true, ardent lover had he not managed a -way to press his suit. His first move was to confess his love to -Deucalion, and his desire to speak with Æole. Whereupon, Deucalion -replied to the effect that he knew this was coming, and was in sympathy, -but that he could not give consent without that of King Pelasgus as he -might have other views. However, his scruples were removed when the -prince assured him it had ever been the advice of his father and mother -that he should wed for love, and seek love. He was to scorn all thought -of worldly advantage. Thus, there could be no bar to consent. His -parents would think with him, especially as his love was the daughter of -the man most revered in Pelasgia. At the end, he entreated: - -“Dear Deucalion, in this manner I ask thy help. On the morrow, in the -morning, let there be no company. Then give Hellen the word. And -afterward, go with Pyrrha to visit Queen Atlana. Thus will open the -way.” - -“Prince Pelasgus, it shall be as thou sayest.” - -“Thou dost not speak with cheer, Deucalion.” - -“For reason, dear Prince. It is no light matter to find that children -are going from one, are eager to make nests for themselves, that they -pine not to leave the home tree. Yet, how much more is the weight when -these children have been gone weary, cruel years; and make naught of -those years in the strength of new, fond feeling.” - -“Deucalion, were I the father, I should feel as thou. Yet, there is much -that is bright. For, though Æole and Hellen go from thyself and Pyrrha, -their sweetest hopes have full being. Happy art thou in that!” - -“It is well said. But it cometh hard. When thine own go from thee, thou -wilt the better know.” - -“May it come to that, dear Deucalion!” He spoke in high glee. “May it -come to that—that Æole and I may live to see our children go from us in -this way. Then will I think of this and speed them.” - -“Thou art of a kind with Peloppa,” laughed Deucalion. And then laughed -the prince. For, well had both listened to Friend Pelop: only with this -difference that the latter had listened to what concerned Hellen and -Electra alone. - -“It is great praise to be thus likened, Deucalion. Peloppa is a dear, -kind soul. Often have I wanted to listen to her when she hath taken -Pelop to one side. Well I know what are her thoughts upon the giving up -of children. Well I know what would be her words of cheer did she dream -of my hope for Æole. There would I get feeling for feeling!” - -“Did she dream of thy hope for Æole? Thinkest thou her eyes have been -open but for the other pair? Many times hath Pelop come to whisper what -she hath noted, and how warm is her heart for thee. Well is everything -for you two settled in her busy mind!” - -This left Prince Pelasgus without words. As he stood thus routed, -Deucalion, smiling roguishly, turned away. - -“Dear Prince, I will leave thee to think upon it.” - -As to the visiting, it had been well kept up in these day of calm -sailing. For, as the vessels stood at no great height above the water, -it was easy to get from one to the other, especially as certain -ingenious ladders had been made by the sailors. But, if the visiting -went on briskly, even more briskly moved the Pelasgian tongues. - -The next morning, Deucalion spoke with Hellen; and then took Pyrrha over -to the queen. Thus the four young people were left to themselves in the -cabin, Æole and Electra being busied in needlework, and Sensel and -Hellen interested in watching them. - -But they had not long enjoyed this when Hellen, with abruptness, spoke -fast, “Electra, it cometh to me that I would see the captain. Wilt thou -come?” - -She at once arose, the while apologizing, “Æole, we will come back ere a -little.” - -Then out they hastened. And Sensel arose as if to look after them. But, -chancing to turn before he reached the door, he again met Æole’s -eloquent look. - -He went toward her. “What is it, Æole?” - -Though somewhat confused, she answered calmly, “Sensel—Prince Pelasgus—I -was wondering at thy manner of moving. Whence is it?” - -He sat down beside her. “Æole, as a child, I was strong and quick. As a -youth, I was first in the games. It is a gift.” - -“Well didst thou bear thy part. After that, I shall ever feel kind to -their serpent selves. And, that well-streaked garment of dust, where is -it?” - -“It is laid away, ever to be kept.” - -“It is good. But thine eyes, they puzzle me. Though they shine now, they -shone even more then. They knew how to pierce. And thy skin was less -fair.” - -“It was but a little coloring for both.” - -“How often do Electra and I talk of thy kind deeds to us. Thou wert ever -ready, never weary.” - -“Was it not delight to serve thee and her?” - -“But—the priests. Strange it seemed that they should look so much to -thee.” - -“I was quick. They were sluggish—as were the serving men.” - -“Though Electra and myself were firm in the thought that thou wert our -friend—yet there was every reason for believing thee the helper of the -king and high priest.” - -“I wonder that they so soon looked to me. But thy father willed it. Thou -knowest his power.” - -“And thy mastery of the Atlantean tongue. Well was it ye were able to -speak it before we were called to the temple.” - -“Couldst thou have seen thy father and myself at our study when the -noise and mirth of the temple were over for the night!” - -She shivered at the words _noise and mirth_. Then said low, “Often have -I wanted to ask thee why thou didst watch us from behind that thicket.” - -“I was there at wish of thy father. He feared Atlano might send spies -upon you. Further, I wished to speak with Hellen.” - -“Were there spies?” - -“Twice, far off, I saw figures; but, as I bounded toward them, they -fled.” - -“What a mercy! And what good did thy words do Hellen. Dear Hellen, what -he hath borne! But he forgetteth, now that he is thus happy.” - -He looked at her intently. “Æole, hast thou ever witnessed any as happy -as himself and Electra?” - -“Never have I been with two that have promised to wed. But there are my -mother and father, Pelop and Peloppa.” - -“Mighty is such feeling; and mightiest, if answered.” - -Æole, affected at his tone, looked at him to find that he was gazing at -her very strangely. If ever eyes were full of love, his were. And he was -seizing her hand. The moment had come. Oh, for time to speak! - -“Æole, thou must know why I spoke thus of Hellen and Electra. They are -one pair. There should be another. We should be as they. Tell me that -thou carest for me. For ever since I first beheld thee in the temple -hath my heart gone out to thee. Only thou canst be my wife!” - -Her hands were pressed hard in his, her little hands, that, like her -whole body, were trembling; and her face had become as a lily. Scarcely -could she support herself. Perceiving this, he relinquished the hands, -and put his arms about her. - -But Æole, rallying, entreated, “Prince Pelasgus, I ask that thou wilt -take away thine arms. Thou hast not had leave to place them thus. And -hearken, I beseech thee.” - -He withdrew his arms. “To good words will I hearken. Can aught else come -from thee? Say but the _yea_, first, dear Æole. Then will I hearken the -day long!” - -“As if thou hadst not spoken words that bring me joy—in speaking as thou -hast, in asking me for thy wife—words that would bring _yea_ but for -this.” Here she was obliged to repress his ardor, and with difficulty. -“Thy father is the king. His will thou shouldst know I ask thee to wait -until thou hast spoken with him.” - -“Afterward will I speak with him. Where is thy yea?” - -“Think—thou art the son of the king.” - -“I do think of it. And now am I most honoring him! Ever hath my father -said I should be free in my choice, his own happy life so bearing upon -him. Further, such is the custom of the Pelasgians, high and low. They -wed as did the people of the Golden Age. There is tender thought before -all else. It is such thought in wedlock that causeth their sun to shine -on happy days, their moon and stars to light sweet nights of rest. Ah, -our Pelasgia is the land of lands! And Heaven, after Atlantis!—But, thou -tremblest, Æole. Wrong am I to name that island. Rather will I speak of -the feeling my father hath for thine. None doth he honor as Deucalion! -Then is thy doubt gone. There is no other?” - -“Prince Pelasgus, that was my one doubt.” - -He drew her to him, and neither spoke for a little. Then he said: - -“Æole, I went to Atlantis, out of the feeling I bore thy father. Little -thought I that it could hold the one of all the world for me! But, at -the moment of first beholding thee, there was such a springing up of -strong, fond wish for thee that I became stricken with fear that such -might be for naught, that thou wouldst feel for me but pity, because of -my looks and state. Ah, what I bore! Tell me, dear Æole, that thou didst -not feel thus.” - -“Sensel, from the first was I drawn to thee, and often did I wonder over -my feelings. But when thou didst bear me from the temple to the chariot -of the queen, then I knew—knew how dear wert thou. And how hath it -grown. Should we be parted, life would be more than an Atlantis of -sorrow!” - -His beautiful eyes moistened. He whispered, “It hath come, it hath -come!” - -Long they communed before Æole bethought her of the two that had gone -off to speak with the captain. “Where can they be?” she exclaimed. - -“Who?” - -“Hellen and Electra. Never have I thought of them!” - -“It is with thought they are staying away.” - -“What meanest thou?” - -“When Hellen took off Electra, he meant not to come back. Without doubt, -he hath made it known to her; and she, of her feeling, hath asked that -they visit the queen.” - -“What hath he made known to her?” - -“That I wished to be alone with thee.” - -“Didst thou speak thus to Hellen?” - -“Nay; but thy father did.” - -“My father!” - -“Yea; thy father.” - -“Why should my father do thus?” - -“Because I told him my wish. Because I asked him to go away with thy -mother, and bid Hellen take off Electra. Thus could I have thee alone.” - -“Wouldst thou tell me this is a plot?” - -“Call it what thou wilt, dear Æole. If plot, it is my plot. And full as -good is it as the way Hellen took. Yea, even better, for look how long I -have had thee to myself in this the beginning of our bliss.” - -“Sensel!” More than volumes was in her tone as she arose. - -“Æole, much doth that air become thee. Have a care!” - -She looked down upon him in rebuke, and full of enjoyment was he over -her dignity. - -“Prince Pelasgus, thou didst plot with my father!” - -“I did, Æole. Firm was I to have thee to myself, for I was wild for this -thy sweet word. And now have I it! As to thy father, ah the delight of -his feeling for me, and better, his furthering! Moreover, there is the -feeling, the furthering of Hellen. Did he not hasten off with Electra? -Thus hath it come to pass. Thus have I thy word to be mine forever!” - -He also had arisen. - -“And thou thinkest I can bear to be plotted about? I have the thought to -take back my word. It hath gone too soon. Yea, I will have it again. -Sensel, give it to me.” - -“Atlantis will rise ere I yield it! Ah, but I should like well to have -thee take it back, though.” He had now caught her to him. “Yea, dear -Æole, much should I like thee to take it back—for only with me will it -go!” - - - - - CHAPTER XXI. - IN PELASGIA. - - -Fast were they nearing the dear Pelasgian coast. And jubilant became -those returning. Hardly seemed it reality when they began to thread the -islands off-lying their land. But the exuberance of feeling was hidden -because of the sad-eyed Atlanteans, whose vessels followed dispiritedly. -Thus, the Pelasgians hugged their joy to themselves. Never had the sky -been a blue so deep, never the water so calm and tender, never the -islands so enchanting, never the breezes so odorous. For home was near. - -But the morning before entering harbor, this happened. - -Deucalion called Pyrrha to their small sleeping room, and when none -could hear, said: “Pyrrha, thou knowest that, since a little before the -sinking of Atlantis, my strange sight hath failed me. Thus, I thought it -had gone from me. But, a few minutes since, whilst sitting here thinking -upon our present happy state, again I saw clearly.” He paused, overcome. - -“Deucalion, what is it?” - -“Pyrrha, I saw our harbor lying waste, as though many waters had rushed -upon it. Naught was left. Houses, vessels, landings—all were gone. In a -flash it passed before me. But, ah how plain! Pyrrha, our harbor is a -ruin. The floods have swept it!” - -She was stricken with fear. “Deucalion, never hath that strange inner -sight failed thee. What thou didst behold in that moment, _is_!” - -“Pyrrha, I was not thinking of home. I was dwelling upon our life on -this vessel—when it came upon me.” - -“It is a strange, a dread power. Thinkest thou it cometh of some fine, -airy force of the spirit?” - -“It may. But what is that force?” - -She mused a little to brighten and say confidently, “Could it be -that—that—for the moment—thy spirit leaveth its shell—and, as in a -flash—traveleth far—and back? That, in this, is thine inner sight?” - -He was surprised. “Pyrrha, thou mayest have it. I have wondered much if -the sight of my body dulled before the sight of the spirit. It is in my -mind that the cares of the body hamper the spirit; but, if such cares -become as naught, the spirit hath full power, and then are the inner -sight and hearing opened. Again, I have questioned whether this strange -sight cometh not of some hidden force of matter. Ah, it doth confound -me!—For, all things are as air before it. They stand not in the way, -however far the seeing. - -“Yea—yea—either the spirit flasheth out and back, or the sight of the -body giveth way to this second sight, this seeing of the spirit. When at -war, how often did I see thee. When our children were in Atlantis, how -often were they before me. And, when I was in Atlantis, how often I saw -thee, until a little ere I left. Then did this inner sight fail me. Thus -became I worried over thee—to fall into doubt. Why could I not see thee -then? Nor afterward?” - -“Thy spirit was so torn with the evils about thee, the dangers besetting -the children, the risk in setting them free, that it could not become -calm enough to see.” - -“That is it. Though, through all was I sure that I would master. Yet, -the dread.” - -“Thou art but man. Therefore must hope join hands with dread, at times. -But tell me, why, if the children were so much before thee when in -Atlantis, didst thou not know of the Pelasgian speech of the queen?” She -smiled through her tears, hoping to tease him a little. - -But he was ready. “Smile, if thou wilt, Pyrrha. Then will I. It was not -every day that I could see them; but only on those days when Atlantean -was spoken. Thou wilt call to mind that thou didst tell me the talk of -one day was in Atlantean, the next in Pelasgian.” - -“Ah, but thou hast the last! As I might have known. Never art thou at a -loss!” - -“Not whilst thou art of earth, Pyrrha. All is gain, cheer, with thee -beside me. And now wilt thou do thy best. For my heart faileth.” - -“Yet here am I jesting, smiling.” - -“It is well. But, ah, the vision! How plain was it. Thus are we warned. -But woe to Prince Pelasgus!” - -“What is it?” - -“His father is not of earth. He is with his wife above.” - -“Deucalion!” - -“Yea, yea, I feel it. Call to mind that I felt the ruin that was to come -upon Atlantis: and, that with all, I should save our children. Call to -mind that I felt their state in Atlantis even before my inner sight -showed such. Think how often I saw them afterward when under the care of -the queen. Did not I picture the queen? Did not I tell thee of their -daily life?” - -“Thou didst—thou didst!” - -“And—I felt—even before I saw.” - -“I call it to mind.” - -“So now I feel this about the king and queen.” - -“Wilt thou tell the prince?” - -“Ah, Pyrrha—he is so happy.” - -“Wouldst thou have me tell him?” - -“We will wait, and think upon it.” - -The two, dejected, sat down to ponder. After a little, Deucalion -concluded, “Pyrrha, this night will I speak with him. Let him spend one -more day of joy. Before he seeketh his couch will I warn him.” - -“I know thou wilt cheer him. Ah, what misery is ever ready to swoop upon -us of earth! Here are these poor Atlanteans with grief sorely checking -their pulses, beginning to rouse a little. Their sluggish hearts are -quickening. And to what? To further misery, further death of hope. Ah, -our own misery will be as naught beside theirs!” - -“True—true. It doth confound me.” - -Too soon came the night. When all had parted for rest, the unhappy -Deucalion led the prince aside that he might relate the vision. The -latter, though greatly shaken, could not bring himself to accept it, but -again and again insisted: - -“Deucalion, thou art wrong. For once, mayst thou be wrong. I cannot -believe. Our dear harbor, the vessels that have done such service, the -homes, the lives!” - -Deucalion was agonized; and his pallor was extreme. - -“Deucalion, be not thus wrought. Let mine be the sorrow. Enough hast -thou borne.” - -“It may be that I should not have told thee.” - -“Thou hast my thanks. Should the worst come, I am ready. Shouldst thou -be wrong, should our harbor welcome us in its pride, there is the more -cause for joy.” - -Deucalion looked upon him piteously; then taking his hand kissed it. -“Dear Prince,” he wept, “Dear Prince!” - -“Thou hast more to tell, Deucalion? My father, my mother—is it well with -them?” - -“Dear Prince, it is well with them—too well.” - -“Too well?” - -“I fear it.” - -“Thou hast seen?” - -“Nay, I have but felt.” - -“Ah—I know what that meaneth!” - -The words came in gasps. He turned aside, forlorn. But Deucalion, -seizing his hands, besought. “May I be wrong—may I be wrong!” - -The prince shook his head. A deathly paleness was upon him, and he began -to totter. Deucalion, as he sustained him, implored him not to be -overcome; and led him to a couch. Here he remained as if in stupor; but, -erelong, stood up, himself, calm and resolute. - -“Deucalion, I will look for the worst. But will beseech thou mayst be -wrong.” - -Then, under the stars, the two walked and whispered through the dreary -night. - -Early the next morning, they drew nigh the harbor. Almost was the moment -at hand when the dear port in its tranquillity and beauty would gladden -their eyes. Eagerly did the strangers, as well as the returning ones, -await the first glimpse of this lauded haven. - -And it came. - -They looked to see—the peaceful bay, the busy landings, the speeding or -quiescent vessels, the houses, the hurrying figures of the port, the -glory of the distant hills?— - -Alas, they saw them not! - -What was this? In mistake had they entered some unknown bay that had -been scourged by the furious elements? Yon hills were blasted. This was -not their tranquil harbor, their happy port! Where were the vessels, the -houses, the active figures, the smiling hills? This place was a -nightmare! - -Almost frenzied, strangers and returning ones looked about them—all save -Deucalion and Prince Pelasgus who stood frozen. - -But—on went the vessels—the fact growing upon the horrified beholders -that some mighty rush of waters must have swept the place—this harbor -they had hoped to enter, some in resignation, some in exultation. For, -trunks of trees, pieces of houses, portions of vessels, everywhere began -to impede their progress. Soon were descried the floating remains of -animals—and later, here and there a gruesome remnant of humanity. At -sight of the first of the latter, the women fled shrieking below. The -men could but remain to gaze mute, despairing, heartsick. And some, in -derision, thought, “Is this the haven of peace promised the stricken -Atlanteans?”—It was a mockery. - -But on they went, their eyes fastened on the wrecked haven, the ruined -hills, until Deucalion ordered, - -“We will turn yonder point.” - -It was done. They rounded this to perceive, in a sheltered cove, a few -vessels and some apparently hastily constructed cots on the shore. They -shouted. And figures appeared on the vessels to answer lustily. Then -spoke Prince Pelasgus: - -“Deucalion, come with me into the boat that we may question them. Let -the vessels rest.” - -At the order, the vessels paused. Then Deucalion and the prince moved -off in the fantastic boat. Upon reaching the nearest vessel, Deucalion, -at behest of the prince, called, “We would speak with the captain.” - -The captain proclaimed himself. Deucalion asked, “Sir Captain, when came -the flood?” - -“Sir, the flood came the full of the moon four moons since.” - -“It was then Atlantis sank,” whispered the prince. - -Deucalion continued, “Sir Captain, tell us of it.” - -“Sir, these vessels here lying have since come into harbor from their -voyages. This they found. Now we wait for others, when we will build -again the port. Some of yonder vessels look Pelasgian; and thou art of -us. Tell me, when sailed thy vessels? And greeting to them, and thee. So -much will every vessel and every man help to bring the port to itself.” - -The prince now spoke. “Thou wilt find us but too glad to help. But, Sir -Captain, I would question thee. Do any of the port live?” - -“Not one liveth.” - -“Doth the king know?” - -“The king! Ah, the king lieth low!” - -“What sayest thou?” - -“The king, with some of his mighty men, was tenting in a vale to the -north of this place. There the sudden torrents came upon them, there -broke upon them the spouts of water from the hills, there were they -swept to death!” - -“How knowest thou?” - -“Two of the mighty men who were on the mountains above the vale hunting, -and who had gone within a cave to rest, are the sole living ones. They -are ill in yon cot. They beheld the waters rush upon the fleeing ones.” - -“The queen?” - -“The queen had been one week dead. They had but come from her burial in -the country above.” - -“They are together, then,” moaned the prince. “It is well. Ah, my -father! I see thee—running—followed fast by the cruel waters!” - -“Thy father! Thou art not the prince?” - -The prince threw aside his mantle. “Sir Captain Pelio of Magnesia, thou -canst but know me.” - -The captain sank upon his knees, as did his officers and sailors. Of -their quickness, the observing ones on the neighboring vessels did -likewise. Indeed, others of the captains were familiar with the looks of -the prince. - -When the prince had bidden them arise, Captain Pelio spoke out loud, and -in reverence: - -“Thou art our king! We had begun to fear thou wouldst not come back. -Long mayst thou live—and in our hearts—as did thy father!” - -“Ah, king it is. If it could but be ‘Sir Prince’!—But, Sir Captain, tell -me of my father.” - -“King Pelasgus, I would tell thee this. Think not that thy father ran -from the waters. Ah, no. From the heights, the two mighty men beheld him -meet the waters as if in glad greeting. He tried not to fly as did the -others.” - -“It is no wonder, with my mother gone.” - -He was so weak and trembling, and hoarse of voice, that Deucalion put -his arm about him, and asked for him, “Sir Captain, where lieth the body -of the king?” - -“It lieth beside that of the queen.” - -Deucalion was trembling sorely, but the bowed figure of the prince -forced him to continue. “Sir Captain, as thou seest, the prince, our -king, is weak of his grief. If I am faint, what is his state. It is best -we go back to our vessels for this day; but, on the morrow, we will see -thee and all, again. And now, for the prince, I thank thee.” - -The captain bowed low. Of his pity, he could not speak. - -Gently did Deucalion seat the pliant prince. Then, after waving -farewell, he speeded off. Hard, hard was it to watch the suffering in -this face so dear, harder to note the dryness of the eyes, the rocking -of the body. And no reply could he get upon speaking. In anguish rowed -Deucalion on. - -He reached the vessel to find Æole bending over its side, pale, -resolved; and surely she comprehended, from her eyes. - -“Father,” she said in lowest tone, “Father, I will come down, after thou -hast come up.” - -“It is well.” - -He ascended, and assisted her. When almost at the bottom of the ladder, -she spoke: - -“Help me, Sensel.” - -This dear voice aroused him. He stood, and held out his arms. Into these -she crept, knowing well how to comfort him. Then she coaxed him to sit -down beside her that they might talk. With her hand in his, and no -thought for the eyes upon them, she whispered, “What is it, Sensel?” - -Little by little, he related the sad story. At the end, she was weeping. -Distressed, he begged her not to be overcome. But the tears were as much -for himself as for the evil news, so changed was he from the happy, -ardent, brilliant Sensel who had so fondly dwelt upon his hopes only the -night before. - -He begged her to grow calm, whereupon she cried the more giving this as -reason, “How can I not weep when I behold thee in such grief?” - -Then started the tears in his own eyes; and they wept together, to their -comforting. Thus does nature afford compensation. - -But shortly they were drawn from this by calls from Queen Atlana’s -galley, and looked to find Deucalion was beckoning to them. So Prince -Pelasgus began to row to him, when near enough receiving this as -explanation: - -“I have but just brought hither, Pyrrha. And the queen would speak with -thee, dear Prince.” - -When aboard, the prince with Æole, hastened beneath the awning where sat -the queen and Pyrrha. Then talked lovingly, consolingly, these two women -who had known so much of sorrow. Long, with Æole’s hand in his, sat the -prince—to watch the gruesome hills, the floating timbers. And finally he -said: - -“Deucalion, on the morrow, will we go where my father and mother are -laid. Then for my duty to Pelasgia.” - - * * * * * - -After King Pelasgus had knelt beside the tomb of his parents, he -repaired with Deucalion to Thessaly, which had been undisturbed by the -flood. In his beloved Larissa, Deucalion was joyously welcomed; and the -king was hailed with loving fealty. Though, only for a little, could -King Pelasgus tarry with Æole, as for a brief season, he must return to -the port, which was already rebuilding. - -Deucalion’s Thessalian compatriots would have accorded him godlike -honors upon learning of his adventures, his successes; and hard he found -it to convince them he was but mortal. As to Pyrrha, they had always -adored her. She was their goddess, indeed. - -Here, in Thessaly, the ardent Hellen speedily married Electra. Here, in -Thessaly, King Pelasgus won his bride. Here continued Queen Atlana and -Pyrrha in sisterly devotion, death parting them but a brief spell when -advanced in years, Atlana going first. Here, the polished Atlanteans -introduced their language, arts, and ancient purity of religion—a few -generations later finding the two races merged in the cultured Hellenes, -and speaking a tongue, the Æolic, very different from either Atlantean -or Pelasgian. Indeed, this Æolic may be said to bear the same relation -to the Pelasgian that English does to the Anglo-Saxon; and it, in turn, -has colored the various dialects of Greece since existing. - -Here, in Thessaly, Deucalion continued chief among his countrymen; and -finally became their king at behest of King Pelasgus. Here to himself -and Pyrrha was born another son, the hero Amphictyon and the originator -of the famous Amphictyonic Council that so long held the Greek tribes -together in a bond surviving even their independence. Here, Hellen -succeeded his father; and from him sprang that great race of the -Hellenes that gave Greece its ancient name of _Hellas_. - -Here were born Hellen’s sons, Æolus, Doris, and Xuthus; and Xuthus’ -sons, Ion and Achæus. Here, Æolus was king after Hellen; and from here -spread his descendants over Central Greece as far as the Isthmus of -Corinth, even occupying the western coast of the Peloponnesus. From this -central region branched the great divisions of the Hellenic race, the -Dorians, the Æolians, the Ionians, and the Achæans. - -King Pelasgus missed not the portion of his kingdom given over to -Deucalion—for his also, was the mighty spiritual kingdom of love; and -Æole was its queen as well as queen of the natural kingdom. The mighty -kingdom was theirs for eternity. Over the natural, they reigned long and -well, ever furthering the progress of the Atlantean industries. - -Thus, the arts flourished especially in Thessaly; and the Atlantean -industries in the New Pelasgia. Whilst commerce became supreme. - -And, from the union of these primeval Pelasgians and the more cultivated -Hellenes, generations afterward, sprang a people that were the fathers -of the great intellectual Grecian race of antiquity. - - - - - NOTES. - - -“Atlantis, according to the tradition of the Greek geographers, a large -island in the Atlantic Ocean to the west of the northwest coast of -Africa and the Pillars of Hercules. It was fabled to possess a numerous -population begotten by Neptune of mortal women. The sea-kings of -Atlantis were said to have invaded the west of Europe and Africa, and to -have been defeated by the Athenians and their allies. The inhabitants -finally became desperately wicked, and the island was swept away by a -deluge. Plato mentions the island in his ‘Timæus.’ On the old Venetian -maps, Atlantis is put to the west of the Azores and Canaries.”—_The -American Cyclopedia._ - -_Atlantis._—“Now, in the island of Atlantis there was a great and -wonderful empire, which had rule over the whole island, and several -others, as well as over parts of the Continent; and besides these, they -subjected the parts of Libya within the Columns of Heracles as far as -Egypt, and of Europe as far as Tyrrhenia. The vast power thus gathered -into one, endeavored to subdue at one blow our country and yours, and -the whole of the land which was within the straits; and then, Solon, -your country shone forth, in the excellence of her virtue and strength, -among all mankind; for she was the first in courage and military -skill.... And when the rest fell off from her, she defeated and -triumphed over the invaders.... - -“But afterward there occurred violent earthquakes and floods, and in a -single day and night of rain all your warlike men in a body sank into -the earth; and the island of Atlantis in like manner disappeared, and -was sunk beneath the sea.”—Plato’s “Timæus”—_per_ “Atlantis.” - -_Athens._—“For there was a time, Solon, before that great deluge of all, -when the city which now is Athens was first in war, and was preëminent -for the excellence of her laws, and is said to have performed the -noblest deeds, and to have had the fairest constitution of any of which -tradition tells, under the face of heaven.”—Plato’s “Timæus,” _per_ -“Atlantis.” - -_Pelasgians._—“Amidst all the obscurity that hangs about the name of the -Pelasgians, it is admitted that they were the earliest known inhabitants -both of Greece and Southern Italy—at least of the Indo-Germanic stock; -for throughout Europe, as well as Asia, there appears to have been a -still earlier population. Now we are distinctly told that the whole -seaboard of Ionia and the neighboring islands was formerly peopled by -Pelasgians. They are enumerated by Homer among the allies of the -Trojans; Herodotus found traces of them on the Propontis, and Agathias -in Caria; and the name Magnesia, which occurs twice in Lydia, as well as -in Thessaly, seems to be certainly as Pelasgic. They were found in the -islands of the Ægean from Samothrace, Imbros and Lemnos, in the north, -to Crete, in the south, as well as in the Cyclades, which form the -natural stepping-stones from Asia Minor to the Peloponnesus. Hence, they -seem to have passed from one continent to the other both round the head -of the Ægean and across its islands; and, accordingly, the chief -remnants of the race after they were overpowered by the Hellenes, are -found in Thessaly, in Epirus, in Attica, and in the heart of Acadia. -From Greece they passed over to Southern Italy; where, perhaps, the -‘golden age of Saturn’ is a tradition of the peaceful agricultural -character which is everywhere attributed to the Pelasgians, in contrast -to the piratical habits of the Carians and Leleges. It remains, however, -a question whether the Pelasgi were a branch of the Phrygian migration, -or a still earlier movement of the Indo-European race from their -primeval seats. The latter seems highly probable; but, at all events the -two races were very nearly akin, and it is hardly practicable to -distinguish their migrations.”—“_The Ancient History of the East_,” by -_Philip Smith, B. A._ - -“The _Hellenes_ and the _Pelasgi_ are the two races identified with -Greece’s earliest traditions; but when we appeal to history for their -origin, or seek for the part that each has played in the majestic drama -of antiquity, there is little more than conjecture to guide us.”—Nott -and Gliddon’s “Types of Mankind,” page 103. - -_Deucalion and Pyrrha._—“Deucalion married Pyrrha, daughter of -Epimetheus and Pandora. Zeus determined to destroy the degenerate race -of man, but Deucalion and Pyrrha, on account of their piety, were -preserved. Deucalion built a ship, in which he and Pyrrha floated in -safety, while a nine days’ flood devastated Hellas.” - -_Hellen._—“The sons of the above were Hellen and Amphictyon. Hellen was -king of Phthia in Thessaly. Amphictyon was said to have founded the -Amphictyonic of Thermopylae.”—Scull’s “Greek Mythology Systematized.” - -_Deucalion and Pyrrha._—“Deucalion, king of Phthia, in Thessaly, son of -Prometheus and Clymene. According to tradition, being forewarned by his -father of an approaching deluge, he built a ship in which he and his -wife Pyrrha were saved from an inundation which destroyed all the rest -of mankind,” etc.—The American Cyclopedia. - -_Hellen._—“The Greeks were fond of tracing their origin back to a common -ancestor, Hellen, the son of Deucalion and Pyrrha who were the survivors -of a deluge,” etc.—Page 107, Vol. VIII, American Cyclopedia. - -_Orichalcum._—“That which is now only a name, and was then something -more than a name—orichalcum—was dug out of the earth in many parts of -the island, and, with the exception of gold, was esteemed the most -precious of metals among the men of those days.”—Plato. - -_Spiral._—“A favorite design of the men of the Bronze Age in Europe is -the spiral or double spiral form.”... “We find the same figure in an -ancient fragment of pottery from the Little Colorado.”... “The same -design is also found in ancient rock etchings of the Zunis of New -Mexico.”—Ignatius Donnelly. - -_Handmaid._—“And Laban gave unto his daughter Leah, Zilpah his maid, for -an handmaid.”—Genesis xxix: 24. - -_Feather Robes._—The Maya nobles of ancient Yucatan wore fine robes of -feather work on all occasions.—Author. - -_Magnet._—“The Phœnicians were familiar with the use of the magnet. At -the prow of their vessels stood the figure of a woman (Astarte) holding -a cross in one hand and pointing the way with the other; the cross -represented the compass, which was a magnetized needle, floating in -water crosswise upon a piece of reed or wood.”—Ignatius Donnelly. - ------ - -Footnote 1: - - Dog-headed apes. - -Footnote 2: - - Chimu—in Peru. - -Footnote 3: - - Ireland. - -Footnote 4: - - Mediterranean. - -Footnote 5: - - Bank of Mississippi (east). - -Footnote 6: - - Eskaldi—Iberians, in Gaul—Basques. - -Footnote 7: - - Egypt. - -Footnote 8: - - Spain. - -Footnote 9: - - Plato. - -Footnote 10: - - These less ancient names will be used for convenience. - -Footnote 11: - - Port of Athens. - -Footnote 12: - - The Berbers of North Africa. - -Footnote 13: - - Iberians (in Gaul) same as Basques. - -Footnote 14: - - Spain. - -Footnote 15: - - Africa. - -Footnote 16: - - Faith—fidelity. - -Footnote 17: - - Plato’s “Timæus.” - -Footnote 18: - - Plato. - -Footnote 19: - - Common jugglery is said to have originated in Egypt; and been thence - introduced into Greece. - -Footnote 20: - - Sharpe’s History of Egypt. - -Footnote 21: - - Plato. - -Footnote 22: - - Ignatius Donnelly, in “Atlantis.” - -Footnote 23: - - Donnelly’s “Atlantis.” - -Footnote 24: - - Gases. - -Footnote 25: - - The Azores—according to Donnelly. - ------------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - - TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES - - - 1. Silently corrected obvious typographical errors and variations in - spelling. - 2. Retained archaic, non-standard, and uncertain spellings as printed. - 3. Re-indexed footnotes using numbers and collected together at the end - of the last chapter. - 4. Enclosed italics font in _underscores_. - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK POSEIDON’S PARADISE *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |